*> S>^%% IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) v/ // .// .V ..> C> y. f/. fA ^ 1.0 I.I 1.25 illM 2.2 ;: Pis III 2.0 1.8 U il.6 V] <^)> A? /a ^. VI Uy% Photographic Sciences Corporation €3 «v -^-V; \ \ ^9> V ^\. 4^ *> ^ <^ ^' ^^^ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY. 14S80 (7)6) 872-4503 £j- ! :^- CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut canadien de microreproductions historiques Technical and Bibliographic Notes/Notes techniques et bibliographiques The Institute has attempted to obtain the best original copy available for filming. Features of this copy which may be bibliographically unique, which may alter any of the images in the reproduction, or which may significantly change the usual method of filming, are checked below. u Coloured covers/ Couverture de couleur I I Covers damaged/ Couverture endommagee j i Covers restored and/or laminated/ I 1 Couverture restaurAe et/ou pelllculee □ Cover title missing/ Le titre de couverture manque I I Colourj^ maps/ D n n Cartes gAographiques en couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre da couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) I I Coloured plates and/or illustrations/ Planches et/ou illustrations en couleur □ Bouni RellA Bound with other material/ avec d'autras documents Tight binding may causa shadows or distortion along interior margin/ La'eliure serree peut causer de I'ombra ou de la distorsion le long da la marge interieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within the text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certaines pages blanches ajoutAes lors d una restauration apparaissent dans le texta. mais. lorsque cela Atait possible, ces pages n'ont pas m film^as. Additional comments:/ Commentaires supplementaires L'Instltut a microfilma le meilleur exemplaire qu il lui a ete possible de se procurer Les details de cct exemplaire qui sont peut-^tre uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier una iniaga reproduite, ou qui peuvent exige- one modification dans la m^thoda norm&le de filmage sont indiqu^s '^i-dessous. I I Coloured ^ ,9s/ Pages da cuulaur Pages damaged/ Pages endommageas C Pages restored and/or laminated/ Pages restaurees et/ou pelliculaes Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ Pages dacolorees. tachetAes ou piquees □Pages detached/ Pages detachees HShowthrough/ Transparence □ Quality of print varie Qualite in^gale da 11 as/ mpression □ Includes supplementary material/ Comprend du material supplamentaire □ Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible □ Pages wholly or partially obscured by errata slips, tissues, etc , have been ref limed to ensure the best possible image/ Les pages totalement ou partiellement obscurcies par un fe jillet d'errata. une pelure, etc., cnt *te fiimies i nouveau de facon a obtenir la meilleure image possible This item is filmed at the reduction ratio checked below/ Ce document est film* au taux de reduction indiqu* ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 22X / 26X 30X 12X 1«X 20X 24X 28X 32X Is u ifier ne iga The copy filmed here has been reproduced thar>ks to the generosity of: Harold Campball Vaughan Mamorial Library Acadia Univenity The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legibility of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol ^*> (meaning "CON- TINUED"), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. L'exemplaire film* fut reprcduit grAce ii la g*n6rositA de: Kardd Campball Vaughan Mamorial Library Acadia Univariity Les images suivantes ont 6ti reproduites avec le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition at de la nettetA de rexemplaire film*, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimAe sont film^s en commenpant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernlAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par lo second plat, salon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont film^s en commenpant par la premiAre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. Un des symboles suivants apparaltra sur la derniire image de cheque microfiche, selon le cas: le symbols — ^ signifie "A SUiVRE ", le symbols V signifie "FIN". ta ] Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrams illustrate the method; 1 2 3 Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvsnt Atre film^s it des taux de reduction diffArents. Lorsque le document est trop grand pour Atre reproduit en un seul cliche, il est filmA A partir de Tangle supArieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images nAcessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la m^thode. 1 2 3 4 5 6 >v FI O O E R :v d OP TBI INTENDED TO SUPPLY DEFICIENCIES IN MURRAY'S GRAMMAR. eoWTAIXINO OOPXOVS EZE&0X8S8. MANY NEW ARRANGEMENTS, FOR THE USE OF SCHOOLS. BT WILLIAM LOWBSK. HALIFAX, N. 8. fmjrilD BY JAM2S SPIKE— ORANVILLE-ilRlW. 1836. f PREFACE. «'»'** 1 them hemg retained as were sufhcient'to point out vhere the errors U SijnUu- were. This has been lono, bofh to prevent the work from swelling to too i;reatasize, and to confine the attention of the earner to a sn.all space, to thai, which was most necessary for him to Know, viz. therein the en-or >r uiipruprubj lay. I( may perhaps bo objected to thU work, that ['," ""'"'■" "''K"'^^ »<• Svntax in it, are too many. ^.en com„„reJ ,o the paucity of Murray. M.ny " ehe.e Rules, Blnrray had ranlied as subordinate o l,er.,, but the Author tl,inks, that by his plac- ng them separately, thay will both be better under- ktood and .noro readily remembered, than to remain » Murray had placed them. Some rules indeed are ».,!""''' ^^"*"''^^"-^ "hich ho-yever are wrtamly necessary, though overjookcd by hira. *^- rnF.FACE. The Author thinks he has omitle.l nothin' l-cftfrs - - •■^vllablcs - ^^ ords - - f''rVMO[.0(7v . . OJtlio /\j(iclps ►Substantives (jdidcr - - . ^^'uruhcr - . <^-'ase - _ . Adjectives - . Pronouna - . Itclativc Pro- ) nouns I Adjective do. |J'-\erciscs in Far- } sin a *• or Verbs - „ •0"j ligation of To ) Have ( I'o lie - ' '1 Auxiliary \"erbs ^'ii-st^ (;onjn .^ration V arietj J G 7 3 4 1(J 10 1 I /■I i;{ ];/ 2 J Jj CM 21 •J .9 ;!,'; 11 •n •J7 48 '!:» ^'onjiinration ol' > I'o Love ( To be Loved .Sccondarv Con- / \ 'ligation ane f < .'fy I ' ) S ncdunifant Verbs Dcleciive do. i^xercises on do. O/" Adverbs " l^repositions Conjunctions - I' fntorjections Exercises on Ad- ^ verbs ( Prepo^jitions Conjiuiefions interjections -N^oiin Adjec- i tivo and Ac- tive A'cib ^ Adjectives impcrt: Par- / ticipie ^ -Venter \>r!,.- Passive Ifiiporative I .- r> ')2 .37 67 Of «i6 G7 <■;.'{ 70 7f 77 V.() in do. iUood S VI. '"OM LS rs. j: xorciscs on Re, ^ I'a<;k. J^O. k K Word ( eintive What 8; 3 COIU- pi'unclcd witl Wh( Wl and BL> jat N J i>ominnMve, &.C. !!:> In the same | ^vords bein" i din; rent pai is j Ol 1) ot Speech J cnvalion >V.\TAX - Rulp 1 3 JO u M 1'^ 18 '20 Oi.> f(7 102 104 10 1 1 10 i 13 111 110 1 18 119 1 20 JJI 12:i IJl 12~) 121 uy 131 i.;i 1.33 1.37 1.38 p 1.^9 liiilc <( !.'•; ..'1} 21) MO 32 33 3} 3u 37 38 3M 40 11 I,! 13 44 4(; 40 .00 8 " .01 Promiscuous l\. ^rciscs of I'aisc Syntax pecunons ofp, SllJir Q u<^s(ion.s lor ]•; ftmiuatjoa ir- f ny 17!) 182 1 [;3 ' 1!>1 1!I2 I'.i.-) 2 Of) ^'(',4 ■JOl ■20.-, 2{)(i -; I.) \- 221 nosonv 141 144 or A " Q ccent uanfity ''"pilaris - *UUaC,> - '231 - 231 <..■>•) - 2:n - 240 VAcr.. I 1;J lOo ].":) U.o IC.j K;a 170 172 171 176 177 178 17!) I Hi I'll i;)j !;':{ v.t.i 'J 00 ■JO I ■jnr, 'iO(i f ONTF. NTS. Ol"'J'onc3 of I'lo- ) 5 I" AUt. CUtluil V'crdilication t N< 1 lA rinv 24 2 - J 1.5 J.j«. or tiio (, oniiiia Setiiicolou JOO Col on .Mi 1 I) asli, Itit Period - - 'J(;.> -Nott'3 ot' '-rrofrriiioii. and Ivxclmuuti- oii, k ck.(; apital f.c'ttc.Ts J • verciics r on ( iinctiutioii 5 Jo J J. i; - Jtn A VII. f A (; i: . !'Pi: 'DiX <)l"StvI( •27M V uritv _ .)■ J ropricty - Precision i*ersj>icui(y I riity Strctiirfh . Amhiiriiitv Taiitolugv l'"i!;iires of ) Sjtctcli ^ Kt Vlljol OifV Sviitax J 7 I JoO JIIO J 51 1 J8.i J 8 (J Jv '' '^'y ^PP«W to For the above number of Vowel sounds, there ought to be sixteen different letters; and for the [Consonant sounds, twenty five different letters •— jso that the whole number of letters, in our alphabet |ought to be Forty-one. I'^auc* Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. A Vowel is an articulate sound, that can be per- fectly uttered by itself; as a, e, o; which are form- led without the help of any other sound. A Consonant is an articulate sound, that cannot be perfectly uttered v/ithout the help of a vowel ; as b, d, f, /, which requires vowels to express them The Vowels are a, e, i, o, u, and sometimes w and y. fFand y, are consonants when ihey begin a vowel or syllable ; but in their situation they are vowels, and they are semetimes consonants at the beginning of a word, and vowels at the end. Consonants are divided into Mutes and Semi- vowels. The Mutes cannot be sounded at ail without the *'t5/ ''^^^^^- ^^^y ^^^ ^' P' ^> ^» ^> and c and g iiaiu. A2 ORTHOGRAPHT. and g soft. ' "»».*', », «, x, and ( Four of the Semi-vowels, namclv I m n ^ are also d.stmguished by the name ot /,ll' lo^;: the.r readily uniting »vith other consonants and flow ing as It were into their sounds. ' Inpronouncingthenamcsofthe Mutes the a, sistant vowels/0//., the consonants : as 6'. t '" le ka. In pronouncing the names of the S;mi-vo;eh; the vowels precede the consonants : as. Z eleJ «'», cer, es, cc, except cc, gc, vc, zed. '^' ' * Those letters are called labials, which arc formed by the hps ; dentals, that are ^rmed by Z teeth ; palatals, that are forme 1 by the palate <^ut iurals, that are formed by the throat • «n f ' ^ , that are formed by the nose ' ^"^ ""'"^^' rp^ k"^ Dipthong IS the union of two vowels pronoun- ced by a s.ngle impulse of the voice, as .a in beat, ou in s ind, ow m now. ' A Triphthong is the union of tliYee vowels nro- nounced in like manner as can in beau. il7in vfeT A proper Diphthong is that in which both the vowels are sounded ; as, oi in voice, ou in ounce Me in quell. vuuuh, An improper Diphthong has but one of the vowels •ounded ; as, ea in eagle, oa in boat, oe in foe. The Triphthongs though they have three letters have mostly only two sounds, and are thereford mearly ocular and have been by some Grammarians classed with the diphthongs, but in some words the tiiree letters are sounded, as in quoit buoy. OF SYLLABLES. A Syllable is a sound either simple or compound- ed, pronounced by a siniile impulse ofthn. vnin*. .«^ constituting a word, or part of a word. H ORTHOORAPHT. sound of X, and c m, n, r, ds, from md flow- , the as- 2, pe, te, i-vowels ich are I by the 3 ; gut- nasals. onoun- n beat, ilg pro- 1 view. >th the ounce, vowels )e, etters, sreforo arians da the Spelling, ia the art of e.xpressin )roper letters. g a word bj its 00 ad- OF WORDS. Words are articulate sounds used by common onsent, assigns of our ideas. A word of one syllable is termed a iMonosvllable- word of tuo syllables a Dissyllable ; a word of hree syllables a Trisyllable ; and a word of four or --ore syllables a Pol lysy liable. All words are either primitive or derivative. A primitive word is that which cannot be reduced loany simpler word in the language; as, man, cood 'ontent, nature. ' fe • A derivative word is that which may bo reduced !o another word in English of greater simplicity ; by aking from it its termination, or initial syllable ; as nanful, goodness, contentment, unnatural, York- hire. The orthography of a great number of English ords IS far from being uniform. Thus honour and tionor, inquire and enquire, negotiate and negoci- ^te, control and controul, expense and expence, liege and alledge, surprise and surprize, complete nd compleat, connexion and connection, abridg- lent and abridgement, vallovs rnd vallies, attorneys nd attornies, vulcano and vulcanoe, cigar and legar, and many other orthographical vatiations le to be met with in the best modern Publications! Some authority for deciding differences of this ature appears to be necessary, and there is perhaps one of equal pretensions with Dr. Johnson's Dicti- k)nary ; though a few of his decisions do not appear Ito be warranted by the principles of Etymology and analogy ; smce his Dictionary contains some Or- thographical inconsistencies, which ought to be rec- Itihed : such as immovable, moveable; chastely chasfnoaa- r^irf !lo.n«^„ r..„i:ii.. . !• „ _i • -> ^ ' 1 I " i"' i"" ■■■'■-"--=' i-ji:i!^ ; siiiivss, oiyiy ; itui- lessiy, tcarlesness; needlessness, needlessly ETYMOLOar. ETiriflOLOGY. The second part of Grammar is Etymoloe which treats of the different sorts of words, thei various modifications, and their derivation. There are in English nine sorts of words, or a hey are commonly called Parts of Speech, name ly, the Article, the Substantive or Noux th( Adjective, the Proxoun, the Verb, the Adverb the Preposition, the Conjvnctios, and the Lmer JECTIOX. 1. An Article is a word prefixed to substan- tives to point them out, and to shew how far their signification extends ; as a garden, an eagle the woman. ° ' " *u- ^:u ^ Substantive or Noun, is the name of any thing that exists, or of which we have any notion as London, man, virtue. """uu, K S *? """=^° ^'^°"^ •'. or b, its making sLe of i.^elf^ « a book, ihe 8un, an apple ; Temperance, Industry. Ch^.tity ' 3. An AdJRcti e, is a word added to a substan- tive to express its quality: as, " an industriou$ man a vtniious woman.'* «•••"» .^^v ° Adjective may be known by its making sense with the addition of the word ihing : as, a good thing, a bad thinir : or of any particular substantive : a», a awed apple, a pleasant prospect, a /toe/y boy. ^ , '^ y*eaaani 4- A Pronoun is a word used instead of a noun to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word; *^' r". 7, '^^^ ^^ ^^^PPy > '*^ is benevoleui : he is useful." 5. A Verb is a word which signifies to Be, to Uo, or to Suffer; as, "lam; I rule; I am ruled." whirJ?7*"K "PJ^f" '^® ^'''"S °^ *" ■«'°"' as io >iob .' WhIC!) diBCribea the thrii9lin.r of - oU..._ :_~. , . . ' KTTMOLOGT. Aymologyi ds, their! 'ds, or as; n, name-] oux, the Adverb, e Lnter- substan- t'ar their ?le, the le of any notion, I verb may pen«r»l!y be c'^stinffai.hed. by it. m.kinE "cnie M.h any of ,he p.r.onal P.onoun., cr the word to bcU]': Li'ite ^^*' '"^^ '^''"' ' °'' "* '"'"'' 'O P'»^' t» 0. An Adverb is a part of speech, joined to a reib, aiindjective, anu somciimes to another adverb 10 express some qi.ali.y, or circinnslance respcctinK It : as, " Ho reads well ; a truhj good man : ho i-nicsverij coyncthj.'' An Adverb may be generally known, by if, answerins tn |he quesnon. llo-.v ? Hou- mu.-l. .' Who.-, r or Where ? m lio ) stab ; .he phrase, " He .e.r more sentences, to make but one : it sometimes connects only words: as, " Thou and he are happy )ccausc you are good." " Two and three are five:" 9. Interjections are words thrown in between the parts of a sentence, to express the passions or emotjons of the speaker : as, " O ! virtue how [amidble thou art !" " Ah me ! I am undone' !" In the following passage, all the parts of speech ara ex- |emp!ified : r » a u* 1272612 3 72 8 The Power of speech is a Faculty peculiar to niaa, and S 5 7474 3 2 7i 3 Iwas bestowed on him by hi-^ be.ieiioe.nt Cfcator, fur (he greatest M^ S 2 89 6654 5 and most excellent ues ; but aJas ! how often do wo p-rr art 14 7 13 7? jii to the woisl of purposes ! . 10 ETYMOLOQT. OF THE ARTICLES. An Article is a word prefixed to substantives, to point them out, and to show how far their signiti- oation extends ; as, a garden, c?i eagle, the woman. In English there are but two articles o or an, and the : A or an is styled the indefinite article : it is used in a vague sense to point out one single thing of the kind, in other respects indeterminate ; as, *• Give me a book ; bring me an apple." T%e is called the definite article ; because it ascertains what particular thinrr or thinn;s are meant: as, " Give me the book ;" " Bring me //te r.pples ;" meaning some book, or apples, referred to. A Substantive without any article to limit it, is generally taken in its wiilest sense : as, "A condid temper is proper for man ;" that is, for all mankind. The peculiar ure and imporlance of the aiticles will be peen in the (otiovving example : '• The eon of a King," «« the eon of the King,"—" a bon of the King." Each of these three phraaes has an entire ditferent meaning, through the different application of the articles a and the. •' Thou art a man," ia a very general and harmless posi- tion, but thou art the man, (as Naihan said lo D^vid,) is an •Hsertioo capable of sinking terror and remorae into the heart. OF SUBSTANTIVES. A Substantive or Noun is the name of any thinn that exist, or of which we have any notion : as. Lgu- doD, man, virtue. ITTMOLOGT. 11 M, Substantives are either proper or common. Proper Names or Substantives, arcthe niim«. y.propna.od .0 ind.vidu.ls : as, G^or^^'^LTon" Common Nouns arc the names of things in lyener- unde t\"l'?^ ''"«' '^ TT '"^'"-^ "^^"^ -^'^'^-1 under them, as, animal, tree, star, man, girl, &c. them^ilfr ''"''P*"* "''"'''' ^^""^ ^" ^••t'c'e annexed to as ..X^^^'^'-^^'^h.sage.'' But in such sentences as. the two Buonapartes were then in Spain •" comCn "^ '''' '^^"^^ '''' "°^ -»^- ^^- -un Common names may be used to signify indivi- duds by the addition of articles or pronouns as The hoy ,s studious ;» '« that girl isdiscreet." ' as the Peol r S°?'' °'' "°""^ of multitude 1 as, the Feople, the Parliament, the Army: Abstract Nouns, or the names of qualities abs7acted f cm ne« .'l^rr^ ' as knowledge, goodness, wl^te^ nesa . \ erbal or participial nouns ; as, beiinn^n Julia, Jnliot, Czur.' Julio. J or Juliette. • netta. C/arinn. ]}> a Xoun, Pronoun, or Adjective, being ;),v- T'Xft/ to the Substantive : as, A cock-sparrow. A «naii-servaut. A lic-goat. A lie-bear. A male child. A hon-sparrow. A maid-servant. A sho-fToat. A she-hear. A female child. Mule descendants. Female descendants. The same noun is sometimes either masruline or fenun.ne. The words j.arcnt, child, cous^nJ^Z net^hbour, servant, and several othc.a, are used n.' diffL-rently for males or females. Nouns with r.riable terminations contribute Jo concision llr < 7 t?"";^ °f "P^«"ion. We have only a sufficient num" »^''"'™ to make us ie*I our want : for when ,ve s.. 01"* woT.an. She ,. a Philosopher, an Astronomer, a bu.'der . waver, we perceive an impropriety in the term nation. «hicJ w. cannot avo.d: but we can say. th, I she is a botanist . • iud.Mt aw.-ness. a scholar, an orphan, a companion L c.u.o .hose termmationa have not annexed ,0 them the nolio^, OF NUMBERS. Number is tho co:.sideration of an object, aa one or Liore. ^ aouiie and fhf Pfu^rar^ '" ''^"° """'^"' ^^^ lingular The Sinj:i:Iar nurxiber, expresses but one oi lect- aa. a ch.^ir. a table •' ' ETVMOLOGV. 15 The Plura] numlif^r signifies more ohirc f. (I.a. one ; ns, clinir.s, tables Soinf NouDs, from ll wliich they exprc 10 nature of the tl nutnhor lllirf g ir uro used only in tin- Siin'ui, as, wi.euf pUcii. gold, sloth, pn.lf, k ethers, only in the Plurnl i tiors, lungs, cmburs, ides, k orni ; as, bellows SCIti- cording to the practice, of the generality of correct writers, the 1 oth plural ollowing wojds, arc construed: nouns; pains, ridus, also, Muihunal fip.'i IfS er similar names of Sci '-•i;.', p'Jlilus, dines, optics, prcumatus, ICS. with encc3. The word ntws is b as belon<'iiig to tl y many writers considered aldo olteu used as plural Some words are the deer, ahcep, swine. The Nouns, used both in tht ic smgular number ; thou.rh ii i» same in both numbers : aa. m cam, amends, and al rn5. singular and in the plural numb aro cr. I)ozcn and braces, bellows and gallows ' ers, though they are°a]so in both nuni plural ; as, dozens, L'a"^l arc alike u^cd in tiie owses. The folio vms gnlar and plural are used in tl., adoptcd into our language : hiat ouns being in Latin boti 1 sin- le same manner wli e :i us species. , apparatus, scries. Some words derived from the Ic are connned to the phwa! number • crcdenda, addenda, literal minutiic arncd lanfruagesi as, antipodes, plural Nouns of multitude when taken coll as , query, queries, meetii cctivelv have Cii ng, meetincs. but t! ee.sc is used when it is spoken of le plural cheeses, whc IS employed. generally, n number is lefcrred to. ^ UaCU Pease and fish, when th us " pease are cheap, '^ e species is rnrnn* Hsh IS scarce, but 16 ETYMOLOGY. When number ig referred to, the common plural ig used — peas, fishes. Some words are used as plural that are seeminff- ly singular, as " horse and foot," meaning cavalFy horse^nnTZ^'^'u''"'' ^'"'^ was two thousand Horse aud twelve thousand foot." The plural number of nouns is generally formed by adding s to f he singular : as, dove, doves ; face f^ces ; pen, pens. ' cfi, soft and o form the plural by the addition ofes: as tax, taxes; lass, k-sses; lish, tishes; hero, heroes. ■ Junio, grotto, can(o, quarto, and tyro, fo'm the n!.ir«l With 5 only : as also proper name«. ae Ca^to.' Pia.o. &c. ^ Exception 2. Nouns ending in « nreceded by a consonant form the plural by ^chan^i„ntto tes : as fly, fl.es ; lady, ladies/ But the 1. L Z chang^ecl when a vo.el precedes it., as, key^ key^! . proper analogy, they ought tol^Stin .A;"'"^"^ P"''"^^ j Exceptions. Ceitain nouns ending in /or re ^ irS^ir£:^^^'^^^"^^^^^^'-Sin^e^^^^ Loaf, Loaves. Life, Lives. Knife, Knives. Sheaf, Sheaves Calf, Caives. Self, Selves. Half, Halves. Elf, Elves. Shelf, Shelves. Thief, Thieves. Wife, Wives. Wolf, Wolves. nr,Jifff^^''^^,^''f'"^ '" •^'" ^^'ne'imeg made staves, (.hough ETYMOLOGY. Exception- 4. Certain ]V( in C7i, ici', emc, and ine — and into i7 VIZ uns form the plural sum.' hv changing oo M an. !vr en. H( AVoman, Women. Brother, \ ^^'^'^h'-en. or S enn '7: Child, Ox, D ic, ^ouse. ( JJrot Child O D o?, or ovv. iier: rcK. JM ouMe, I\I xen. ice. ^ice, ice. Cow, Foot, Goose, 'J'ooth, i ence. S\v ine. '^owa. or Feet. Coese. Teeth. Die makos -i.es, when not used as a term in gn penny when spoken of a silver ponny nuke plura! R'ing, and s peniues in ihe FxCEPTlo.V /orm the plural by cl '5. Certain ZV ouns ondiri' in 7?. end ing ir. x form it in ccs, viz 'langing is into t,, and some Antithesis, Antitheses. liypothcsi.s, Hrnoth ^Pcx, Aniccs. Tl.n.;.. t/ ' Axis, C c p D Ap Axe ilCblS. leses. asis riais. J ^ascs. A i;.. ppenuix Crises 'arentiiesis, Parenthes Cnl.^ Theses. ^ Aj peiidicos, i^ orAppendixe3 OS, ecnsj.s. Eniphas Elii] JMet IS. liOSlS. D E Ell cci i.;es. Ind iii[Wiases. ipscs ex ertcx. amor- } JMetamor- phosis, 5 piloses. Vorte: 1 1 Cal !nd J ccs. jfcs, or liuexes. V'ertices, or A -l"t(;Xes. vortices, or Vortexes. Compound .-oids when the princij.Io word is nut first ; has the pr;:ici')I ' --i ' • ." '* l'^^ plural as, Fat pio w.jiii only varied to form the icr-iJi-law, fathcrs-in law martial, courts maitiul ; Aide-de-camp. a\l r;irn!^ t^' *" camj) court cs- de- plural dat Some Nouns Trom foreign lanouugcs form tlio 'n (f, ae, and mina rcnnum, arcana; dafu m. iiono- drjsidera'ium,dc.,tderaia; phenomenon' i,i ! prr:i 1 1 1 : 1. ........ 1 ~ . ; i i . ' '. ■ - ■•■"-,, -iiuia , tiiiiiiiUicuiuin, au.iiiaicui'i, ' £2 18 ETYMOLOCT. Il' Stratum, strata ; stimulus, stimuli ; genius, genii, (spirits) ; magus, magi ; virtuoso, virtuosi ; ban- dit, banditti. Cherub and Seiaph, or Cherubim and Sera- phim, mthe Bible and in most of the books wrote in the beginning of the 18th Century, are made plural by addmg s, as " Cherubs, Cherubims," there seems therefore an impropriety in using the Hebrew plural tm, in the English language, as an English plural, as seems to be the present practice. OF CASE. In English, Substantives have four cases the Normnalive, the Possessive,* the Objective, and the Vocative. The Nominative case simply expresses the name of a thing, or the subject of the verb • as " the boy plays." " The girls learn." ' The Possessive case expresses the relation of property or possession ; and has an apostrophe with H^.^v ''"'. 'tif^'TIk^ f","' '* •' ^'' " The scholar's duty ;" " My father's house." When the plural ends in s the other s is com- monly omitted, but the apostrophe is retained • as " On eagles' wings ;- - The drapers' company.'' Generally also, when the singular terminates in an s, and the next word begins with s, the apostro phe s IS not added : as, " For goodness' sake." The Objective case expresses the object of an action, or ol a relation ; and generally follows a verb active, or a preposition: as. " John assists Charles-" .' They live in London ;" " James beats him." ' The Vocative is used in calling on a person or thing : as, *' O ! John assist me." .n, ] ol'-^ Pos^'cssive is sometim»>3 called the Geuilive cas«, •nd iho Oljective the Accusative. ETYMOLOGT. 19 ow- In English the Vocative and the Nominative have always jtho same foim, though they are often different in Latin. Ii is for this reason perhaps of their having the same form, that Mur ray has taken no notice of the Vocative in his Grammar But in so Joing, he has certainly done wrong, as in parsing such sentences : as, «' What is required of thee man, &o." The words «• O man," is neither a Nominative nor an Objective I and yet it is something, and may be called the Vocative. * Some late Grammarians appear to think, that they had made a new discovery, ((.'.cause Murray had neglected it ) bv giving it a new name, viz : '« The Nominative Independent '» and have even given lengihv rules about it, under this new name • but the old name o( \ cr ive seems preferable in several res' pecta, and is therefore here used. English Substantivos are declined in the foil ing manner : jyominativc Case. Possessive Case. Objective Case. Vocative Case. jyominative Case. Possessive Case. Objective Case. Vocative Case. JVominaiive Case, Possessive Case. Objective Case. Vocative Case. A''oininative Case. Possessive Case. Objective Case. Vocative Case. SINGULAR. PLURAL. A mother. Mothers. A mother's. Mothers'. A mother. Mothers. O mother. O mothers. The man. The men. The man's. The men's. The man. The men. O man. O men. A box. The boxes. A box's. The boxes', A box. The boxes. O box. O boxes A fly. The flies. A fly's. The flies'. A fly. The flies. Oily. O llies. OF ADJECTIVES. An Adjective is a word added to a Substantive to express its quality : as, '' An i,nliislrious man ;" '«wf*i, AAiliiU. 20 KT7M0L0G7. •• A careless bo; ;" "tri^^^.l,/""^ "^ ^"^ 1 here are cominonlv recknnPfl flir«« i Comparison : the Posi i J Vi r' degrees o he Superlative ''"' '''" Comparative, and the IsUi^e'Tr''''' T ^'^'■''' '"^^^'-^^^^ ^r '^««ens iilty positive in Si"niilCa(>nn • oo i"ore benevolent, less wise! " ' """' ^'''''''' The Superlative Degree, increases or lessen, the positive, to the highest or lowest dCrce a" wisest, greatest, least wi.e, most benevolent ' ' unrJ!'nf'^^'ir''^' ^^ P°''^'^'^' becomes the com. parat.ve by adding r or er , and the superlative bv adding ./ or est to the end ofit : as. v isc vise/ v.sest ; great, greater, greatest. VV^rds e/id ngYn And he .uiveibs more and mosl, placed belbre the adject. ve have the same cficct : as wise, i^rwise mosl wise. ' wise, In some M'ords the superlative is formed bv a-l- t^ft "itt^rnioT "'' ^'''^"^ ^ ^^' foremost, nle. ino.t, utte.nipst or utmost, undermost, uppermost. caoriconr "'''<'' ^^'^'''^'^^omo^vord,, which by the caprice 01 custom, arc irregular m their comparison; POSITIVE. Good. IJa==t ETVMOLOCr. 21 2tl on ac- s we sayA is that oil egrecs ofj ive, and! jfy of an; on : us,j POSITirE. COMPARATIVE. SUPERLATIVE. I'ittle, Less, Least. Much c- many, IVlore, INIost. Old, Elder or older, Eldest or oldest. An Adjective put wi.boul n Submanfive, with the definite lart,cl.- bpfore it, lecon.e^ a S.ilf.i8„t.ve in -enne and meaning : jas, •' P.ov.donce rewards the good, end punishep the bad." Various Nouns placed before other nouns, assume the Inafureof Adjecdvea : as, ssa fi,b, wine ve&eel, com field, ■ meadow ground. Nutn-.-' Aljectives are either Cardinal or Ordinal : cardi- jnal as one o, three, &c. ; ordinal, as first, second, ihi.d. [tweutieih, ^c. lie com- Uive by wiser, ding in ippiest. 3ro the 'e wise. OF PRONOUNS. A Pronoun is a word used instead of a Noun, to avoid the too frequent repetition of the same word! as, "The man is happy ; he is benevolent ; he is (useful " There are three kinds of Pronouns, viz : the [Personal, the Relative, and the Adjective. OF THE PERSONAL PRONOUNS. There are five Personal Pronouns, viz : /, thou, \he, she, it ; with their plurals, ivc, ye or yuu, they. Personal Pronouns admit of Person, Number Gender, and Case. ' The Persons of Pronouns are three in sach number, viz : /, is the first pcrpon, ^ Thou, is the seco.id person, ^ Singular, He, she, or if, is the third person, ) We, is the first person, Ye or yoti, is the second person, ^ Plural J-ilCij^ Id liiO liili'u pci'Suu, 22 ETVMor.oor. This acroriMt of nprsnna ..,,11 ► address, hi, r'^'.hJir: ''"' °^'''M.e,.on o .l.on. ,.e •nd as .ho .peak L; ' no '::;"^ ^r"'' "' '"""'^ '"''' ^^''-'"■ Gender has rrsnert nnlv «rw «i .i • i 8;.lar oftho p,„„„„„r, /, £ '", '!", I""l n"-n •■^in- Pronouns luive lour ca^oc? • ♦!.« a' .- po3.e..vc., .1.0 c.,,.,,v;::: ;..;;;re v:";;ri:'j''-' tl.e Possessive .use. "'" '"""'"^"v; or Ti.o :>u,su,ml Pronoun, are thus decliucd : First. Second. Third. INiasculine 'Jliird. Fcmiuiuc. Third, ^t^uicr. Case. Posscssice. ('I'JLclire. -'^'oiui/uilive. ^f'>,i< I lire . l Oi tiitrc. Ot'ij, riii-i\ '■'^''j lit 1 11(1 1 ire. J •"■ics.iwc. ^■■'./. dire, •^^'oijiiiialice. Posscs.-jivt. Ou!ci.!irc. fTN'GULAZi. I. j^iiije. ]\i.!. »> anting. 'J liou. 'i'liiiie. 1 iiv:e. OthoU. ifo. His. IIlUl. She. Herd. licr. h. Its. it. TfUR VL, Ouis. Ls. O we. ^ e f;/- ^ ou. Vours. ^ ou. O ;e or you Th'ey. 'J hciis. 'I'heiii. They. i iieiis. Tii.jiii. They, 'i'heir. 'ihcin. 4 ETIMOLOGT. S3 lo >i. <*n lie ,-"j|jjert \ spo.ik (ifl > IV lioni i.e j IT iyeiS'lli;] o: licr pf:r- of Sub- osc, he ; "son sill- Bculiuc; linativo ativo. in jien- ative or] 3(1 : OF THE riRf.ATIVE mOXOUXS. Relative Pronouns arc surh as relate, in ffener- ^1, to some word or phrase goi.j^r before wbicb i, ZLy.'' ■ ' ""*" " '''»'l'-^ ^^'^'^ ^'^'^« virtul The Relative Pronoun when used interro.rative- V, r. ates lo a wcu o, ,,h:as., wh.ch is not Intccc tUnl, but subscquenl to the relative. rpa/ is a kind of Compound Relative, includinrr )o h he antecedent and relative, and is mo.tiv enu.- hlcnt to that, ^chiJc : as, - This is ./,./ J ™ted " piat IS to say, " the thini^- tvhich 1 wanted." What seems sometimes an Adjective when join- ^d^to a ^oua : as, " In what way he did ,t, I knoNr niio is applied *o Persons, which to Animals 1^1 hfun.Tr ''T-' /, '-^^vr "^ '^ ^ /'--"^ - "^ i« tt'L frj^^r-" ' "Th.i..he/.e./uc/.'pro. \h. i '^^'f' ""^ ^ I^elativo, is oncn used to prevent Ihe too frequent repetition of who and t./ricA.^ It "s Applied to both persons and things ; as, «' He that rM/m/ highly adorns a woman." It is often used ^hen ivho or which would be improper. JVIio is of both numbers and is thus declined : J^oinwr.ilve. Who. Posscscivc. Whose. Objective. 'Wliom. Which, that nr\A ,~t Ibut do no t vary their term:nalion, except that tjho$e is i.»ifa ui uOui numuers, 24 ETVMOLOGT. times tisp(! us the Possessive case of which : bs, '« The fruit that forbidden trtf whose mortal tasie brought death." Who and tohat, have often the word** ever and soever annexed to iheni : n», rvhoever, wliosoev-r ; whatever, what- soever ;— and whirh has also ever and soever jumed to it bul •eldom by good writers. ' That is sortiPtimea a ReUtive, sometimes a Demonstrative Pronoun, and sonicliPie^ a Conjunction. Ii ,s a Relative when it may be turned mio t/>/jo or which wuhout deMroyinij the pense: as. " Thei/ that (who) reprove us. may b<- our best friends ;" '• From every .hing that (which) you see derive in- sininion." It is a Demonatraiive Pronoun, when it is follow- cd immediately by a Substantive, to w!,,ch it is ioined or re- fers, and which it limits or qualifies. : as, •• Tha." hoy is indus- triouo ; ■ "That bHong. to me ;" meaning ihat book, that dH.^k. &r. I: la a Conjunction, when it join- semenc^s together and caiwini he turned jnto to /.o or M-AicA, without destroying iho sense : as, " Take care that every d<.y be well employed." Who, tohich, and what, are called Interrngaiive Pro.. nouna, when used m asking questions : " Who is ho ' which is the book ? what are jou doing." OF ADJECTIVE PRONOUNS. Adjective Pronouns r:e of a mixed nature, par- ticioating the properties both of Pronouns and Ac jcctives. The Adjective Pronouns may be subdivided into four sorts, namely, the Possessive, the Distribulive the Dcmonslrative, and the Indefinile or Indeterminate. 1. The Possessive are those which relate to possession or property. There are seven of them; VIZ : my, thy, his, her, our, your, their ; and 7nm< and thine, for my and thj. His, mine and thine, have the same torm whether they are Possessive Pronouns, or the possessive cases of their Personal Pronouns A few axamples will assist tha learner, to distinguish Ihe Possessive Pronouns, from the Possessive Case^ of their cor- respondent Personal Pronouns. The following sentences ex- emplify the Possessive Pronouns-' « .;i/-^ le.gJn is finished, TA.V books are lorn ; he loves his studies ; bhe does her duty , We own our faults ; i'our situatioe is diatreasins • ! a.-tm.-s their virtuea." ' a • ^a ETYMOLOGY. 25 'he fruit of! Tne following are tx»mp]ea of the Pofaesiive Ca»ei of ih. Per.on.l Pronouns : •. This de«k i, mine ; .he o.her i, thine ; These rmko.8 are Am ; ,hos« .re her, ; This house is our,, ana ihat i> your, j J-Acira is »ery commodious." The wo,d« own >nd self, are used in cor junction with Pronouns. Own ,s aJded to PosseHsive.. both Singular and Plural : as, " .Uy own hand ; our otcn house." •• I live i,i rny own house ;" .hat is not in anothers hou.e. .Se// i, ad- ded to Pos«e«8,ve8 : as %5e//. thr,se/f, yourself, your- stive,, oursehes ;-and al.o lo Personal Pronouns : as, A^n,- seif. her.elj, itself, themieltes. •• I did thi, myself}^ that .>, not anoiher did i. Tf.e.e have been called Compound Pro- nouns. They are all used In the Nominative, as well as ih. Oljnct.ve case -. a.s, "He came himself ; she will do it her- self ; Themseive9 performed it ; you inaj goyourselvei* ; ^ur. eehes will go." ^ " j i ««' 2. The Di.uribulive are those which denote the person or things that make up a number, as taken separately and singly. They are, each, every, eilher or 7icitlier : as, " Each ofhis brothers is in a favour- able situation ;" - Every man must account for him- self; '' 1 have not seen either of them ;" " JSVaher (that is not either) of ray friends was there." Either and neither, relate to two persons or things, to say, " either or neither of the three " ig therefore improper. ' Every, may relate to a series of things wheu plural : as, '' a Jubileo kept every 50 years." 3. The Demonstrative are those which preciselr point out the subjects to which they relate : this and that, these and those, are of this class : as " This is true charity ; that is only its imaae " ' T/m refers to the nearest person or thing, and that to the most distant : as, " T/usman is more in- telligent than that:' This indicates the latter or last mentioned ; that the former or first mentioned • as " Both wealth and poverty are temptationr ;' that tends to excite pride, this, discontent." f ";"= «••"'-« ia liiu prurai oi imn, and ihosi th« plural oUhat, aro us^ m the same manner. 26 KTVMOLOGY. The wouU former and latter have bfrn cl-rse 1 u ,.onf*t fhcDfi.norm.rat.vo Pronoun.. ... m«, 7 of iler applies. ion..~ The follow, ng,en,ence,. an exampl. : - Faj,,,, con.inue.l in ,e distressed - - one H ^■.pt 10 love on.'B self." This uord .. of.en used in the Prura Other is declined as follows : Posifcssive. Objective. SINGULAR. PLURAL. Other. Others. Other's. Others'. Other. Others. The Plural others is only used apart from the Noun fo which It refers, whether expressed or understoorl : a- "When you have perused these papers, I will send you the others •" ;• he pleases some, but disgusts others.'^ When this Pronoun 18 joined to Nouns, either singular or plu.al, it has no variati- on : as, ♦' the other man ;" " the other men." JVonc is used in both nu nbers ; as, " Mne is so oeaf as he that will not Leo. ;" " «one of those are eqi'ul to these." rtho article mi, prefi.xed ve case as other. Another is composed • tc; other — and has a posses The following phrases maj .orve to exemplify the Indefi- nite P.-orioun3 : " Some of you are wise and good." "A few were Idle, ihe others indust.nou.," "Neither is there am that ,g unexceptionable." " Th , r-ere ail present." •' Such 19 the state of man." «« Th : nn-J that are hr.fh -!;L.-" •" iy/io/e cities were 6«nk by thi^ earthquake." ■J ETTMOLOGT. 27 EXERCISES IN PAiiSING. I'ninf out tho Article IV tlu? tullowii) g sciilences A i^ood licart. A liii[i|)y son. A (IuiiIijI son. A sorenc ast*-. ct. A si!v( r inkstand. ouu and Adicctive in Obodiont children. A |»«'ace(iil rmiid. C'oIUjIOSod fll(.llir!|(; 1) isobfdicrit scliulurs. Amiable girl. An alliible deportment. Tbc jiood boy. Uneasy bebaviour. Tbe Egyptian'tcapot. A blue sky. A bad boy. Tbc n.ilUy way. A rapid slrearrt. Sweet scented inyrlle An Ivy .nu.itled Tower. The a.strouoniicul clock A sweet scented flower. Point out tlio Personal, Rel Distribut n ativo, Possessive, ive, Dcinoiistrutive, and Indetiuitc Pro- oun.s, in tbe following sentences I am, tbou art, be is, si lie was, it can bo, our were, 'ley migbt be, her house, we are, ye or you |cap, its wing, my bat, tby copy^ copy. \ our kniCe, our own desk, y their own copy. The bat is mine, tbe knife i.s"th the pen is bi.s, the fan is hers, the h ^ pen, their own our own write, eirs. the desk is tl ouse IS yours, Cairo. leirs, the ink is ours. It is it give me it, lake him away. Let her st s owa wiio is tiiat, wiioso house is this ? 'That is 01 IS mine, this lis, tliese arc yours. We will mind oursel ves. yjiTselves, and let them mind themselves It IS just what ho wanted. What man is that .= That IS my bird that be has ; this is the bird which ha chose ; who is that man ? Wl U Inch of these will you have .? To whom did y( .iiive your knife .' All may read this. Some a negligent ; others arc industrious. They are bo Idle : any person may go ; every hundred years w a Jubilee. It was cither h neither tiie one, nor tl e or she did it. It as was le other. You may go with tiiat is thine. One n u -» ms ib njiue ty ucccive one s self. Y > ou Ill 23 only m ETVMOLOCr. uy cnn go, and not any oilier , another person ay =, antithesis,' phcnomol lion, virtuoso, genius, apex. ..=nl^''■'^^'''^ following Nouns in tho Possessi^o dress, beauty, bee, music, fo.v, laoc, page. Write the following Nouns in the Possessive ca.e Plural: rock, house, wife, griof, mouse, tooth, H T, city strife, lynx, tamily, echo, picture, tvro ■I ach, brush, coach, harness, latch. Write the following Adjeciivcs in the compara- tive degree : near, loan, wise, litile, good had much, ,11, far, old, white, short, dress, dear ' si| y tine, pure, trusty, obscure, obscene, worthy.' Write the following Adjectives in the supcrla- t vede.rce : good, bad, little, late, near, more, old ill, tar, low, higii, yellow, handsome. Compare tho following Adjectives, both by ad- d.ng er and est, and with more and most : lair Jave tall, strong kind, poor, vile, .'eeble, carl., dis^creet' narrow, sublime. ^vicui, mpara- I, bad, ' sil y, nrMOLoor. IIXERCISLS ON PRONOUNS. 2a Write or sprll th. Plural of tho Pronouns : I tijou, he, alio nud it. ' Write the Objective case of tho Pronouns : J 'ou, ho she, it, who and wh.ch, wo. yo, they! tlicsc and those. -^ ' ^' Writntho Possessive case of the followinc Pro- noun. : . thou, he. ..ho. u, ,vc, ye. th.y, who. Hhid! other, another, one. ' ' Put tlio Personal Pronoun in tho place of tho Noun 1 eter ,n this senteneo, " Peter went to the col cjro, hut etor karn. «h,uiy, for Peter's geniua 13 dull, and Peter is a dunce. ** OF VERBS. A Verb is a word which sijrnincs to re, to do or to «, rruR ; as, - 1 nui, I rule, I am ruled." ' Neute"''' are of three kinds, Active, Passive, and A Verb Active expresses an action, and neces- sanly implies an agent, and an object acted upon • as, to love ; " 1 love Penelope." ^ * A Verb Passive expresses a passion, or a suf- fering, or the receiving of an action ; and necessa- rily implies an object acted upon : as, to be loved • " Penelope is loved by me." ' A Verb Neuter expresses being, or a state of being: as, " 1 am, 1 sleep, I sit, 1 walk." Verbs may be divided into Regular, admitting of variety ; Irregular, Defective, and Redundant. The Verb active is also called transitive,* because t!je * Some lafo writers by introduting such names into Grammar, as «' active intransitive verbs," not only iniure tiie i!-.-iv: •-is;;;it;;ii;iis oj ovjgiice, oui use ic(iua vonirauiciur)'.— . C 2 30 ETViMOI.OGT. t'- action pasfes over (n iIia r.\ ;„«. - u /v oiher lung ; I ° tL I': °' ?" "'' r*^"",^ "f'"" »«'"• intrals^aZ ^^\f "^7 ^'^'^'^'^^ "^^ denominated : herb Oct a„rr' ^'^^ '^'^"' '^ ^""''"^^ ^^''''i^ as - 1 s^f 1. ^^^^""t P^-^^^ over to any ol.ject : a^, 1 sit, he lues, they sleep, uo walk." In English many Verbs are n.sed both in an Ac ' '. e and Neuter s.gnitical.on. The construrcion on- -, delernun.ng of which kind they are- as "to -auen." s.gn.fying to make even oV level' i' ; ve b i ii IS a verb neuter. ^ ' ] ronslrued B» a passive verb Wo r.,.nn«. T • "'^'^ °« ^ Auxiliary or Tldping Verbs, are those by the help of which the English verbs are principally con- jugated ; ihey are <.»,, or 6., have, do, did, shall, yll, may can could, would, should. Id, andsomcl lixnes must and ouo-ht. TesIf^ ^^'^^ ^''^''"^ >'uMBER, Tersox, IMood, and PlnrT^''^' ^'Y^i ^''''' "'"^i^ers, the Singular and tho Flural : as, ' Iran, we run," ^c. They say that 'Mo walk." is an ac.i.a mb. but nol fr.n.i- nve. ye. no, neuter. Bur a ,. no more a< tive than "to a e p ■• or any oth.r neuter verb. There i. an action in aleeS'a, •vdi us wa!!.:ng. There .p;,.-.. ,o t,e indeed no verb S. out some acMon. Even the ve.b of existence ar« o, ie has ^.ch si^n.hcn'on, .,nce I cannot l,.e without doing .oaZlZ Tnr, on y d.-Mncfou -hen between the ac(;.e and neuter v L i!" .a. .n e Ac-ve. ,h. acio.., pa«aes over to anotL.r ; but ^' ■*1 F.TrMOLOGT. 91 In each number there are three Persons, as : SIXGULAU. PLURAL. I >«^ o- We love. Thou lovest. ^e or you love. lie loves, orlovcth. Thcv love. '^irst Person. IStrond Po'son. jThird Pcrsjn. The learner will observe, thai tl,e V,,b in some pirtsofit. raries n^tndiv^s, lo exp p.s or n^ree wiih d ffe er,i peii'ons of tl.e 8.me number : as, " I /or., ilu.u iovest ; he /ores or ioveth. And also lo vjpte^s duTMem numi.e a of ihe snn.« per^-on : as, " Thou torest, ye love, he love.'h, thev love " In (he Plural numbnr ot the Verb, ihe.e i« no varution of end- ing to expre 3 the d.ir-rent pc.3on>. ; and the Verb m -he ihraa T)er,.on.s plura .s ihes.i.ne, as it is m the first person singular Thus the adding .he teiminiit ons est or s^ s. and eth is the )n(y way the Verb varies its endings m the persons 'fiut in the Particip'ee the terminations ing, ed, n, t, g, and *. ad. Ya, &c. are added ; or are characierjstio of vaneiies of Verbs, Mood, or Mode is a particular form of the Verb, Bhowiiig tiie manner in which the being, action, or Tassion, is represented. ,n J\"T^^ °^u ^^u""^ ""'^ ^^ "''''^ intelligibly explained ihiJh.h V k" ';■ ''^''"'•'^' '^"'' it consists in , he change ^L.cb .he Verb und.rgons to signify various intentions of the •^md, and various moiwficai, ons, and circumstances of actions- which exp,a..ai.oM. if comp.ucd with the following accoun't ind uses of the d.fi.renl Moods, will be found lo agree with, iiid (lluslrale them. * • There are five Moods of Verbs, the Indicative the Imperative, the Potential, the Subjunctive, and |the Indnitive. * The Indicative Mood, simply indicates, or de- clares a thing : as, " He loves, he is loved ;" or ht asks a question : as, " Does he love r" " Is he" [loved r' The Imperative Mood is used for commandinu exhortmg, entreating, or permitting : as, " Depart thou ; mind ye ; let us stay • go in peace ; givi us our daily bread. « * * b The Potential Mood implies possibility or liber- ■ t/, power, will, or .)bliL'ation 3'> ETY.MOLCOY. lie may jro or stay ; I can ride ; he would walk • they sliould Icani." * 'ijhc Sul)juncti-.c iMood roprosont.s a fliincT under acondii.oii, motive, wisl,, supposition, .^c. T and ia preceded by a coMiunetion, expressed or mider^ stood, and attended by nnotlxu- verl) : as, " 1 will^ lesjiect hirn, ///o,/-// |ic chide rno :" "Were ho g:od ho would bo happy ;" that is, " if he were good. "^ The Infinitive JMood expresses a thing in a een-l era! and unhmited manner, without anv distinction ol number or person : as. " To act, to speak, to i bo Icared. j The Partieiple is a certain form of the verb, and derives its name iVoin its participatinir, not only olT the propertK'sofa Verb, but also oi" those ofani Adjective : as, " I am dcsirou-: cf knowbii^ him ;" ^ ' udnurediindapplandid, ho bee;., no vain ;'' " /mr- . I'lp: Jinishcd his work, lie submitted it," &c «' He nad written a letter to them." There arc Ihrcp Participles, the Present or Im- perfect or Active, thciPerfect or Pasdvc or Past and the Compound Perfect : as, " Loving, loved' liavin.; loved." "Knowing, known, having known."' nnH "^''^ P;°;e"t Participle, .i-nTies imperfect action begu.n and not ended : as, "I an. writing a letter." fj The Past Participle, .io,, fiei ar-ion perfected or finished: ?^ as, • I have writteu a leuer ;" " Tho letter is wriltcn." '^ form^lf vn'"'''^'" '! dis,ing„Hl,.d f,om the Adjoctive. by the j former s ,^p^cs.n,!: -he idea of >:ino. and the la Icr'a denoting 4 conune?;"".'" ""'"^ ""* '^'■« "'""'«• but the\pit'he-s ues efin'd ,n ■" ""'«""»"<>» i" "i^'k Simply tho quali^ lies ,c e r.d to, w,u»cui any re;ja,d to .,me : aud may properly be called Purlicipial Adjeciive.s, y pruper^ auda^o'S'? -"T"""' '^"'i^™ "'' "'^'^'^''f Substantives, a»d are used as such ; as ,a the foLovvini- inblances : »• TJi? ETVMOLOCr 33 walk ,meginning ;" " a gond vne.„ ed h. crown." "TI.eKonral ^^r/n- A;//,J,n hi. er.'e ,„ z^ |ong I tno, had wear ed him.' " TonsohrMnathedistinrtion oftimP, mi-rhf ^ccxn lo a.lin.t <:..U' oi" the prosnit, |;,.st, a„d fufSre • but () nuiik il more acciirutflv , it is made to consist of ix variations, viz : the Trescnt, ( I.e hnperfocf the (Mlect the Pkipciroct, and tiie First and Second ' uture 1 en.ses. The Present T ;vcnt, as passing at the time ense represents an nrtjon 111 which it i as, " 1 rule, I am ruled ; I think, J | or s mention- im working." ear I Tliia Tent^e is I lie use' are al wa vh d f -me eieinal Tins Tense jg on O express gene.al fruihs, or ihir.g* " "e.T piodiircs ihifs ;" 'iriild H Itlens ol persona long since ileaJ fii us»d 10 e.'p e.«,s i/ie act ions or In iiDimaied isitoric il 'el lu'eil (or (lie iinperfeci eij'ions. 'eneca reasons well, us lence is someiirnes (-nbsi keacab'e ir)lial)|iaii(s, he h"h «s, '« Ho en eis the terri iiense booty, jnd reiurin I f* and roriquer", (,k es l..c-Mon. ..re Minified, bu. .he lollo.vir ^r exampL - I «ro.e ;" • 1 havo written ;" .' I „«d ..nuen ;•- '' I l.J have wniten ;" ail denote c-onipleie per'ect action. The cotijugation of a Verb is the regular com- R l.:nat.on and ar.anj^ement of ,ts several Numbers, ' 1 ersons, JMoods and I enses. Th Activ sive conj The conjugation of an Active Verb is styled the ^e Voice ; and that of a Passive Vcb the Pas- Voice. The Auxiliary and Active Verb To Have is ugated ill the fuJluwiuL' manner : ' ETYMOLOGY, 0(> TO HAVE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. sfscvhxn. tvs. I \ luve. hi h. P vs. Thou hast. PLURAL, 1 . Wc have. 'o ■s. He, si le. nr it las or hath. \ o 'e nr you hav 3. They 1 ey have. Past or Imperfect Tense. SiXGULAR. h. I had. Thou hadst. He, Sec. had. PLURAL. 1. We had. 2. Ye cr you had, 3. Ihcy had. Per/, ect .enftc. SINGULAR. I have had. Thou hast had. He, &.C. has had. PLURAL 1 . We have had. 2. \ e or you liave had. 3. They have had. Pluperfect Tc::se. SINGULAR. I had had. Thou hadst had. He, &.C. had had. PLURAL. 1. We had had. 2. Yc or you had had. 3. They had had. First Future Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL jl. T shall or will have. ), We si Thou shalt or wilt have v.' He S-Lc ehill -jv -.srH! have. i or h{»ve. lall or will have, you shall or will .J .-luaii ur will lave. 56 ETYMOLOGT. Second Fulurc, or Future Perfect Tense. sivGur.An. ,pr.uRAL. 1. 1 shall have had. 1. We shall have had. 2. Thou wilt have had. 2. Ye or you will havo had. 3. lie, &c will have had. 3. They will have had. IMPERATIVE MOOD. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 . Lot me have. 1. Let us have. -'• Iljive or have thou, or 2. Have or have ye, or d ye or you have. 3. Let them have. do thou have 6. Let him have J POTENTIAL MOOD. Present Tense. i 2. SINGULAR. I may or can have. I'hou mayst or canst have. He, &.C. may or can have PLURAL. 1 . We may or can have, 2. Ye or you may or can have. 3. They may or can have Past or Imperfect Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1. I might, could, would, 1. We might, could, or should have. would or should have, 2. Thoumightst,couldst, 2. Ye or you might, could wouldsl, or shouldst would or should have have. 3. He, &c. might, could, 3. They might, could, would or should have. would or should have ETYMOLOGV. Perfect Taisc, 37 SIN-GULAn. PLURAL. 1. I may or can have had. 1. We may or can have 2. Thou mayst or canst 2. Ye or you may or can have had. have had. 3. He may or can have 3. They may or can have had. had. Pluperfect Tense. SIXGULAR. 1. I iiiight, could, would, or siionld have had. 2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have had. 3. He, &.C. might, could, would or should have had. PLURAL. 1. We might, could, would or should have had. 2. Ye or you might, could would or should have had. 3. They might, could, would or should have had. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Preseid Taise. SINGULAR. 1. If I have. 2. If thou have. 3. If he, Stc. have. PLURAL. 1. If we have. 2. If ye or you have. 3. If they have. INFINITIVE MOOD. Present. To have. Perfect. To have had. PARTICIPLES. Present or Jlclive. Having. Perfect or Passive. Had. Compouiid Perfect. Having had. "^^ tTTMOLOGY. The Auxiliary and Neuter Verb to ce is con- jugated as foJJowa : " TO BE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Temc. '4 SINGULAR. 1. I am. 2. Thou art. 3. lie, .she, it, is. PLURAL. 1 . We are. 2. Ye or you are. 3. They are. Imperfect Tense. SINGULAR. ^ . I was, i'. Thou vvaat. 3. lie, &c. was. PLURAL. 1 . We were. 2. Ve or you were, 3. 'i'hcy were. Perfect Tense. SI-NGULAR. PLURAL. 1. I have been. j. We have been. •^- lie, «^-c. has or hath 3. They have been been. Pluperfect Tense. !=IXGUrAR. PLURAL 1. Ilrndbccn. 1. We had boon. 3. ae, &c. had been. 3. They had been. First Future Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. J I Shall or will bo 1 . We shall or will be. -.. 1 hou Shalt or wilt be. 2. Ye or you shall or will 3. lie shall or will be. 3, They shall or will be. ETYMOLOGY. 39 Secon ' Future, or Future Perfect Tt ense. SINGULAR. PIURAL 1, I shall Iiave been. '2. Thou wilt have been. 1. We shall have been. 2. Ye or you shall have )cen. 3. lie, &.C. will have been 3. They shall have b een. IMPERATIVE MOOD. SIN-GULAR. PLURAL. 1. Lot me be. i. Let us be. 2. Be thou, or do thou be. 2. Be ye or you, or do ye be. 3. Let him, Sfc. be. 3. Let them be. POTENTIAL MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. Pr.URAL. I.I may or can bo, ] . We may or can be. (2. Thou mayst or canst 2. Ye or you may or can I be. be. I 3. Ho, &.C. may or can be 3. They may or can be. Imperfect Tense. ' SINGULAR. tLURAL. 1. I might, cctild, would, 1. We might, could, would or should bo. or should be. ' 2. Thou mightst, couldst, 2. Ye or you might, could would^t or shouldst would or should be be. 3. He, Sec. might, could 3. They might, could, would or should be. would or should' be'. 40 ETYMOI.OCr. Perfect Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 . I may or can have been 1 . We may or can have 2. Thou mayst or canst 2. Ye o/you may or can have been. have been. J. lie, &.C. may or can 3. They may or can have nave been. been. Plifpcrfi'ct Ttuse. SIX "ULAU. 1. I miglit, could, would, or should have been. 2. TJiou inightsf,couid«,t, wouldst 0)' shouldst have been. 3. lie, &.C. mijrht, could, would or should have been. PLURAL. 1. We might, could, would or should have been, 2. Ye oryou might, could, would or should have been. 3. They might, could, would or should have been. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. 1. If! be. 2. If thou be. 3. If he, &c. be. PLURAL. 1. If we be. 2. If ye or you be. 3. If they be. Imperfect Tense. SINGULAR. J. If I were. 2. If thou were. 3. If he, &c, were. PLURAL. 1. If we were, 2. If ye oryou were. 3. If they were. INFINITIVE MCOD. Present Tense. To be. Perfect. To have been. ETYMOLOCr. Participles. vr Present. Boin^. Compound Perfect. hrfccf. Rccn. Having been. OF AUXILIARY VERBS. V» .'^i'V'-"^"" '^i" perceive that the prcced.r./r Auxiliary Verb./o ^8.. and to be, could not be conju^atoJ^J7rou;h all the Mood, and Tonac without the help Sf o.Lr Auxjl-ary ^^erbs namely ,«ay, ,.„,. ,,,//, 5/ia//,%„d their viriat on/ TO HAVE. PRESENT tense- Singular. I have, thou hast, he has or batt. Plural. We, ye or you, ihey have. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. I had, thou hadst, he had. i'LuaAL. We, ye or you, they had.* Perfect. I have had. Pluperfect. I had h.d, &c. PARTICIPLES. Pkesent. Having. Perfect. Had. TO BE. present tense. Singular, f am, thou art, he is. Plvkal. We, ye or you, they are. imperfect tense. Singular. I was, Ihou wast, he was. Tlural. We, ye or you were. PARTICIPLES, Present. Being. Perf D2 ECT. Been. 4^ ETYMOLOGY, SHALL. PRESENT TUNSC. Singular. I ehtU, ihou shalt, he abalt. Plural. W«, ye or you, they sliaU. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular, I should, thou shouldst, he should. Plural. We, ye or you, tbey ahould. WILL. PRESENT TENSE. FiNGULAR. I will, thou wilt, he will. Plural. Wo, ye or you, ihey will. I imperfect tense. Singular. I would, thou wouldst, he would. Plural. We, ye or you, thoy would. I MAY. jrksent tense. SrwotTLAR. I may, thou maysl. he miiy. Plural. Wo, ye or you, they may. IMPERFECT tense. Singular. I might, thou mightsi, he might Pluhal. We, ye or you, ihey might. CAN. PRESENT TENSE. Singular. I can, thou canst, he can. Plural. We, ye or you, they can. IMPERFECT TENSE. Singular. I could, thou couldaf, he could. pLURiL. We, ye or you, they could. 43 ETYMOLOGY. TO DO. PRESENT TErrtC. SiNGCLAR. I do, thou dost, he does or doih. Plural. We, ye or )ou, they do. IMPERFKCT IKNSE. SiNcrLAR. I did, (hoii didst, ho .iij. Plural. Wo, ye or you, ihey did. PARTICIPLE?. Phebent. Doing. tlrfect. Done. The Verbs have, be, will, and do, when they are uncon- nected with a principle verb, exprested or understood are not Au.xiliarie3 but Princj|.lo Verbs : as, '• We have enough ••» " I am grateful ;" «• He wills it to be bo ;" " They do as (hey plea«e. In this view they have aUo the Atixiijufy -as "I shall have enough ;" '« 1 will be grateful." ' Bo and did mark the action itself, or the time of it with greater energy and positiveness : as, " I do speak truth, I did respect him ;" '« Here an. I, fot thou didst call rae." They are of great use in negative sentences : as, •« I do not foar •" •' I did not write." They are much employed in asking ques- tions. They sometimes supply the place of another verb, and make the repetition of it in the same and subsequent sentences tmnecea.ary : as, " You attend not to your Bfudies as he does-" (1. e. as he attends, &c.) " I shall come if lean, but. if I do not, please excuse mo ;" (i. e. ifl come not.) We rhall give a specimen of the conjugation of Do and Did when used in Interrogation. indicative present. Singular. Do Hove ? dost thou love .' does he Jove > Plural. Do we, ye or you, they love ? IMPERFECT. Singular. Did I love.' didst ihou love ? did ha love > PLUF.4L. Did we, ye or you, they |ovo ? They arc not used however in a Passive case : as, PRES2WT. SmauLAR. Am I loved ? art thou loved ? is he loved ? rLURAL. Were we, ye or you, they loved ? 44 ETYMOLOGY. W These Auxiliaries do and did appear to be used often only with a view to add empluss (o a sentence : aa, •• I do lovo •" «or«o verbs however cannot be conjugated vvihout did in the imperfect : as, P.csent. " I beat him ;" imperfect, '« I d d beat him ;" did\? nol then empiiatic, but do seems always I o bo utcJ in an emphitic sense. Let not o..Iy expresses permission, but entrcalinff, exhort ing, commanding : as, «' Let us kno^v the truth •'' '« J et me die the death of rhe righteous ;" " Let not thy' heart be too much^elaitd wnh success j" " Let thy inclination submit to ihy May and might express the possibility or fiberty of doine a thing ; cuti and cotihl the power : as, •• It may rain •" "I may write or read ;" " Ho mi^ht have improved more than he has ; Ho can write much better than he could last year.'" Must is someiimea called in for a helper and denotes ne cessity : as, •« Wc must speak tho truth, whenever we speak and wemu.tnotprevoricaie." Must properly speaking has no relation to time, though it is commonly used «-iih other ve.ba m the present tense. »viv« nill in the first person singular and plural intimates reso- u|ion and promising ; in the second and third person only fore- tele : as, .' I will reward iho good and will punish the wirk- ed .» » ♦ve Will remember benefits and be grateful •" " Thou wilt or ho will repent of that folly ;•' .. You or they will have a pleasant walk." ' '■" uavo Shall on the conlrarv in the first parson simply forclels. in the second and third poison promise., command/or threaten. as, " I shall go abroad ;" «' Wo .hall dine at home :" «• Thou' sha.t or ycu st.ail inherit the land ;" " Ye shall do justice and love morcy ;" .- Tliey shall account for Ihe.r misconduct.'' llie followmg passage is not translated uccordin-to thedNtinct and proper meanings of the words shall and will ■ «> Surelw goodness and merry shall follow me ail the days of my life • and I wiil dwell in the house of tho Lord forever ^ it ought to' be '« Will follow me/' and " I shall dwell." The Foreicrner who as It I.- eaia fell mlo the Thames, and cried out : •' I "will be drowned nnbdy shall help me ;" mado a sad misapplicati- on of these auxiliaries. * i-'«vitw Thne observations rcspecthig the import of (he verbs toi/l and shall mu.t be umhrstood of expiicuiive sentences, for when the sentence is .nierroga.ive just the rever.o for liie most rart tfik^S nlar.^ ■ iKi.a to a rnmmanfi * feirjiig to a command. in„ J A ) ^'^ ".P"* '" '^^ Subjunctive Afooo, the mean- j nsofthe AuMli.nesl.Uevviseunler.o some ai.eration. a8 the |iearner Will ro.dily perceive l,y a lew examples : •• He shall proceed ' '.I, he shall proceed ;" - You shall consent!'' "I you «/.a// consen. " These Auxiliaries are .ome.imes inter ■ Changed .0 the Indicative and Subjanchve IVIood. to conrev the ..memeanin. ot .he Auxiliary : „., " He t^.7/ not re.orn.'' Ltr urn '"'"■""'" ' '" He 5/,a// not return." "Ifhet. /i m^uv T'"'^'! P-'"['"''y'^f"0'es inclination of will, nnd should |ob ligation, but .hey both vary thci. irr,po-,. kould seerns Ih. ,V "^ "m*^ ri/'Vf °^ ''"«'" •■ ^«' " '^^^ *'"'»^'i remem- ber the poor. ' Would and 5/,o«/J are ofien ai.enJed w:th a h-^rposM.on thou^^h they are al.o often used to exprees simple jevenis ; they eeem to be subject to the same rules. ^ As > tail have completed the work b ive is, "If he ill be proper for the Learner t. ...,,, fthe Subjunctive Mood, with diffei fixed y .nidstimmer. " It ire o repeat all the Tenses ent conjunctions the sJudv'of- r^'"''"' ^"" ^■"""' P^''^^"^ beginning, le study of Grammar not to cmmi^ co menmrv afl l;'li':':r..^J::"^'..^'^°"'^ I" '^^- ^-t instance bo r ■"'■■" '-■ "'-'-^vj ""^ iiie rust careiujly perused 46 ETYMOLOGY, ;/ and explained, the business will not be tedious to scholars. That the Potential IMood should he separated from the Subjunctive, is evident from the intricacy and confusion which are produced by their being blended together, and from the distinct nature of the two moods, the former of which may be expressed without any condition, supposition, kc. as will ap- pear from the following instances, " They miglil have done better ;" " We /;i"7 always act upright- ly ;" " lie was generous and would not take re- venge ;" " Wo should resist the allurements of' vice ;" " I could formerly indulge myself in things, of which I cannot now think, but with pain." Some Grammarians have supposed that the Po tential Mood, as distinguished from the Subjunctive, coincides with the Indicative. But as the latter •' simply indicates or declares a thing," it is mani- fest that the former which modi'ies tiie declaration, i and introduces an idea materially distinct from it, must be consider.ibly dilfercnt, '• I can walk," '' ( should walk," api>ear to be so essentially distinct from the simplicity of" I walk," " I walked," as to warrant a correspondent distinction of moods. Tiie Indicative Mood is converted into the Sub- junctive by the expression of a condition, motive, wish, supposition, &c. being superadded to it : so the Potential JMood, may in like manner be turned into the Subjunctive ; as will be seen in the follow- f ing examples : " If I could deceive him, I should/^ ablior it ;" " Though iie should increase in wealth,, '. he would not be cluiritablc ;" " Even in prosperity' ' he would gain no esteem, unless he should conduct himself better." English Verbs have hillicrto been commonlv divided hV.o whnt has been ca'ie.l R 'g'llar and lire-jiiLir ; ilio former, com- pre.'ionding siicli N'erba n.i (orii: ilie Perfect or Past Par ic-iple, in ed ; and the litter snrU ns do not form it with ihat lerniini- ^ ETYMOLOGY. 47 of these classed as Irreffular nm in r.^?-< ^ t^ n.any of .hose whose pf plnido o Zi ^ ^^^ ^T^" ''"'" these, whose Past Panic pi 2 r::," ;''' " ^°' '"^'^^f' &c. which are more rrgular accord n."' .n .. r ""^' ''"^■' I their variety of verb., ^han rho:'; ;h o Pre;;n^ 'r'lT' '/ in y, (as ear,-,,.) .hou.h their ^an pJ^^nZTnTLeT ioll lurrangcment must save a ^r.^i, r'»,i ^r ,■ " V P "'* "^"^ •rinid.of the c-::cultie« of Fn„Li v' . 7"' comph.n so iiv.ded Vca. into a Fir^t and S.c.La.Vco^^g^'onll ' '^'^ FIRST CONJUGATION. The first Cotijuiration compi-chcncls all Vcrb^ on oVt'" ^?'''J'' "i;'^ ^'-^ ^^^' «-^ ^'- fi'-^ pe- on of t.ic Irnperlect, Perfect, and Pluperfect or mis rai t^cipie. It contains livo varieties. VARlETiT I. Comprehends all Verbs that end in e as Inr. • ^Uh^rtntnattotis d, si, ik, and ., • are added tl; han?a'Ln:nd:'^r^^^°^'^"^^'-' ^"' -^ lu.ity^^i'irml'^ -added to the .ecc.d person of ,be r "'^1 I iinew, nou knptv^ci •" .i i r i 48 ETYMOLOGY. c is not cut off. but when ing is added it ia : as love, loving^ exce{>t the verb ends in ee, as, agree, a- greeing. The greatest number of English Verbs end in fit and are such as, love, place, ensure, educate, re- pine, invite, revere, revenge, refuse, handle, strug- gle, embezzle, agree, decree, fee, &c, VARIETY II. Comprehends all such Verbs as end in vowels, (except e or cc,) in two consonants ; in a consonant preceded by a diphthong ; in a diphthong ; in three letters, where the middle one is a vowel, and the other two consonants, (except those ending in /,) when the accent is not on tbfj last syllable. When the terminations ed, ing, he. are added, no letter is cut ofT : But in the verbs ending in cli, sh, o, x, s, and c, when s, st, or th, is added, an e is put be- fore them, as in fix, fixes ; wish, wishes ; echo, echoeth, &.c.* The Verbs are such as, kill, stuff, dress, mind, insult, trick, wish, pitch, refrain, obey, dismay, en- joy, bestow, renew, weight, fix, buzz, woo, open, widen, hasten, differ, poison, foster, visit, ren- der, &c. VARIETY III. Comprehends all such Verbs, as end in three letters, when the middle one is a vowel, and the other two consonants ; and is accented on the last syllable, and those ending in /, however accented ' \Vhen the terminations ed, ing, est, clh, are added! the last consonant is doubled, but when s is added it is not. The verbs are such as, compel distil, fulfil, re- mit, allot, win, ontrap, travel, level, regret, let, blot, deter, inter, pen, beg, brag, Stc. t7 zis^zi en 501 as, '« He elomachs ihat affront," ETYMOLOGY. 4y VARIETY IV. Comprehends all such Verbs, as end in?/ after a Consonant : When cd, est, &.c. arc added, the y is changed into i ; but when in^ is added the y is retained. The Verbs are such as, marry, envy, reply, bu- ry, crucify, comply, study, occupy, try, fly, rec- tify, Stc. VARIETY V. Comprehends certain Verbs, that have ea or ee in the Present Tense, and end in d, (except flee,) and lose the a r.r an e in liie other Tenses, and Past Participle. The verbs are : Present. Imp. Per/, and Present. Imp. Per/, nnd Past Patt Load, led. Mislead, misled. Breed, Feed. K neac Plead, Bleed, 1 kned or kneaded. pled, or pleaded, bled. ce Fl Speed, Weed. Past Part. bred, fed. flee, sped. wed or weed- ed. Shed and shred have their Present, Perfect and Past Tenses, and Past Participle all th e same. An Active Verb of the first Coniufrat jugated in the following manner TO LOVE. INDICATIVE MOOD. Present Tense. njugation is con- SIXGULAR. 1. I love. 2. Thou lovest. 3. ile, she, or it loves, or loveth. PLURAL. 1. We love. 2. Ye or you love. ] 3. They lovo. 60 ETTMOLOGY. SINGULAR. 1. I loved. 2. Thou lovedst. 3. He loved. Imperfect Tcnsi PLURAL. 1. We loved. 2. Yc or you loved. 3. They loved. Pcrject Tense. SINCCLAR. PLURAL. 1. Ihavc J..vod. J. Wc have loved. 2. Thou hast loved. 2. Ye or you have loved. 3. He has or hath loved. 3. 'J hey have iu\ cd. Pluperfect Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 . I had loved. \. We had loved. 2. Thou hadst loved. 2. Y^e or you had loved S. He had loved. 3. They had loved. First Future Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1. I shall or will love. 1. We shall or will lovp. 2. Thou shalt or wilt love. 2. Y"e or you shall orwill love. 3. Ho shall or will love. 3. They shall or will love. Second Future or Future Perfect Tchsc. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1. I shall have loved. i. We shall have loved 2. Thou wilt have loved. 2. Ye or yuu will have loved. 3. He will have loved. 3. They will have loved. ' IMPERATIVE MOOD. SINGULAR. PLURAL. 1 . Let me love. j. Let us love. 2. Love thou, or do thou 2. Love ye or you. or do lOve. ye Jo,.p 3. Let him love. 3. Let them love. EXrMOLOGy. POTENTIAL MOOD. Present Tense. 61 SIXaULAR. 1. I may or can love. 2. Thou may St or canst love. !3. He may or can love, PLURAL, 1 . We may or can love. 2. Ye or you may or can love. 3. They may or can love. Impcrjed Tense. SINGULAR. 11. 1 might, could, -.vould, or should love. [2. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst love. J. He might, could, would or should love. PLURAL. 1. We might, could, would or should love. 2. Ye or you might, could would or should lovo 3. They might, could, would or should love. Perfect Tense. SINGULAR. PLURAL. I may or can have I . We may or can have Thou mayst or canst 2. Ye or you may or can have loved. have loved. lie may or can have 3. Thov may or can have ^°^^^- loved. Pluperfect Tense. SIXGULAR. p. I might, could, would, or should have loved. Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or shouldst have loved. He might, could, would vr should have loved. 1 o PLURAL. We might, could, would or should have loved. Ye or you might, could would or should have loved. 3. Thev miorht. could would or should have loved. 52 ETYMOLOCr. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. 1. If 1 love. 2. If thou love. 3. If he love. PLURAL. 1. If we love. 2. If ye or you love. 3. If thuy love.* INFINITIVE MOOD, Present. To love. Perfect. To have loved. PARTICIPLES. Pivsrji/. Lovinw. Perfiol. Loved. Compound Pcrject. Having loved. PASSIVE. Verbs Passive oftlie first Conjugation form their Perfect Participle by the addition of - you might, could, would or .should have been loved. 3. They mirrht, could, would or should havo been loved. SUBJUNCTIVE MOOD. Present Tense. SINGULAR. L If I be loved. i. If thou be loved. 3. If he be loved. TLURAL. 1. If we be loved. 3. Ifyeoryou be loved. 3, if they be loved. Imperfect Tense. SINGULAR. 1 . If I were loved. '2. If thou wert loved. 3. Jt he were loved. PLURAL. 1. If we were loved. 2. Ifyeorvou were loved 3. If they wers loved.* INFINITIVE MOOD. Present Tense. Pcrfed. To be loved. To have been loved" PARTICIPLES. Prcsnit. Beinnr loved. Perfect or Passive. Loved. Compound Perfect. liavin- been joved. ' ihe remaining Tenses of ihis Mood, are, in general similar to ihe tofres^i-oaJent Tense/j of tlie ludicaijve Mood. ' 56 ETYMOLOOT, Thone T'n^e^ nro ca!!c<' Simple rpmeev h; ve be^n ro well estab- lished by all wrilers. Thou is not i bed indeed in common con- ETYMOLOCV. 57 vPTfalion ; nor is ye tnucli in nar, except on reiipioiii tubiflctM, \vfi«>re iiovvever il is abuiidintly used in ixich etpresaiona as, " Ye men of (i ililee," &c. I'e seem* even at present bow • pver preferred to you after the Verb in tLe linperaijve Muod : a-, *• Avvjke je, arise ye," &c. There is one putticulBr Sect that alivnjB prefer thou lo ynu, that IS ibe nuct of Friends or Quakers. Some ol liiAni however, use it rather ungranimatically wnh a ainjfiilar vefb, and say, " Thou may go, if liioii wiil go," &c. Oihera nub- * i u'e llio Oljiciive thet lor the Nominulivc, aud say, " Thet does, thee ihiiilis," Stc. There apppirs to be no objection to always ming thou and noi you ; b'l' it ou^^hi lo bo used in accordance wuh the Rules oi Cirauimur. SECONDARY CONJUGATION. OR OF VLUns USUALLY TEllMED inUEGULAR. In a dinV^rcnt or Seconuary Coninfjation, tnny be ariaii2ffMl all such V^orlis as do not loiiii tlieir Im- perfect or Past Tenses or Past Participle in cd, but in another torniinaiion. Tlity will be louud to cou- tain about four varieties, VARIETY I. Cornpreliends certain Verbs ihnt have their Im- pprfect Tenses mosti) ditlercnt from their Perfect ; and their Perfect Tenses and Past Participle the same ; wiiiclt end in n, en or nc, and some in m or me. The Imperfect Tense lias o, oo, a or i, before tiie las* consonant, and some verbs in this tense end in w ; tho^ie that have a diphthong in the Present {:fcncrally lose a letter in the Perfect 'lYnse and Past Participle, and form tiiem from the Imperfect ;. whereas the others usually form them from the Pre- sent by addinjT 71, en or nr. Some end in ?j, m or iut, m all the Tenses and Past Participle ; and a few follow no certain rule. List of \crhs that have before the last conson- ant of tiio Iiniicrfect : 58 ETYMOLOGY. Present. Arise, Rise, l|eget, Forget, Get, Ride, Stride, Drive, Rive, Shrive, Strive, Thrive, Write. Underwrite, Smite, Shine, Go, Undergo, Imperfect. arose, rose, begot, forgot, got. rode, strode, drove, rove, shrove, strove, throve, wrote, underwrote, smote or smit, shone, go or went, ^ unchrgo or un- ( derwcnt, Perf 5 Past Part. arisen. risen. begotten.* forgotten.*" gotten."' ridden.* stridden.* driven. riven, f. shriven. striven, f. thriven, f, written. underwritten. smitteji. slione. gone. undergone. Verbs which have oo before the last consonant of the Imperfect. Present. Take, Forsake, INIislake, Partake, Undertake, Overtake, Shake, Unshakc, Imperfect. took, forsook, mistook, partook, undertook, overtook, shook, unshook, Perf. §• Past Part. taken. forsaken. mistaken. partaken. undertaken. overtaken. shaken. unshaken. \erbs havmg the diphthongs ea, ce, and oo, m the Present, form their Pertect anc Past Partici- ples from the Imperfect; which has o before the last consonant. Piesetit Ce forth, Bear, io cavrv ar, lo bring h, Imperfect. > bore or bare, Perf. k Past Part born. Forb ' car, 5 wear. lesent. car. ETTMOLOCr. 1 orsivcar, ear, J^reak, Spcau' Jl W Int forbore , tore, swore or s'.vare forswore, wore. brok eor br.ike. cave, cave, erwcave, I)oke or spak hovc^ wove. enve, to splif^ do interwove, Sleal^ Tread, '^reeze. stole, trode^ ozo. vo or cleft. Choose crchuse, cbos oeetiie, «^,i sod. Verbs that h 6d Pfrf- & Past Part. forborn. torn, sworn. forsworn. Won,. hroken. spoken. hoven. p. woven. interwoven. clo^ en or cliii. stoJen. trodden. frozen. chosen. sodden. » eros mat have « !.c*ore fhn I . the Imperfect. ^ ^ ^""^ ^^^^ consonant of Bal, Pyesent. lie. ■B'.ut, JJi.i, FwrbiJ, Jl^ut, i: "^Mavo, 5iiave. G ave. I.adc ^ l.Oiul, Liu. / SI o i,e ( :/ojt, i)it, a\. ImperJ haLc, beat, bade, ale. ?'ive, L^rurc, lade, load, »> lav. c:t. oh 'til sput, nui r. Per/. & Pqj,^ p^^f taken r. beaten. ■* biddf'Zi * forbiuclon. eaten, given. cngr;acn. f. 5ba\Cii. V. .i'aven i\ iadon. F loadcijyj'ladci. -. lain, . h.ipen F. spiLten ' waxen i • t!ie Ii Wlbc'r' '■""^ * '^'■"^ ">■' ■» ■ =°"so„ ,„, 'cse.il. !m; •feet. Pfff "* ■"* Vli. CO ETYMOLOGY. Prenent. Imperfect. rerf. & Past Part Chide, chid or cliode, chidden. Hide, hid. hidden. Unhide, unhid, unhidden. Slide, slid, slidden. F. Do, did, done. Misdo, misdid, misdonc. Undo, undid, undone. Verba which end in iv in the Impcrlect. Prese tit. Imperfect. Perf. k Past Part. Blow, Crow, blew, blown. crow, (irow, grew, grown. Know, knew. known. Draw. drew. drawn. Withdraw, withdrew, withdrawn. tlew. hctc, F. hewn. F. Mow, mov', F. mown. F. Show or show. slion- or sJiciv. F. shown or shewn. Strow or strew, stroll' or slrcir , F.strown or strewn Sow, sow, F. sown. F. Fly, flew, flown. Slay, slew, slain. See, saw, seen. Foresee foresaw. foreseen. Saw, saw, F. sawn. F. i Verbs which end in n, Tenses and Past Participle. HI, or me, in all the of Present. Imperfect. Ferf & Begin, began, begun. S[.in, span, spun. Run, ran, run. Win, won, won. Swim, swam, swum, Come, came. come. B-rr.orno. l.'t r.anie. become BTTMOLOGY. 61 Verbs that follow no cerl.ain Rule ot Variety I. Present. Imperfect. PerJ. ^ Pa,t Part. Be or am, was and were, been. Befal, befell, befallen. 55weil, sioell. F. swollen, f. VARIETY If. and pS?t "'^' ^" ^r^T.' '^''* ^^"""^ t'^^'"'- Imperfect and 1 erfect Tenses and Past Participles in / Tn tr^rtent"""^'^"^^' ^^^^ ccZ.'t o/h^ers d n the Present is changed into / in the Past. Several have ^/.before the ^ and many have the PreLnf Imperfect and Perfect Tenses, and Past Participle the Bame. Many that have a diphthong in the Pre^ triple."' ' '"'''' " ''' '''''' ^'"^^^ -^ P-' Pa- Verbs which seem formed by changing ecZ into t. Present. Imp. Perf. and Present. Imp. Perf. and Past Part. Lose, lost. Pass, pagi_ y Toss, tost. F. Pen, (/o coop / L'g'it, lit. F. Verbs which end in ^la the Present, and in / in the other Tenses, and Past Participle. Past Part. Burn, burnt. F. Learn, learnt. DweU, dwelt. Spell, spelt. F. Dreara, dreamt, f. Spill, spilt. F. Mean, meant. Present. Bend, Unbend, Blend, Lend, Send, -r» . licuu. Imp. Perf. and Past Pari. bent. F. unbent, p. blent, lent, sent. rent. Present. Spend, Build, Gild, Gird. Geld, fmp. Per;, and Past Part. spent, built, p. gilt. F. girt. F. es ETYMOLOOr. Verbs that have a diphthong in the Present, Icse a letter in the other Tenses and Past Participle. Pfeseni. Bereave, Leave, Creep, Kepp, S'eep, Sweep, Weep, In: p. Perf. and Past Part. bereft, f. left. crept. kept, slept. swept. wept. F. F. F. Present. Sweat, Meet, Feel, Kneel, Deal, Shoot, Imp. Perf. and Past Part. swot or swat met. felt. knell. F *d«alc. F. shot. Verbs which have s^h before the t in the Imper* feet. Perfect, and Past Participle. Ireseat. .Beseech, Bring, Scpk, Work, Imp. Perf. and Past Part. besought. F. brought, sought, wrought. F. Present. Fight, Catch, Teach, Imp. Perf. and Past Part. fought, caught. F. taught. Verbs ending in t, which have the Present and all other Tenses, and the Past Partioip^ ^he same. shut, wet p. Burst. slit. hit. Cast. let. knit. r. Cost, set, split. Thrust. beset. quit, f. Hurt. cut. put. VARIETY III. Comprehends such Verbs as end their Past Par- ticinle in ^ and A;. They have generally i in the Pre!?ent, and u in the other Tenses and Past Parti- ciple. Such as have an n (except hang, swing, and wring, )may form their Imperfect with a, as well as «, as sank or sunk, but not the Perlect or Past Participle. • Deal thongh it does not loin the a in upelling, yet is pronounced to tba Past Team, and Paa Participle, ••ifsr.ell- «u deli. I F F. Pceaent. Cling, Fling, Hing or ) King, Sing, Preeenf. Drink, Sink, Slink, Shrink, ETTMOLOGY. Verbs with ft-. Imp. Perf. and Preient. Past Pan. clung, flunnf. hung. F. rung, sung. Spring, Stinff, ^^trIng, Siving, Wrinjj, Dig, ° Verbs with h: Imp. Perf. and Preacot. Pnst Part. *drank. sunk, slunk. shrunk. Stink, Stick, Strike, Awake, 69 Imp. Perf. tnd P^st P/irt. sprung. stun», stiiing. p. SWunir. wrung, dug. F. Imp. Perf. and Past Pan. stunk, stuck, struck, awoke, r. VARIETF IV. Comprehends all such Verbs as form their Im.. perfect and Perfect Tenses, and Past Particfp e in d w.th any other letter before it than e. They end n "tLt' "''/^'."'^' ^^' ''^'' '^' Such as end in y 'n the Present change it to i before d in the othe? in ihoP ? T"^ '" *''^ •■^'^- Such as have old aniT„r,:r!>"'' '^V? ^'^ 'n ^''<^ rest. Such as have Verbs which end in v in thn Pro««.,* u in.o i i„ ,„e rest of .he Tc4L" t\ p/rpl', UcipT " Imp. Perf and Past Pan. laid, inlaid, belaid, underlaid, paid. Present. Repay, Sav, Unsay, Sta-', Un.stay, Imp. Perf. and Pafif Pan. rep-lid. ."^aid. unsaitl. staid. unstaid. I'hc Imperfect of drink i, only formed with a and not n. 64 ETYMOLOGY. Verbs which have irid in (ho Present, have ound in the other Tenses and Fast Participle. Present. Imp Perf. and Present. Imp. Perf. «ud Fast Part. Pa^l Part. Bind, bound. T'nhind, unbound. Find, found. I'liwiiid, unwound. Grind, ground. Uiigrind, unground. Wind, wound. Verbs which have old in the Present, have c/i in the other Tenses and Past Farticiplo. PreseiYf. Imp. Perf. and Present. Imp. Perf. and PttsiPart. Pa-t Part. Hold, held. Uphold, upheld. Behold, beheld. Withiiold, witiiheld. Verbs which have and in (he Present, have ood in the rest of the Tenses and Past Participle. Present. Stand, Misunder- stand, Imp. Perf. and Past Part. Stood, inisuniler- stood. Present. Imp. Perf. and Past Part. Understand, understood. Withstand, withstood. Verbs which have ell in the Present, have old in the other Tenses and Fast Participle. Preserit. Sell, Tell, Resell, Imp. Pdif. and Present. Past Part. Imp. Perf. and Past Part. sold, told, resold. Undersell, undersold. Unscll, unsold. UatelJ, untold. Verbs which follow no certain rule of variety IV. Present. Imp. Perl, and Prosenl. Imp Perf. and Past Part. Clothe, Make, Abide, iiave, clad, made, abode, bad. Shoe, Hear, Unhear. Paal Part. shod. heard. unheard. have rf. au(i *art. nd. nd. md. elJ, iu rf. and ?art. Id. have e. ;rf. and Part. tood, )ud. ETrMOLOGY. ^ Rfiad, spread, and rid, are the same in all th« Tenses and ^usi Parliciple ; but read £.nd spre*tJ thourrii spelled idc :;une, are Pronounced as if spelll ed n/, sprcd, in the Past Tenses and Past Parti- ciple, rnn- ^'^"^^^ ""^ ^''u ^^^^"^^'•y Conjugation may be conjugated much the same a the first ; but the lenses of the Imperfect oiten dilfer from the Perfect la-t,c,ple : as. Present, " I know :" Imperfert ••J i'liew, ordidknow." Present, "Idrivc-" frV perlf.t, «' I drove, or did drive." JVescnt "I P ■> ' '.' ^'?f u^"^^^'. " ^ '""S or sang, or did sing." i- ' !Kct, I have known ;" " I have driven •" ' « T ti.ive sung." ' * The Passive voice is made as in the first con- f- jugation, by the Verb to be, with the Pasr Particiole- J uight'^"" "' ^*«^^"^e"> I am hurt, lam P.c/t'"^ Verbs whose Perfect, Imperfect, and Past lenses, and Past Participle are t', e .ams • as shod, knit, rid, &c. seem incapable cf btino- forml ed so as to make a proper distinction between the Present and the Imperfect Tenses, except by the "rd;dT.i:''^ "' ''"""^' '^^'^"^^ ;" hnpLtect rrnr.Z^%^''^'''^i^^'^ ^^^ ^^ Conjugated differetitly from the form^ above shewn, by adding irs I're'^ent all T.T ^T'^'flS '" ^''" ^"^''i^'T 'ol^e, 'hrougf all Its Moods and Tenses : as instead of ' 1 teadi thou teachest. he teaches," &o. ; we m uy say, "i amieachmg., thou art teaching, he is tea liir./'\<^c and on through all the variations of th. Auxiliary i ncse forms of expression are adapted to particulir acts, not to general habits or affections c.f (he mind Ineyare frequently applied to Neuter Verb^ : as* I am musing, he is sleeping." This form oftho vein 13 on mrmy occasions hptf^r fi.nr. u.^ =;. i^ loroi, but some verbs will not admit ofit, as wcTaa F 2 66 ETYMOLOCT. •ay " I respect him ;" but not, " I am respecting Tho Neuter Verb is conjugated like the Active. But as il partakes somewhat of tlic nature oftlie Pas- sive, It ndmiis in many instances ofthe Passive form retaining still tho Neuter signification : as " 1 am arrived :" - I was .;onc ;" " 1 am grown." The Aux.hary Verb am, vjas, in this case, precisely de- fines the tune of tli-; action or event, but does not change the nature of il. The Passive form still ex- pre jsmg, not properly a passion, but only a state or condition of bein<;. In the forcgoinor Ijst of Verbs wc have not in- serted all those that have been contracted from ed into i though often used, not only in familiar dis- course, but even in Printing, as blest, drest, addrest prcst dropt, tript, mixt, 6tc. Those we have in- serted, as spell, spilt, burnt, past, tosi, &c. bein«r in general use, and to bo found in J^.ctionaries, could not with propriety be omhted. Some that IMurray seemed to thmk ratlier obsolete are placed in the list however, as ridden, gotten, spitten, slank, stank &.C. as notwithstanding what he has said, they are nsed by many ; for besides being in the Bible and Shakespeare's works, books which are in daily use they are inserted in some ofthe latest Dictionaries ' yet we have omitted such words as are quite obso- lete, as wreathen, holpen, molten, holtlen, drunken gat, &c. ' OF REDT.NDANT VERBS. Redundant Verbs are such as have terminations both ofthe First and Secondary Conjugation which many verbs have : as dealed, dealt ; digged dutr • sawed, sawn, &c. Those ofthe S-'Condary Confu- SI!l!!!! ^^^'f '^'"'l^''' ,^'<^ /narked with f. for first conju- si.icn. iii somo Vgrba the ixnporfcci is someiiinc* ETTMOLOGT. 67 used for the Perfect, such have the mark * put to them. ^ In Jhe forecoing list of Verbs of »ho Second«j Conju- gstion, the Imperfect i, mostly d.ffe.cni from li.e Present ; but when.. ,. ,|,e aamo as the Pre.en. and .8 m«de ihe Imperfect byd.d. ,t ,« msened in Ilahc, : a., ^^ mow, did mow ^ mown ; and .he letter r. ,. «,«o ,,„t .fcr .uch o »hew it ^. reduMd.n. and h«« ,he Par,ic.,.'o m .,/. r„i. «eem« more pro- per .h«naway« in.nning oal> the Imperfect .n fj. a9 both vo,dy,eahe«n. Murray and o.hnrs have some.i.nes been l! .n" r." v"k "/"r""'' •'>■ «"'y '""-^r-na ''..e Imperfect in ed. Lholh I, h ''/^'•' ""'''"* "'« '>»l'"^eti c/aJ is omitted moL/^h much uded. lonju- tiinc» OF DEFECTIVE VERBS. Defective Verbs arc such as are only used in some of ti.e Aioods and Tenses, or udrnit bui of few- terniinations. Aware and ri'onl arc used after the verb lo be : as- I ari) aware of this/' - He was wont to do so." V.ioftlTxx '"/^^^•^/ "seJ in tlie Imperative and- 1 olcntial Aioods. Durst* ig only used in the Present. Quolh isoniv used ir> the Imperfect Tense. nr^lv !!^,f'V' "''^'^ •''"* '" ^^'"^ Imperfect, and admits only 01 i\^ teruitnatton ol the second person. Ti.ose Auxiliaries, which are used in the con- ditional onses : ai.l have .k. Perfect Tet.sc or Past ■^iciplc^; and aJmii but of tlie teimiimtion of the thati'ti/nr,''.''"^""'''^*''''^ ""^ thelrrperfectofdarc, b»t heb3 'e'-. "'f'""^ ''^r'"g f^-en .here, bur, - I d,n.t t'o -o there. ' *'"" ""^ """■'£" "* 8'^ ^'^ «o» ^^ving been but i[i.r';l!!;"'::''V'^''''^f'"-'*''«tho^«"p«r'^ct r,fg.. ^««6 »U pre«m ,;,.„;/. "'"'" '" '""'"' """" Siiakcspeaie'. 63 ETYMOLOOT. second person nrn can, may. might, could, tcould thoHld, tviU Kiid shall. ' Must which has no respect (properly speaking) to time, though it iscommonlv "sed in the Present • this verb is used as an Auxiliary in the Potcntiai Mood. Oui^ht which has also proporly speaking no res- pect to time, and has only the termination of the second person: this verb implies duty, and is always tollowed by an Infimiive. Aw^ire, wont, durst, beware, quoth, and must admit ro addition of a termination. ' In most languages, there are some verbs which are detective with ros:poct to persons. These are denominated Impersonal Verbs. They are used on- , Jy in the third person, because they refer to a sub- ject peculiarly appropriated to that person : as "It rams, ,t snows, it hails, it lightens, it thunders." Many other verbs are also used impersonally : as I " It appears, it follows," actively, and '= it is re- j ported, it is rumoured," passively. Methinks, and ' niethought, also appear to be Impersonal V^erbs — Tnough the word Imper.sonal, implies a total absence • i person, a thing, which it may be said, cannot be, and therefore this tern is improper .• yet as the act they speak of, is not implied to be done by a person, but by some unknown power, (as when it rains is supposed to be done by the Elements), it does'not appear to bo so very improper. EXERCISES ON VERBS. Corijugate the frilowing Verbs in tha Indicative Mood, Present and Imperfect or Past Tenses: gain read, beat, oat, interpose, walk, slit, rid, slide, drew! bring, lose, pay, ring. Co njuguie the ioUowing Verbs in the Potential ETV.MOLOCy. 69 IVIood, Imnornnrt Tense • frir K i i a \ ■ '^"s*- • icar, hope, work, dream fly, consent, impose, contravert, weep. "'*-"'«. tlv. (i°"J;'-"^^ ,^''^ n>Ilowing Verbs in the Subjunc- tive Mood, l>erlect 1 en.e : ,l,ive. prepare, storm omit, remit, carry, bind, echo, hinder, visit. Conjugate the folh.wing Verbs in the Impera- tivc Mood : believe, depart, invent, give. Lir abolish, dig, sink, kill. wind-. ^ ' ^' Write the following Verbs in the fnfiniffve Mood Present and Perfect Tenses : grow, have, bring prosper, decrease, agree, make, take, furnish, sit. mite the Present, Perfect or Past, and com- pound Participles of the following Verbs : confess drive disturb, please, know, begin, sit, eat see lie' put, decree, keep, bind, gird, len'd, feel/ai's'e h;ow' dream, set, ay, shed, iind, sell, feed, understand* drink, seek, lose, shake, fly, wring, catch, make Mon?°;^"^^'^^''' following Verbs in the Indicative Mood, Present and Perfect Tenses of the Passive voice : honor, amuse, slight, enlighten, gird be- leave, sell, toss, take, swell, burn. mean. ^ ' Conjugate the following A^orbs in the Indicative Mood Pluperfect and First Future Tenses con! rivc, fly, grow, wring, brin^., ior.^ke, lend, ' li^ht invent, beset, interweave. " ' Write the following Verbs Se( Slav, draw, \T^ I r c o '^ '" *'^G Indicative Mood, Imperfect and Second Futui Passive voice : slav. ,lrnv. crow, burst, thro, ire Tenses of the 1 ,. — -■ ' — "' '^"-'»v, burst, throw crown defeat, grind, hear, strike, drink, bear h? hold, beat, fall, behold. ' ' '^'^• Tr. ^Wr^'' following Verbs in the Present and Imperfect Tenses of, he Potential and Subjunctive h^:±S:r!!r::,^'^!^^:J--'^:--i'.^'-,biJw,ru„, IS he? hold, wet. SV>i ill ) iiitai iiii'' niost easily, (not easglier ETTMOLOGT. 71 most, best. Worst, least wisely. parisT„^° ''""^'^•"S "'"^ ^« '^'"^^^ Irregular, com- ^luch, more, )ye'l. better, Badly or ill, w„rso, Little wisely, lo^s nisely, Many Adverbs are fortr.ed from Adjective nr Part.c.plos. by adding /,, or chan-Mngt. receded ;^.rablo.^d..rabiy^;'l;,e.'an;iyrg:n^.:! ly ; s.nglo, smglv ; undoubted, undoukedly ^ 1. Ofjyumbcr foui times," S.o. «,hnr?" ^^^^.^'^^ •• as, " Here, there, where • «e- wh.th;/h".r'''T'. everywhere, nowhere! h'erein h'n'e /heilr' h"''"'"' "'^"^^^' ^«rwnrd,'when o! ward tl .^ k' 'f ^"^e^^ever, whithersoever, backl waid, thereabout, whereabout, wheresoever," &c. 4. Of r/me. Indefinite, P., sent Pa-t or fn come : .,, ., y^^^ to'day, ulread/, be^^e ce^' f^-T' ''''''''''' l^ereto'fire, hifh^/rto o '^ honceforTir'T'""^',"?'^'"'' '^^'•^^^^'^^' '"^n^efor^ard! henceforth, by and by, instantly, presently imme- diately, straightway, oft, often, ofttLes, ollin res soon, se dom. daily, weekly, monthly,' yearlyrall occaaionally; rarelyrlc!'''' "'''''"^' ''^^"""»^^' as, •' Once, twice, thiice. 73 ETYMOLOGY. i 5. OC Quantlfii : as, "Much, little, greatly, sufficiently, scarrcly, hardly, barely, merely, only, partly, nearly, mostly, completely, abundantly, how much, how fjreat, enough, aliogctlu.-r, wholly, total- ly, exceedingly, excessively, perfectly," &c. 6 Of Marnier or Cinnlily : as, " Wisely, fool- ishly, justly, well, ill, badly, forcibly weakly, thus, so, somohow, othorwige, unju^'tly, quickly, slowly, ably, furiously, quietly, across, together, apart, asunder, namely, necessarily, particularly," &.c. 7. Of Dnnht : as, •' Perhaps, peradventurc, possibly, perchance, may be so," &.c. 8. Of Jlplrmalion : as, •' Verily, truly, un- -doubtedly, doubtless, certainly, yea, yes, surely, indeed, really," &.c. 9. Of A'r^nflon : as, " ?iay, bo, not, by no| means, not at all, in no wise," &.c. 10. Of fnferrogation : a«, " How, why, where- fore, whither, when, whence," &.c. 11. Of Comparison : a.g, ' More, most, better, best, worse, worst, less, least, very, almost, little, alike." &c. Many Adverbs are formed by a combination of some propositions with the Adverbs of place, here,! there and whoiO : as. •' Th,jreof, whereof ; hereto, thereto, whf^rrto ; hereby, thereby, whereby ; here- with, therewith, wherewi'h ; herein, therein, where-j in ; wherefore, tliereforc, (thaf. is wherrfor, there- for;) hereon, horeupon; thereon,, thereupon; where* OQ, whereupon," Stc. Some Adverbs are composed of Nouns and the] letter c. for at, on, kc. : as. " A side, a foot, a heati, aslee . a bed, afloat, a shore, a back," *I^-c. The words uhcn, whc*'e, ivhcncc, ivhUkcr, when' e-.'cr, ic'licrevcr, ^-r. mav be called Adverbial Con- i- or place, they aroJ^^Z^" ' '' ^^^^^ ''''''' . The ^vordihnr fore, ig an Adverb, when withonf J0.n.„. sentences it only gives the sense of! "Z- connects it is a Conjunction : as, " He is ro.u] Ihcrcfuve he s hannv " 'ii.^ . g<^oi„ed'to an^o^t ^e.:;'ir^^:u;hi;irhet?^th;r^n.^^""^^^ s.ngle, and unsupported byt^y Ztr co nnSr they may be called Conjunctions <^^""ection. Many words are used sometimes as Adjectives tcnccs, Atore men than women were there •" <• r am »,ore dihgent than he." In the former sentence it IS an Adjective, in the latter an Adverb. '"^"^^'"'^^ Other words are sometimes used as Si.'o.Hr, •ves, and sometimes as Adverbs : as " To 'hll' lesson is longer than yost-rday's •" hrV^ tni ^^ % yesler^lay are Substantives. :L^.dm " 1^ p;^:^^ sivc case : but in the phrase, " He cimel . ;m%.^r^setsoutJ.:.,.^M4^^-^^^^^^^ IVK V'^''' '""^'^'« "sed as all three ■ \T Where m.^cA, is given, much is required-'' "'ji/' a money has been expended •" " u i. ^ ^' go than to stay." In the 'first of fh"'' ^'''''' '^ , ^nueh is a Substantive / i„ fh^ second ft """'"a'/^ Ijective ; and in the thiird an Adve'b ' ' ''' ^^" I Adverb, m several words; such\re, long since] 74 ETYMOLOGY. none al all, at length, by no means, bij all means, a cereal dtal, a great many, ere long, a f^io dav" ago, &.C. OF PREPOSITIONS. Propositions serve to connect words with one another, and to shew the relation between them. — They are, tor the most part put before Nouns and Pronouns : as', " He went/>om London /o York ;" " She is above disguise ;" " They are instructed it/ him." The following are the principle Prepositions: Of. To, For, By, With, In. Out. Into, Within, Withoi't, over, among, under, beside, through, till, throughout, until, above, mixt, below, since, between, from, betwixt, beneath, beyond. at. near, up. down, except, before, athwart, behind, towards, off, instead of on or upon, according amongst, to. after, out of. about, against, underneath. Several words ending in ing : as, concerning, excepting, respecting, regarding, 8ic. Prepositions in their original acceptation, seem to have denoted relations to place, but they are now uaed figuratively to express other relations. For ex- ample, froni the phrase, " As they who are above, have in several respects the advantage of such as are below.''* Prepositions expressing hi^h and low plac .? are used for superiority and inferiority in general : as, " He is aftove disguise ;" '• He rules over a willing people ;" " We should do nothing beneath our chaiacter." The importance of Prepositions, will be per- ceived by the explanation of some of them. ETYMOLOGY. 75 means. h one em. — s and Drk ;" ;ted 6t/ DHS: pt. art. rds. ad of. iding if. ning, seem 3 now or ex- ihove, ich as d low ty in rules thing i O/'deiiotcs possess on or belonffintr ; q^^ '^T\ , , - i-""-->'°='i'Jii ur ueionffir house of my friend ;" that ig " Thu h to my friend ;" - He died o/^a fe le consequence of a fever. ouse belonging ver ;" that is "Jn To or unto is opposite to from • aq «' w« i from Salisbury to London n n ? / i , '"'^^ Ikth." i-onaon, and y,om L idon to For, indicates the cause or motive of anv action or circumstance, &c. as, " He loves her Z^nr ^fi ? '« on account of) her amiable quaiules "^ ^'^^' a^rpnf ^ '' generally used with reference to the cause tK "i'Trn'- ' '^' "Hewaskilled6/afan - •' Thf^ . ^'" '?'I^" """^^ °^''*« l^eing killed - the^:?,t':?:;:^^^"''^^^'-^''^^atis,^Hew.s good terms tn7/, ca"h other '^ Vr.;,,, j^,, ''!;'' °" ;;^^;.n,mentormeans;'as,./;;t:t:r,!^^: ofbe^^; "'fetu/: t"' '^''^fw''^ ^*^^^ - — ^r is during) the .?'ar, 83?'.' ^\r'%'"" '"'* ^'^^^^ city •" <' shp r '^ ' ^^^ ^^^«^'« '■» the ^"y . bhe lives uj affluence :" «' Hp rllri ;» revenge :" " He fs m love. ' ^'"^ '^ '"* //t/o is used after varh<5 th^ ;.v, i per .3 convened .„,<. l„a. ;" " He'l^e; „„: ^Z " hL finished H,„"ork ,ri Z "Jh ""r "' "'^ ''°''":" 76 ETYMOLOGY, I ;:i« §'1 '^ wisdom." Jt is also opposetl to tvU/t : as, " You may go with wo, or lo'Uhoui me." The import of the remaininrr Prepositions will oe understood, without a particular d.;tail of them ; especially, as we shall in the Syntax, point out many errors, in using one for another. as ac i Participles are frequently tjscd as Prepositions: IS, exceptinir, respectinnr, touching, concerning, iccording - Ihey were all in fault, cxceul or cxccnt- ng \\\m.' * ^ Some of the Propositions, appear to be Conjunc- tions, irom their situation in a sentence ; as, '''Aflcr their^prisons were thrown open," 6v:c. '^ Bejorcl die ;" «' They made haste to he prepared ao;aiml thn.r friends arrived." T.-ai \i th.e noun lime which is understood, be added, they will lose their Conjunc- tive term : as, "4//cr (the time when) their prisons were thrown open," ^-c. The Prepositions «/7c'i-, above, beneath, and sev- rrRl others somefimes appear to be Advrrhs Ihey had their reward soon aficr ;" " He died not long bcfo>-c ;" '' f|o dwells above " : as. Hi But if the Nop.ns /,-,„; and;,/,/a' be added, they 'will lose theii adverbial torm : as, «' He died not long brfore that I Verbs are often compounded of a Verb and a Preposition ; as, to uphold, to invest, to overlook; and this composition sometimes gives a new sense to the Verb ; as, to undcr.«tand, to wi'hdraw, to for- give. But the Prepositions is also frequently placed separately al\er the Verb, in which situation, it also allacts the sense, and gives it a new meaning : as, i^ cad, IS to Ihruw ; but to cast up, or compute an '^ accon J, IS a d.ticrent thing. Thus, " To fulloi , to ' bearou4, to give over ;" so that the meaning of the V erb depends on the Preposition subjoined. In the composition of some words, there arc ETVMOLOGV. Vou 1 m""^^!,?i"?'>'"-l>'<-yod. which „ parable Prepositions 77 ans have called I Gra mniari- procreate. &c. but wh.ch Murr^Tas demV I^/^'k"' Prepositions, although so many^ have h. r ^^ opposite opinion, wliether H^ev^hn p ^" °^«" not. as they evidently nhprn/i'*' J^^^^P^^'^ions or the words they a e p /fi^ed ° th '" "^''"'"^ of tion as to their formation &c' ^ ^''"'^'^ ^^^^"- OF CONJUNCTIONS. arc more semcnces, to ,S \\,. U' "t "'' "^° "' connects only words r„„: ■• "sometjmca junctive. ' '° ''opulalive and the Dis' or .o?omfnut";et" ,S'''bt'"°' '""" '° -""«t tlier reside in London ".. T „i|| „„."'''' I"^ bro- company me ;■■ " Vnn „• i ^o, (/he will ac- good." ' ^°'""^''m'y, ieouscyoi: arc The Conjunction Disjunctive servp= „„. , connect words and continue other'sen.onoe" bu? V" y^fhedid ^'„t reio „=-''.''. T," ""''"'""^ "'i'--^. •he, went away w.tl'u. her -'"^ ""'"' "'"^ ''^^' '«' ^_^__Jhe following is a list ef the prindpal Conjunc- The Copulative — And iT tu , . . -ce, for. because, too, lo.'Utte.^t'ret:' "■ougi^y^.'.ti'ihor^rt'i "'■ r' "'■ "-". '«^'. -i--dW,so.pr>v^ded:t-:;^t:---:.x': G 2 7i) ETYMOLOGY. "i'l '' i If c so Conjunctions, have r-.lso been divided by Cram- maii-.ms, into llie conditional : as, Ji', provided, un- less, il'but. The Causal : 'as, lor. that, since, be- cause, tlicrerore. The Xdvorsative and J'l.xccnt'ivo • as, I3ut, yet, it not, notwithstandintj, except. Th Concessive : as, 'J'hough, although, fiien, if.so, s then, so as. Tiic Comparative, such as. Than, so as. for instance. And the Distributive, or such as are used in pairs : us, Nor and neitiier, as and as as and so, Sic. ' T!io sume wnnl, is occasinnnlly used both as a Conjuncti- on anvl us an Advcib ; aiul doinr.lime- u-< a P.'■cpo^i'ion, '• 1 rest then u;,(.n tlua ar';;iiniciit •," then is here a Conjinclion ; in the following phrape it is an Adverb : '« He anived Ihtn and not before." " I subiiiitted, for it was van lo resist ;" in this sen'enoe, for is a Conjunction, in the ik->;i, it jg a Proposition: " He >: on' cn.\tid for viclory only." In ihc fi.-^t ot ih<5 follow." ins stniencf'.s since is a Conjiinction ; in the second it jh a Prnpo3iuon ; and in the ihini an Adverb : " Since wo niii.it part let us do it peaceable ;" «' I have not Fcen him smce'that lime ;" " Our friendship commenced !.>nj since.'' But, though generally a Conjunct on, when it his (he sense oi o)ili/, .ippf.\rs to be an Advpih ■ a<, " Don.' ih'a 18 b'it our dMty," '« ,3 onh, on. duly." So.ne wr.te-s have thought t.'iat bu( 19 Hometunea a Prnp:,.,:;:on. as in li,;s ten- fence : «' All but lie, were there ;" a;,d that it haa ihc -en^e oi except. However, it seems to have the senta of crj/y mi such senieaces, raihei than except ; " Ail 071I1/ ho were there.' Either is a Conjunc ion when if ia coupled vvjiJi c' " Either you or 1 musi go ;" but ei'i.e. i.< a Dis-ribuiivc Pro' -.oun wliea one of I wo things are mentioned : as, '« Yon m-,r take either of these." '*- Both is a Conj-mctioii when fol'owcd by and as " H- aided hini both lor hi. and her sake." Both ia an Adjective t'ronoun, vvh-in it means two in number : as, " Both thesr men will be punished." ^01,1 uic^c „ r/'"' ■' ^Conjunction whon it follows though : as. no2:^h he slay me t^et will I love him ;" in the other ca^o. il seema to be an Adve.b, as in tliia sentence : •« I have re' to learn that science." '"^^o^c. Relative Pronouns, qs nvcII as Conjunctions, serve to connect sentences : as, " Blessed is the ETYMOLOGV T9 an, icho fcarcth the L in manamonts. ore], and keepcth his com- '> so , so. ! of /p™:ir»rrr;;'''„n— e»,.i.o force bo,h A C( and a Connective. « i nni..r,«« i!ch as 1 oncan(Ithcsnmc6-/n»st'of sentences mav incorporate into inu as nj'incti ; in the and not in tills osition: fellow- it ;rt a ce tiiat das the • h's 16 s iiave s ton- e j^ensp here, 'n C'' 111 C 1^10 u niav " Fir jectivu '■ tliesc : RS, ca-p3 ions, 5 the sccst a man and he a sentence : thus "Tl IS called Peter :" consisting of two distinct da I opulative and : but " Ih '.IStS, IS called Peter .' e man ivhom th lOU IS a sentence united hy the ou seest ^"==1 f anrln.Vin ' ' V ''"^^"^^ of only one c/a«.. In .h„ 'i ^"" "ot less comnrchensivn H.^m n.^ ../ ^'^"^^ cnsivo than the oth ers. onjiinctions often unite sent ppcar to unite only word enc stances gcnces J ity and s ; as '.'A the foil es, when they \\'^isdom or follv interest forhid owing in- vicious iiidul- licsc forms of c namely, " l)„ty {-.uhids xprcssion contains t governs us." Each of wo sentences est forbids vicio lis indub governs us. crns us : or Toll v , Though tije C connect sentences, yet ou iy connects wor " nad (-iuec: vicious indulgences : Inter cnces ;" " \\ igj om gov- onjuuction is commonly used to <-!.-, not sentences some occasions, jt nicre- m » are an amiable pair ; on cann )t reler to each ; it b as. 'J'he K lUir that the Kiai^ So in the inst tlie Q Kccn un v.r.ere the alhr- ing absurd to say, Tl hooli ances. !l is an amiable pair JC idth and si.\t i wo and two are 1 our V 11 volumes complete the set of :ie. : words, bi;. th lepositi.ms also as beloi which the cy do it to s e ob served, c connected words h new tiie relat on- ion. onjunctions when they unit ave to each othei signed to show t c words only, are dc united, have to oth 10 relation, winch those words er parts of thesenten so ce. oh Astl rases, appropriated'to tl er em lero are many Conjunctions and 'ences, tlict are nev or members cf a sentence 10 couiilin connoctinj ployed ; so th piing 01 entire sen in Joining the purls ere arc several Co n- 80 ETYMOI.OGV. junctions appropriated to the latter use, which arc never employed in the former ; and some that arc adapted to both these pur|)oses : as. ii;zain, further, besides, jstc. oflhetirst kind; lUun, lest, unless, i/uil, so that, &c. of the second ; and, but, and, for 'there- Jore, &.C. of the last. Relatives are not so needful in language as Conjunctions. ° Relatives comprehend the meaning ot a Pronoun and Conjunctions Copulative : Conjunctions while they couple sentences, may also express opposition inference, and many otner relations and depen- dences. 9 OF INTERJECTIONS. Interjections are words thrown in between the parts of a sentence, to express the passions or emo- tions ofthe speaker : as, '« Oh ! I have alienated my friend ;" " Alas ! I fear for life ;" " O virtue ' how amiable thou art !" Interjections are of different sorts accordinf^ to the different passions they serve to express. '^ Of Grief : as, Ah ! ! oh ! alas ' welladay ' heigh ho ! woes me ! Of Contempt or Aversion : as, Pish ! tush ' ich ! He ! sirrah ! pshaw ! fudge ! Of Calling: as, Hilloa ! soho ! ho .' hark ' hei ' I halt ! what ! ' I Uf requesting Silence : as, Hush ! hist ! whist ' 1 mum ! Of Salutation : as. Hail ! ail hail ! welcome ! Of Laughter : a^, Ha ] ha ! ha ! he ! Of ordering away : as, A vaunt ' bciione ' a- way ! ® 'hich arc that arc further, ess, that, or, therc- ETYMOLOOr. 81 uage as Pronoun ns while position, depen- cen the or emo lienated virtue ! ding tc laday ! tush ' ! hei ! whist I wclld^ne'^r °'' ^^J'^'^^'S •■ ««. Huzza ! hurra ! Of Doubt or Hesitation : as, Hem ? ha ' :3tra„^|',;e;^:i;;,^^'"^^orheighr hah hah f Of Farting: as, Adieu ! farewell ' Of Looking: as, Lo ! behold! sec! EXERCISES ON ADVEROS. POLVT OUT THE ADVERBS IV THP rnr , "lis IN THE FOLLoni.VO SENTENCES. Jl;ali now concl.ar ol .„d It*"' •''"'' ^''X. ' Ifc speaks v.rv- ,vc-l| Sl,„ /-^ ■"■"'""■'-'' °""- ;i-|.o ,a,,I< is al,o4V„ „. ^■° et?;r "^^ '"'"^• l'"l ■■••■ly horcalk.,- We oflcn , , " ^""' "<"' ;■'■■■'. "iii pes,,,/, suire"'^ ' rstr."^/ ,""'"'">"'" ll'iid, anil will soon arrivo ,„ i . '"*' ""vards How sweo,,,. .nd in' an l/"' |S- .-'^■l.v -cl.o.cd. •lay. It is al,ke to ,„o, whHher vo , . I'"" ""« "> h'>y. , Vou lean forward ooCil?^ T "' «" Idown ow. Formerly i" " ,.''->^> «"'' may lall lallerly l,e is d |T,";fl f "">■ "'^ "-'od, but fromr. \i' • come oltcner. how <*plrJ^rr. jc^nie. \\ e niuit all die sooner or later ^°" EXERCISES OX PREPOSITIONS. They travel throufrf, Fran^r> • i pf'-iJy. She i. Talkn from vi.f . '"''^''^ ^''^^'^'^^ -'^ n^ay arrive at eo n eZ l "\v '""'• r ^^^ ^"'*^ h'- wishe. and above ou7de^!:-"V'"""'^'^^ «s F.TYMOLOGV mnkc lor him, some nfj;ainsl him. I am ngaiii pluni c,ea. D.sappointment often follows presumption J disobedience to the nr.Io.-a r generally ends in di^^rfcc a c ' T"" '^"P^^'^'-^. • "»oracc and punishment ^^^^ Knowledge and good nature, make old age p,ea- nissimulationde^.rades every other qualification Iruiolonce undermines virtue. Discretion and prudence generally go together. EXERCISES, On .^liljectivcs, n-lth the 1 n-h to ur. Gentleness is productive of love and quiet Virtue is preferable to riches and knowledge I am much afraid of being betrayed. " It IS not po.ssib]e to be incessant in study. EXERCISES. I On^'ldjcctivefi rcscmblins; the Pail Prn-iunni . I '"«' ih.y are ~«uV,,,..J,„,,,2:;/;;'X':;,.r /^if ' He is a very learned man. Blessed is the man, who walketh not astray H.s principles are of the most exalted kind IfortuJe^'-' were quite disconcerted at this turn of He is a weak conceited mortal. IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) W // {/ :/. fA /^5 ^ ^ 1.0 .'f'B IM LI ;: la 111112.0 1.25 i 1.4 2.2 1.6 <^ ,% /i VI ^^ 'c^J / / ^ O^. • ■^y >^ Photographic Sciences Corporation #> -4^^ ^ V •1>^ Cv % '1> ^ \ \ \ 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY I4S80 (716) 872-4503 W 84 ETYMOLOGY. They may be mu ;i) ashamed of their bad con- duct. Infatuated and aupcrsticious, he became redicu- ]ously devout. His mind is pure and untainted by guilt. When the conduct is so well regulated, the mind is always sereae. He is a most disinterested noble person. He always maintains a dignified character. This is quits a controverted doctrine. He is a superannuated soldier. Let us avoid the detested sight of this person. Good men are called with propriety the chosen vessels of Deity, EXERCISES, On the Tnipcrf' -t Participle : Ist. used as a Verb ; 2nd. used as a Substantive ; 3rd. used as an Adjective 1st. He is now learning Grammar. We are now studying Virgil. While I am reading you should be writing. You ought not to be idling away your time, but minding to learn your lessons prooerly. While I am speaking you should be attending to whai 1 say. He was honest, and incapable of destroying or betraying his master. Be particular in correcting the error 2d. This is a fine piece of writing. Learning is better than riches. In the beginning God made the world, Jacob inherited the blessing. Understanding is the daughter of wisdom. ETYMOL0G7. o^ 8. J olnefltjof ""'"« "' "" P-''°- ^■-"W be our ing ifde. ™' '' " '*'"' "'"^'"S "'" »"'' •>" « flou- Ile h.8.often a cheering end pjea.ing addrc.. smolute°r'"« '""'' """ '"« ^">-°g flovvc. EXERCISES ON NEUTER VERBS. ^conomy and diligence are worthy of praise. Vu-tue IS beller til an riches. Vou travel fast deal." " '""" '^ "'" ■"" « '""• *«» ouUive a great Virfou, persons can only be real friends. Flee from vice a, from a serpent. madnl^s.'^'''"'' ''"•'"" ^"""^ "»"ble is worse ,l.a„ sh-ouIdac!?vVbeeX%"d.'''' "*""'' ""•""'"fbU We must not rely „„ p.on,;,^ ^,„^^^ ccing"" '"'P " « "»' ""ived, she was -ong i„ It thunders now, we will, hurry home, ^nendship cannot e«„, b„. ,h„, ^^^^^ No advantage arise, from being idle H 86 ETYMOLOGY. She smiles or laugha mildly, and dances grace - (u!i\ . Tlie man tlmt swells in prosperity, will shrink in adversity. EXERCISES ON THE PASSIVE VERB. \'irtue is accompanied with inward peace. iVIany are brought to ruin by extravagance. Greui difficullies may be overcome by diligence. V irtue is connected with honor and renown Eternal happiness, is surely reserved for tli^ virtuous. The greatest monuments of trts, are destroyed by time. Virtue and true Religion cannot be sepj^rated. All our conduct ought to be regulated by virtue. The Mind should be carefully purified frdm error. Virtuous courses should always be chosen iji preference to others. True happinesa is only to be found m the paths of virtue. EXERCISES ON VE'RBS IN THE IMPEP ATIVE MOOD. Abstain from the appearariceof evil. Remember your own errors, but forget those of others. Fear God. Honor the King. Dishonor not your profession of virtue Deal honestly with all m«n. Reject prido and practise humility. Cherish virtuous principles. Be steady in virtuous pursuits. Contemn praise or flaUery. 07 ETYMOLOGT. Allow no vicious induFgence. Roware of ill habits. Go leurn ofthoant to be industrioua. Despair not in adversity. Hear what I say. iMark wcJl my words. Do you now be wise. I3id him get his task better. Lot him read. Let me write. Let us go away. Let them pasa. EXERCISES ON BE, DO, 4c. hfnesA^u;d,avy Verbs, .st. AnxiUary Verbs w/un joined to another Verb. 2nd. Principal Verbs. paid for h." """ ^"'' ^""" ^"' ''''^' ^^ '^'oM be If he does not act wisely, he will suffer for it He who does not perform what he promises de serves punishment I'^nnscs. ue- Tiie Butler did not remember Joseph. Do you intend to walk or ride. We do not intend to go at all. I do Qgl believe you will act so badly. Did she tell you this .? she did say so indeed. Principal. bre.I''"'' '' "" ""'* "'"' <■-"■ "'■ '»" "e have .ho iltTZzX!''"' "''"'""'' "" '"'--^ - 2\i ETYMOLOGY. Did you do the work, you agreed to do. Vou havo not Prudence, or you would not do so. These Soldiers have neither arms nor ammu- nition. I see you arc one of those, who have no mW falsify an engagement. Be kind to those who are kind to you He wills it to ho so. H e sau I will be thou clean. !>■ We shall have enough. EXERCISES ON THE RELATIVE WHAT. JVhat generally means, that which, sometimes compi's- hends two jyominatives, txco Objectives, or an Objec- tive and jy^minative. It may often be considered as U7i J^djective, or Adjective Pronoun, and sometimes an Jldverb.* Remember what you are rather than what you may be. Do not put off to another day, what may be done now. Consider what you have gained, and not what you have Idet. What cannot be cured should be patiently en- dured. I wish to know what be means, rather than what he pretends. By what means shall a young mao purify his Avry. What dignity in her port, what grace in her ait! In missing this dangerous station, I may say, by what 1 lost, 1 have in reality gained. * What, is an Adverb in •« What with policy, what hj force," being the same aa '• Partly witU policy, parlJy by ,^^ »• ETYMOLOCr. In what way he will act I know not. What with policy and whal by Jorce he plishcd his desi^jn. 89 accoin- EXEUCISES, On the words compounded wilk who and Mha( - 1st. Uhosn, whoever, whoocver, have the same v^eauu,^, arul mean he w-ho. 2nd. IVhalcver and wUahoever have the same meaning as that which and hke what includes two cases, and may /.. Jtcn considered as Jidjecliccs. Whoever wishes to do weJJ, should live weil Whosoever is disinterested in one station is generally so m another. ' ^ Whatever is worth doing at all, is worth doin^ Whatever be the affront you receive, it is always best not to i-evenge it in any case whatever. ^ Learn wisdom by whatever arts you hone.tJy EXERCISES ON THE NOMINATIVE, S.c: Th, jyominaiive though generally placrl bejorr tiic ^erb, yet is sometimes placed ajter U. mun m ddverb as here, there, S,^c. and a Co.j:oiclwn i if it'st, dfc.) IS understood or expressed. In the number of blessings bestowed on mortals may be classed, patience and persever.<,ce Among all the evils that humble man, mny be reckoned, despair and disobedience as th -u^.^ Here was the clangor of arms, here we-c the groans ol the dying. '^»<^.\cwinc Eutydu?.^.^*""'' ^""^ '" ^^'"^ '^'''^'''^ ^ ^'^""S "i^ia uamQc'. H2 90 EXyMOLOOY. Thus shall the coming of the son of man be. Then shall be remembered thy great fault. There were at this time hero, many Jews. Then shall break forth thy light as the morning. Are not industry and virtue the keys of wealth and happiness. TIlc Nonwiative is sometimes af a considerable distance from the Verb. The person who is neither elated by prosperity, nor dejected by adversity, who will not deviate from the paths of truth and honesty, by any ten)ptation, however fascinntihg in appearance, possesses a truly excellent energy of soul. The man whose constant employment like tha* of the great Howard, is to alleviate the sufitiings of those around him, rectify their mistakes, and lead them into the paths of prosperity, virtue and happi- ness, should be loved, admired and praised by alJ who know him. He who thro' vast immensity can pierce, See worlds on worlds compose one universs ; Observe how system into system runs, What other planets circle other suns ; What varied Being, peoples every star, May tell why Heaven, has made us as we are Pofe. The Relative is often the JS'ominatice to a Verb ; when not close to it, it is either the Objective or Possessive. Who that has virtue would sell it for money. True Charity is not a meteor which occasionalij gleams, but a luminary which is orderly and reg^ilar There are many men who cannot read, and yet have considerable knowledge of the world. Euciio loves Clarissa, whom Clarissa also loves, ETTMOLOOt 91 but whose father hates, and who therefore will not allow hiin to marry her. The best flavored fruit we commonly find that >vhicij the birds have picked. ' JJIessod is the man who acts uprightly, he shall flourish like a tree, which is planted by y river, and whose leaves are always green. Thcjnfinitivc Mood or part nj a sentence, is njten tht .^'oininatici: to a Verb, as being equivalent lo a jW'un- To see the sun is pleasant. To live virtuously is honorable. To prevent disease is often easier than to cure it. To be ashamed of the practice of religious duty speaks a (eeblo mind. 1 St. The Objective ts often placed before ihc Verb as iCellasnfUrit ; and if a RilUive gcnernllij precedes if. 2rul. If a Verb has txoo Objectives after it, one a person and the other a thing, a Preposition gov- erns the person, and the Verb the thing. 3rd. The Infinitive Mood or part of a sentence is often the Objective to a Verb. Mim you have delivered to be crucified. Them that honoi mc, I will honour. Mo ye have put in prison unjustly. Him whom ye ignorontly worship, I declare unto you. Those whom I hate, I will punish. Me he restored 10 my office, but him he hanged. 2nd. I gave uim a gold watch in a present. Bring me that Book I will sell thee my swoid. Send him for mv desk. 'J2 ETVMUI.OGT. Write him on tins subject. Tt:II inc all the (rulii. Fetch us a linrlit. O Charles lend ine this money. 3rd. To have conquered himself, he esteemed the highest plcasnrc. To be disapjiointcd so tnucli all at once, is the greatest of mislurtuiies. 'Vim lulls oi'Famo I will not now explore. EXERCISES IN SUPPLYING WORDS. A .Yjun is often understood and not expressed afUr . id- jectics and Aajcciict Pronouns, as all, many, jciv, lluse, tliost, «.Vc. It behovcj all to be virtuous. Judge not the many by the in.scal tew. IMany walk in tlie broad way of sin, but iew in tlie narrow palh of virtue. Thoae wUv a.c truly groat, should also be truly good. Each should mind tlio alTairs of his own office. Such aj arc had shall be punished. Such as those arc not irood. Some are good, some arc bad. I have seen several but none that pleases me. If you had a million, they would nut do, Tho ridi, the :ioor, the base, llie brave, aie alike laid in the crave. fhe Verbs to be, an:' to have, arc often understood nufh a Relative, or Personal Pronoun or .Adverb * Embrace the Doctrines that arc contained in the Scriptures, as the real truths of the Deiiy. * n is BompnmeR <]ifTic;.!f to supply the proper part of (he verb U- b^. A Personal rronoun, Kelaiive or Adveib, is of- ettmoloct; 93 Tlio Precepts taught by Religion should be par- . Tiio !,nno!its conferred on us by Providence re- quire our -latitude. ^ utuct,rc ...n.^T'7®'^ ?** "" succour, if was nowonder he succumbed under such pressure. Knowledge when associated with prudence and rna.iners reHned, will ahvays be esteemed and ad- I perceive him now much affected with the dis- ease. lent fir^nT^ '''*'" '"'"'^ conducted is an excel- Wo see mankind placed on the stage of t>ie uni- r^artlrr '"^ '^^° "^^ '''^ '--^^ ^^-'-^'"S I think him leader of a faction. We thought them the authors of this mischief. Wo find tnan hero in a stato of mi8«ry and sin. They lost their parents when only a year old. Do not allow dissimulation a place in your heart. Tiu .Auxiliaries, may, tnight, ,ould, would, and should, are supplied. Now Uve and be happy. Let us entreat the King that he spare our lives So stnct were they, he might not laugh nor sing. ^'^""S' ^ ^^ «■»»» ever so fast, I wiH overtake him. «uppne. before con.ained. ^ rJalwet'; neT.Mv'":::,, ! tood be ore the Perfect P.rt cipfe : in the pa.«.ge - K^L i J!A?f!"'''- . I" 'he sentence... •• Do not .How d.asimnlation i;iUf iicar; j'= fy /,apg j, underjiood btfocz ace. '* ETYMOLOGY. Supply loordt offer than, as, and but. la he not younger than I am. I am not so fair as hhe. Thou art not a bctior man than he. He reads as w«.'ll as I. We came homo sooner than they. I admire you as much as her. There was no person there but she. I couid get it frooi uo person but her. Tfu O'jjcdive ajtcr a Preposition in often nndeyslool when a Relative. The more riches some men have, the more they desiro. It is ditficult to love those we cannot reverence Men are sometimes ruined by the very means they strove to avoid such ruin. It is impossible to esteem thos€ we hate The more virtu* a man has, the more he values it 111 othcr«. Our good Fortune, sometimes depends on the choice we make of our company. The Antecedent is often improperly omitted and must H be supplied. Who steals my purse steals trash. Who robs rae of ^Jy honest name, makes me poor indeed. All interested now receive notice. There have been, who have freed their country from Tyrants, purely from love of it. For if there be first a willing mind, it is accept- ed according to that a mau hath ; and not accordine to that he hath not. ETTMOLOGT. EXEJRciSEs IN Calm and peaceful wns tk the sky. ^ '"''' ^'^^y are yet young and We mp.y cxncrt n . I r^!!^* suspend then- aAer^a storm "^"^ ,,J"^f '"^"^ y^^ awhile. '^ —as.er to prevent tv^th^ .^el""^ Pass.on than to calm ,t. sione. P'^^P'>«»e8- A little is better with con- Few dnvo L^.";!.' A^.^:".^ «-«^ amp air is unwhole- ' some. •lers, but ho has not more knowledge. The more we are blessed the more grateful we should be. The desire ofgetting more IS rarely satisfied. r, M /i — --.vij, auusned. ovorour mirth. Soft bodies damp the sound more than hard ones. [Though she is rich and fair, yet she is not amiable. [Many men, many minds. b-t inferior judgment She is his inferior in sense but his equal in pru- dence. Make a like space be- tween the lines. Behave yourselves like 9B ETYAIOLOGY. Every thing loveg its like We are too apt to like as caprice dictates. To his wisc'om, we owe our privilege. They Btrive to learn. He goes to and fro. He served them with his utmost ability. When we do our utmost, Ao more is required. I will submit, for submis" sion brings peace. It is for our health to be temperate. ! for better times. 1 have a rejjard for him. Both of them deserve praise. He is esteemed both on his account, and on that of his parents. Since 1 must go, let me go. He has not been liero since yesterday. It is long since this ha}!- pencd. He stood beiore the win- dow. Before the world was he existed. Either-of the two will do. Either James or John will go. Neither of these will do Neither Tom nor Mary shall have it The years that are fled were hnnnv nnf>«i That is not the one. I want. 11 -i said that he was un- happy. Grant me this one favour. The King did favoui him with a grant of land. Save him quickly from drowning. They were all there save she. He went to Court on pur- pose to court the favour of the great. Great damage was done by the siorm. He wa.s .11 a passion and did stjrm because they did damage his gopds. He is a grave serious man. Death and tlir grave aro never satisiied. Let us not disturb his soft repose. You mny repose on that bed. Judge not too rashly. Tlie Judge charged the Jury. He came back here. A rod for ihe fool's back. Thy w.ll bo done. I will be thou clean. I will not do it. He had no lack of any thing ; he did not lack money ; for the Nabob gave him a lack of ru- ETYMOLOGY. ne. I IS un- ivour. I him nd. from n save n pur- avour done n and ! they ;oc)ds. rioua e aio his 1 that i the ' back. OF DERIVATION. 97 any lack abob f ru- (hods bv wh'iph' T P?P^' ^° ^-^P>^'" the ne- mous by which one word ,s derived from another. way.l^;L'' "' *^'"''' ^^°™ ^°^ «"°t^«r in various ^substantives are derived from Verbs. ^^^ Adjectives are derived from Substantives and Substantives are derived from Adjectives Substantives are derivea from Substanlivs Adverbs are derived from Adjectives «.or ,■■ from " ,. survi:;.'' .'rvivo? J^'kl "" s'.«p.^rs'>e'eVrw^, n-o '^r ' ^^ -^^^ act, to act ; &c. ' "®' *<* ''«le ; .ives7::5^"it':siv:rfrf^''i^^^^^^^^^^^^^ X^ctx:::.fiv;rrr:./:„ir f ^^^ verb " forward," '" to forw r^ •'. f "''"""'^ ^^^ are formed by UngtheningThe vowel or soZ"" ''.'^ =ndd-:r:&:\:;'4>:^^^^^^^^^^^ "^isaer-'-^.ltt'.!'':fLvE--'"rof^-' / 53 'ZTYMOLOOY. A.j|cctivc9 aro derived from Substantives in the following manner : Adjectives dcnotin.; plenty, are derived from Substantives by adding y : as Vrom " Health healthy ; wealth, wealthy "might, migh* ty, Stc. Adjectives denoting the matter out of which any thing IS made, aro derived from Substantives by ad- din- en : as from " oak, oaken ; ^vood, wooden wool, woolen," &.c. Adjectives denoting abundance, arc dcrivci' irom Substnntives by adding ful : as from " Joy joyful ; sin, binfui ; fruit, fruitful," S^c. Adjectives denoting plenty, but with some kind of (liiiunution, are derived fron'< Substantives by ad- ding some • as from " Light, lightsome ; trouble troublesome ; toil, toilsome," Sic. Adjectives denoting want, are derived from Substantives by ad ling less : as from " Worth worthless ; care, careless ; joy, joyless," &c. Adjectives denoting likeness, aro derived from Substantives by adding /^ : as from " Man, manly, earth, earthly'; court, courtly," c^c. Some Adjectives are derived from other Adjec* tives or from Substantives, by adding ish to them, which termination when added to Adjectives imports diminution, or lessening the quality : as, " white, whitish," i. e. somewhat white ; when added to Substantives, it signifies similitude or tendency to character : as, "child, childish ; thief, thievish." ATany Adjectives are derived from Substantives by adding the terminations abhor ible, ic, al, ate, ous, or : as, " Answer, answerable ; poet, poetic; pastor, pastoral ; fortune, fortunate ; vigor, vigor- ous/angle, angular." These Adjectives denote qualities participating of the Substantives they are derived from. ETY3I0L0GV I /I Some Adject 99 "g the tei '■ves arc derived from Verh "iiiiationt; abl. c or tV;/, I i s by «?/i* or (71/ : f'. voiidible; Some Subsfantiveq -.r« ^^.' i /< '7. adding the .orrnl:i on^ ,tri^,f "? ^^J^^i^^^. ^/*V^ rU, ard, and //, or t as Lm /« ^ ^'- 'y' ^''''^ ness J free, freedom • nu^. n T' ''''"^' ^^ite- bi-nverv ; drunk, drunkard', r* ''^'^^^^ip ; brave. licighi:" ^'""'tard ; warm, warmth ; high. Many Substantives are der.'vn^ r «;anta-es, by addin<. the t^rmin r T '''''^'- ^"l^- l-"nv.ck ; bishop, bi.h'opi:"!' ^ "^^^'^'P ' '^aUifT. s;c, mus.cian ; favor, favorite • IT' ^r"''y ' '^"- d-pot.,sm; quiet, quietude bUruoT."' i'^"'^'"'' 'cc, ic.clc J note, notice.'' ^"'*'^"P^> ^^ani^ruptcy; Some Substantives ti-o j • 1 <. adding the terminu ion 7onT"^ ^'''' ^^''^'' ''7 possesion ; distract, dis riltinn ' ^° P"^«^««. al ; use, usage ; e„eal J ' '''"'''^^' ''''"'^'" anon . .°..„', ^"g'^ge. engagement ; insure insurance ; excej, exceTjenPp".^"°-^'"*^"^ ' '"^"^e, actor ; serve. se'rvUud T'r'efolT' 'T' ' "^^' ^"'' failure." ' reioim, eformation ; Substantives ending in /..«,; ^, 1 , as signify character o? nL fnf ^'^''' ^''^ «"ch naanhood, knighthood, falhood^' '"' " ^''^'''''^ Sub;^tantive9 whirh o«j • ^»abit: as, '« Slavery ^ooWv '" 'J ''^"'^>^ «^^''^" ^'r •^''*'°'«'^^' prudery, bribery, "ice ^substantives endino- in »/■;./. •; note, dominion, iuiisd cL , ' '■'''^'' ^'"'^ ^^''"> dc- " -tJaili.vick bishonrn. I ,°'' condition : ^s fi,..., .^,: \ ' "^'shoprick, kingdom, dnts^^ vij;, >' iitiUiii, etc. "" "'' \wn C, 100 ETYMOLOGT. Substantives which end in ian, er or ist, are those tliat sigiiify profession : as, '• Pliysician, mu- sician, magician, joiner, artist," &.c. Those that end in mcnt and ai»-e, come gcnftral- ly from the French, aud co4nmonly signify the act or habit : as, " CounuaaUtttent, oachauttneut, usage, uxnpirag^e.'* Substantives ending in ard, denote character •r habit : as, " Drunk, drunkard ; dote, dotard." Substantives ending in ship, are those that sig" nify office, employment, state, or condition : a8> i "Lordship, stewardship, partnership," &.c. Substantives ending in ion, ance, ihj, al, ism, are generally those ot' abstract quality : as, " de- traction, reputation, perseverance, identity, renew- al, deism." &c. Some Substantives have the form of Diminutives, but these are not many. They are formed by adding the terminations, kin, ling, ock, c/ : as " Lamb, lambkin ; goose, {];osling ; duck, duckling ; hill, hillock ; cock, cockerel." Adverbs of quality, are derived from Adjectives by adding ly or changing le into hj ; and denote the •ame quality as the Adjectives from which they are derived : as from " base," comes *' basely ;" from ,*' slow, slowly ; able, ably." It will be observed from many of the above ex- amples, that sevetal Substantives may be consider- ed as derived from other Substantives, or from Ad- jfdctivea, or Verbs, by adding the same termination: as, " favorite," which may be re|garded as deriv«d either from the Noun " favor," or Verb, "to favor.' It will alao be observed, that the same tcrnwna- tiona may be added to Nouns, Adjectives or Verbs: VorS •« ^n Cr, jj \A\rtm^\^gt tt f"^ 4*V, ar© If I * i ETYMOLOOr. 101 yet no. alter the aense ,!,„.?„ ^r*"* "<'"'• «»<« >'«», hood, or ,V„ and ih. .^ '" " ""V ''« JO'ned -, •' fal.;„e<„/fi.r;etoo.rSr!?="- '"= -".e: '■'"-^-"'™'= retail- i-fz\r tsm, " de- I2 102 SYWVAX Th» Third Part of Grammar is Syntax, which treats of the agreement and construction of words in a sentence. A sentence *s an assemblage of words forming a complete sense. Sentences are of two kinds, Simple and Com- pouNn. A Simple Sentence has in it but one subject, and one finite Verb : * as, " Life is short." A Compound Sentence consists of two or more simple sentences connected together ; as, " Life is short, and art is long ;" " Idleness produces want, vice and misery." A Phrase is two or nore words rightly put to- gether, making sometimes part of a sentence, and sometimes a whole sentence. The principle part of a simple sentence are, the Subject, the Attribute, and the Object. The Subject, is the thing chiefly spoken of ; the Attribute, is the thing or action affirmed, or de- nied of it ; and the Object, is the thing affectei by such action. The Nominative denotes the subject, and usually goes before the Verb or Attribute ; and the word or phrase, denoting the object, follows the Verb : as • Finite Verba are those to which Number and Perton appertain. Verbs in the Infiiiitive Mgod, have 00 leipect to NuDiber aad Person. (r STIfTAX. -^^ «^-ed ; andk^i;,:;;,'/.,^';;];;;;;bute, or thing .^ JatroH^^^^^^^^^ -teoces : tU the mperaliv, or commanding! ''^"'*''* ^' ««^; to be^o^ n7ll^t:%;^tr i7^? ^ ^^'"^ i« -d fot to suffer, i„ ^ direct man 1^ '^''' to suff.r or »hou wrotest ; thou aTjover' jr^K^''' " ^ ^ i negative, the Adverb not i« ,?i' i r^® sentence b» Auxiliary : as - I to 1 7^''^'^ "^^^'" ^he Verb op «ot touch hi.n - '"""^^'^ ^"™ ««t -^ or - i dkl In an InterroTativft «««♦« on is a,ked. .he r?:!;^:, ««„"^7j «' "h." a questi. pal Verb, orlhe an^iliarv • „? f. °"' "" Pf'noi- Alexander conquer lhe7crsia„'s ?'"'"" ^^- " '« »r tnc. jrson lal. n. founj eith< wise men." ' '"^ guiuen j the an .b,',:."":!! "r r ".".' tfrr ^'"""' '"- ■• •• Nothing ia ™orec.„.i; ..,a^';JeI..r"'P'i»« ! 1 he articles are not nnt ha( orpl.cc, in ,he sing"!" „. '"'. 7r*""CP*'«" but in the plural llu % put bdoVc M '■ '"""• :" ofnver,. raountai,,,, »„j 3,,/ "^r" The 1^"°""' the Juno ; the Alps." -^he Ihamos; and A^^iuvt' C '.!^^;f/,^-^b« - well as Nouna er you'll gelthere " '""''^"" ^"°' ^^^ ^oon- we .hall .heretorec-nV/o7,obemoln '';^"'°"' "-"« J ing their .pplic.tioo. "*"* parl,.ular m ejtpj.in; ji S"b.t?„:ivir'^„'nr;oSn;"ej i^-^ '*«^-« "'^ ^'^jec-.e or '■ bofore the Adj.cl.ve : a/ 'Kioiwr ""'"'"'" "' ""o-Jf^ «« !>« 'jHe«l in ihe same erae*. By ilic for.nfr I rHtJiPr j'r4i»e a pei»on ; by 'he laiior I di'pnii'c hm. Fur th.- sik« ol ihij ,iiht dc ion, uh cli is a vory Utehil one. w- m^iv belter bear bn co.Miiin- impioprieiy of ibo •riicle a betoro Nouns of nunibor ; wben I say, • Thore weie few men wjtli bill),' I ^peuk (liininiiivfly an J mean to it.(>fes»»iu tbem as inci»n-i(lprHb e : wbi.e;*^, v.lvn { Aav, ' tl.ere ucio a ' few menwiihbim,' I evidcn:)) iiienj to make the must of ( ihem. ' It 19 of tbf mtiire of hoth atficlci^ to rletermitie, or limit, to ihings spoken of. j? (k-iprmii'-'s it -o I • unn >tm.rlo ibm;! of } lh« kind, feavino it ptiil m.rftiain which ; the (ieieiminoa v^lucli it is, or of many which they aru. The followjiifr paosnge \.i\\ i^erve a* nn example of tlic thf- fereni iisea of a anJ t/ie, and of the fon.e ot liie Subsiai.'ivo without any arti-le : « Mnn was msdo for sori-tv, and ou-ht to extend his ;^ood tvill to all men : bit a min will naiiiraMy entertain a more ^artictilp.r kindness for the men with whoin ho has llie most iiequcnt inlerrouiso ; and eii'er mio a sti'l closer union with ihe man whose leuipe. aiid di^posilion buii beat vvitik bi^ own.' In genoral it may bo sufficient to prefix the article to the former of two aord^ in the same construction ; (though Iho French never fail to repeat it in this cajie.) ' There were many hour.-), ooth of the night and diy, which he could spend in eolitiry thought.' It might have been « of .r.icle..heulcl not be „„d before 107 fe ..^.-. seme. The»«5 Vn'i.nl'' '*^^°""* *'''•"'» •" f'i"- sentence i» U.erefce ir. ,' '', "1 ''''T'' '""'"•' *'■ crc.y unto the detih.' The ..n.ii ^ ' Per^ecufo.] thit icular lort of deall., but .iealh V f" "**' ""«" <"iy P«r- c>. therefore i. .mprope, ' ua' • " f "!"' ' ""' ^"^^«""« • i- -"■.out any article. ^l.ZfoiZZlV''' '""'^ ^-••^' T.icle :, improperly omi,i.d, ' Wh, n'^*" ,'"? 'heUrfinite -; come, he w.ll guiJe you i„,o all , u,l, ' ',' f ^*"' "^ T^"'"' J. s tronilaiion, • ,nto all trull, J . ' *''^' " ■•'ccordmg to -.1 frotn ,ho'or.«,r,a,. .To Hi ;::Z^ f ;!'« Ev^nsoli.'" Ky,n|el,e.| truth.' all truth neco5 a J f;r """'"' i"'^ »'• religoua sense. 'occssaiy for you to know m t from the above it mav K- «., i <>-> ,0 Know whether an Iif,;,:'vo?''" ."'''' '' '""''♦ "'-'^r -'■e Article. For tl,ou.,h .1 oy rl- ;1"V'''''''^ ^"^« ^' -«"' Hic, sentences a« the follo»vin J ,h. a/; T^' '''^""' "'^'"^ /" ^od hMbani), a good father, or a benificent neijfhbour.' This indeed i» good lama language, and might be uaeJ in femiliar converaation ; but ocriainlj wanta the empbaaia, which it would have bj uamf th» in place of a, and which a proper orator would certainly do, ifiipeaking warmly on the auhject. The emphatic uee of tb« definite article the, though overlooked bj Murray, eeemi to 'lave been well kuown to our beat vrrilere, aa in that paaaace of Shakeapeara : «• The cloud cap'd towere, the gorgeoua Palacea ; The aolemn Templea. Yea the gieat globe itaelf ; All ahali diasolve.*' Or that in Golditmith : " The sceptred King, the burthen'd slare. The humble and the haughty die ; The rich, the poor, the base, the brave. In duet without diatinciien lie." It ia (be emphatic uee of (he article the that makea it have » food eflfect in distinguitihing a peraoo by an epithet : aa, • In the hiPtory of Henry the Fouith, by Father Daniel, we are aurprised at not finding him the great man ;* « I own I am often surprised he should have treated so coldly a man so much the gentleman.' If we used a in place of the in the above aentencea, and eaid, « a great man,* and * a gentleman ;• the laaguagfe would be tame and flar. Though the article a is not commonly prefixed to names of persons or places, yet in some mstance? it is ; ae, * He is a Howard of the Howard family ;♦ « every man is not a Now. ton ;' < we live in an Egypt of plenty.' The definite article the =9 frequently applied to Adverbs, m the comparative and superlative degree : and its effect ia to mark the degee the more stiongly, and to define it the more precisely : as, • The mor« I examine it, the better I like it' Tbie article is often elefanily put (after the manner of the French,) for the Pronoun Possessive : as. ' He looks faim full in the face ;' that is, ' in hit face.' • In hie presence they were to strike the forehead on (he ground ;' that is, * their I forehead*.' It is not always easy to determine, whether hoth the artl- clee should be used or both suppreesed ; ae in this sentence : * M ptlrity cf the mind, has such an infliiAno« nvM. *t.M .^..inMi 8T.VTA.T. but •• «o form the matflrial p,r. of lOD -nu ha. .uch ;nHu:n;7'ov'c7'co'nd." . '"'Tl'S ' ''""*' '^ «he most eleganf. fcnucra t|,o compoimon Thoogh the drfinito articia i« ii.« i k-<- • "'oun,.in,. ye. .t .. .olden, p ' ^ro.e ^ "? 'V """"^ ''^ •■• Mouni Sinai.' In .he xil!V "'« «f 'd, ^ moun.,' -;c,a .. ..„p,,p,Hy :,Xu:^ ^'r::, ^' ^.vr'^j-;' "•• lo 'a l.mb a.ood on the Mount S on • VV. '"''"''• •"** «"«'! the article i. put however h> '" "P'"'*=^ '• Wl on TjdcT ,,re ,^P ,1 J «!.o.ri,i not be u.r.I : « The Km. J! , *'"'■"• ">* """cle- -'P.oper. ^he article a'^ould bo s "1 Jd l1'*'''p"T "' V iscounr. ' pressed before Kail auj EXERCISE'S ON RULE IF. t-ove of the money is the root of many evils. Hope is an anchor of the soul. Virtues of the good, and vicc-j of the bad, form great contrast. /lo had consolations of religion to support him, in his troubles. The miracles, nature and fate, are under Deity. Astrology, or influence of stars, is obsolete science. Under appearance of be- nevolence, they were covetous. Juoo and Minerva have failed for InHi« Loss of his beloved friend, or disappointments he met with, occasioned total derangement of mind. London has a Thames, and Paris a Seine, both fine Rivers. Italy and Sicilies are sub- ject to the earthquake The King conferred on hi'n a title of a Duke, The highest title in this place, was that of tho tjrovernor. Cromwell's title was that 01 a Lord Protector. The f5re, the wafer, the air, and the earth, are t^ur elements of the i iiiiosophers. no SYi^TAX. He wished to do some- thing, though he knew not yet either end or means. I would rather have an orange than apple. There is a species of an animal called unicorn. We must act our part with a constancy though re- M'ard be distant. The virtues like his, arc not easily acquired. So bold a breach of order, called for little severity of punishment. As his misfortunes were the fruits of his own obstinacy, a few per- sons pitied him. A mnn is the noblest work of the creation. Heathens have placed us again in this prit;oa, under the trial of our virtue. This complicated affair would require <\ more than an ordinary dis- cernment to unriddle it. True charity is not the meteor that occasional- ly glares ; but the lu- minary which regularly dispenses benign influ- ence. Carriages formerly used were clumsy. His offering was but poor at best. All will receive their doom at day ot Judg- ment. JRULE HI. A Verb must agree with its Nominative case, imber and oerson : «« " T !««..« . ^i . • ' as, "I learn ; thou art im- m number and person . , proved ; the birds sing." bad ^' 'wh«tLvf"; '' Fr^u 7*"'°"^ ^'«'" our practice .. fl-r.w.s «ore in,po«,ora .haTon:"". MhTeT/e^r' I «ave consKlered what have been «id on boh sd« • ^o^e" MhoJ^e."''-' '^^^^ -• *>- '"^'« ^-^-a P«, ougnt 10 iiare a Nominatire case either expreswd or un- derstood ri«t) ye.' ST.VTAX. ••• • Awake ; arise :' Ul that iS Awnk e y« A Nominative i. called the subject of the verb. r un> We shall here adil some ov^r,,.,! r ofthe Verb wk..ou. a^ Non^a^ '': ! '"^";"'^V" ''^^ - P-e^rved.' ha. „o Nmninat.ve^a'e' itr'i* '"' \"''' ' ^'"* y snpphcd by the preceding N,.u„ aL ' ,*'r"°' ''t P^"'^*"- t've c:,.o. It o„«iu ,0 be ' ami .« / ', ^"^'^ " '" «^«Ol.j«e. orM.he., •«^d?«,..,x;;:/^^-^^-;^^^^^^^^ ;. rroma his(o-i,n oi -uido.-ed credit .ni a m "''^ ^traced prac.iscJ ;' • t,,y „,, t,,,;;""'/' ""'^ «^« '^^e «ame thai we,, -he,^?^^^n^';:":^-«;^ "'^^P' '''^ -•« «»>-'"'«. and Ve,b. e.her cxAe^ed; WpMc^d'^r"; w'T'" '^^'""^ ^« -"« J'^'e^^ ;• Ilia, ,.s « Juuiei wio^e i. -I T u '"''"'^ "'" ^"^k ^ tJiat ,. . .poke.' ^^ "• ^^ «^0"i thus Adam ;' When llio JVominaiive case ha. «« >^erb b:ui8 put before a Partcine "IP^"""'*! '^n^O of a 'o^^g ago. there ia no oc^aa'o'a to rllaL^T'"' '"" '"''^'^'^ • « 'lomon n.ad« as wi/c and t^^^ 1 V"^ " '^' O'^^'^'ive : 'Jone since ; /a„. o„l, e.cep '?/'''' '^^ V' ^"'^^ »"^'' w.cr .!.„ ..io..„.. i.s;;d' b:;;: o;:r; e^eti'^"" -'» ; Me^^;:;^y-?:j;;::;:;pf-^'.^no^o..^ .. ,,,,, ^^^, ^^ b^^'ng .mr>ersoual vcrbs^ .i/ould Le cm "n;,! \ ?'''^'""-' ^heae 113 SYNTAX. •ntl between the Auxiliary and (he Veib or Parliclple. if . compouiiil (enne. l»l. When a question is n^Ued, a command given, or a wi.b oxpress^-d : o% • Co..fiil>.«t rhou in ,„e ?• "rwd thou •* mayst thou be hnppy ;' • long live ihc Kin-.* ' 2nd. When a •.ipi)o.si:ion is m ulo wiiliout the Conjunc- tion 1/ ; aa, • Were it not lor thii ;* • had I been there.' 3rd When a Verb Neuler i. used : a;., ' 0„ a audJea appeared the King.' -uuurB 4th When the Verb i3 preceded by the .\dverbi. /,fr- there, then, thence, hence, thn^, Lc. : as, • Here am I •• •there was he blam ;' • then co.neih ilw tnJ ;' • thence ar.set'h Uia grief ; • hence piocoeds hia uu^ti ;' • thus waa the affair ■ettlcu. 5th. When a sentence depends on neither or nor, so aa 10 be supplied uiih anoilier scnteme : as, • Ye thill not tat of i(, neither shall )o toucli ii, le^i ju die.' 6!h. For (he sake o( cmpha^!ii;, erpcrially in Poetry, ■ome vvcfi's ate placv^d before il.c Vah, wliicli ought to coma after ii, it ihey were arraii::ed in a nauiral order : ««, • Silver and polJ have / none ;' • Narrow is the tvau of Jifc ' • Echo Ibe tnountains all arouud. ' EXERCISES ON RULE HI. I Icves science and learn- ing. You are ignorant and knowest notliiiin. Thou does nhvaj s some- thing wrong. Fifty pounds of wheat contains forty pounds ol flour. Great pains has been taken to reconcile pur- ties. Thou should love thy nt'ighhour as thyself. The number of Inhabi- tants in Great Britain exceed sixteen mil- lions. A mixture of wisdom and folly were in his con- duct. Has the goods been sold to the best advantage? T^lot one of ihose whom thou sees clothed iu put pie are happy. I am sorry to tell it, but there was more equivo* cators than one. SYNTAX. if ■ audJeo The nioclianism ofclocks Th( a.id wah:h( s were un- litiona a few centuries i ago. I A variety of pleasing ob- jects charm the -vc. ^'iio renewal of hop give consolation. lio need not proceed in such huhto. In vain our Hocks and lieldsiiicr'.'ascs our stoic ^^lvnl an abundance make us wish lor more. So much both of ability and merit is seldom found united. The sincere is always es- teemed. None but the bravo de- serves the fair. 119 generous never re- counts minutely ihe actions they have done. The support of so many of bif) relations were a bcavy tax upon his ia- dustry. IVothin, :r,i'^' ^-^^ cause of. L lo.v ute; i'h.l'"''' ''■°"^^""« »". ' A preat it ;' wo.,d be a. ^::t ^l;: e^::.;^: r.^i;r'" p ^"^ ^^^^ «tncd3 such as « The wa^es C nln il^ 1' . ^"'^ '" '' "" d.ath.« wouk' be ir^Mv^'for! '' "'''^ ' '** '^'^'^ " * «■'« V.nfrir:^.TJV''''-'^' ^^at U ,« only before a„J .fur „, . .,,. ,^-, „ ^5,y ^^^ j^^ enuftuu as iii the ubuvcruie"' Ja ' 114 SYMAX. bat it appears not to be correct, aa in this sentence . • In uni- ty Con$tsf3 the welfare and pt-ace of society :' ihourrh i. is .« •iiu.itc'd, (ho With to he is mt '■■, ;i i ■. • i '' . «,«ii . -iM y 'y oe 1:1 i.ot „, n, a.i.l It mi-lit stand a« well, llie wellare and peace of eocieiy comial in unity.' EXERCISES ON RULE IV. The wages of Jolm arc one guinea. Hia Pavilion was dark waters and thick clouds. The crown of virtue arc peace and honor. Controversy wore liis chief enjoyment and oc- cupation. In love and fidelity cen- ter the happiness of a married life. The whole sum were seventy-five pounds. The principal and interest was not one pound. In tmity contiists the wel- fare and peace of soci- ety. Constantinople was the point in wiiich was con^ centratcd fiie learn- ing and science of the world. RULE V. the bo The Infinite Mood or part of a sentence may be ^Nominative to a Verb : as, - To be good is to happy ; "A desire to excel others in learning or virtue ts commendable." ^ The Infiiii.ive Mood has much of the nature of a Siibstan- .veetpr.s«mg,heaot,oni,.filf. wh.ch the verb ..gnitie.. a. the Paniop e ha. .,,e naf.re ot an A.tjoctive. Thus the Infi- to hVv'hl '"h" "k' S'^^'-^n.ive in being the Nominative ill?, ^ «n he above ex:n>plc3; .nd n eomeiin.ed a!.o doe r.enffK.e oJ a S.I.tanhvo in the Objec'ivo case: J, Children Jove in p[.-,y,' ,s ,he .nmo as • Children love play ■• and ,n .i,e (o„ .^-n,^ ...ntence -ho Infi„rive r.l^o does the oil ce of an Ooj.c u-e : « For to will ,. present with me, but to per^ form l(./.t uh;ch i. good I li.Ki not.' i 'Wi^cJ rest J/'f-^^uil"" ^^""^ i^l'oniotirnes placed independent of iha res nfa.enun.. an. s ,!,en not a Nominative : a«, • 2V confesi* the tt!i!/i, I wa^ in fuull.' An A.'jective «s «-e(l ,s a Participle arrrees with the Tnfi UUive or part ol a sentence as a Nominativ^ : L^n 1 A Lf" BTNTAX. Il» Witness, witlj id bindin« f^ii aal in.ern,era,o e:,jo„n.nt o.pe' .re and fhT fo\ l'"'''' hav Wlien the Xouns ore nearly related in ?enso, some author* nave Uiouglu it aliowat,le to put the vJ-h x »--"nor» "«- , ■ i..o oi.c«i,muie and slaiietaor 'v.„ j,'e,;. Ill SYNTAX. But II I- evidently contrary to the first principles of Grammar lo conaider mo distinct tJc«i* as on.., ho\v''vfr nicesiiav be tlj.^. ehiJosof tiifloroiice, an J i[ tjiero bo uo differcuce. one of Itjcn must bo superfluous and ougiit to be rejected. To support IK nbovo conairuc'ion it is soiJ, tbatilioVerl may bo uiidtr.tood us ai-plied to cucli of liif- piccedin;- tertn<, E8 in, • S.ud and a rr;ass of iron is ea«ier lu bear, thai, a f„:,r wiil.oul understand ng.* Kut b- idta ibe confusiOi. und iji, lati.ade of application whicl. sui-ii a coiislriJction woull intro- duce II appeals to be r.ioie proper and a:ialogicaI i/i cases wJiot< the VeiU I, inter, led to I.e appheJ to any one of the leiin^ to make useoftho di.xj.ii.clive coiijnnci.,;), wliicli giammalieMlIv refers the Verb (o one cr oJliur of li.o proccding teuiis in a sepa- rale v.ew. To preserve the dio.inttivo u.^os of ibe copulntive aiid d.jjciiictivu conj'jnciio:;3, \votild rendertlie rules precise, coii- Bislci-i, anJ intelliKiL!e. Dr. Liair. jiistly observe*, 'Two or more Subsianivc^^ joined by a Copulative, must ulwat/s re- q lire the Ve b or rroaoiin to v/hieli tucy lufer, lo be piuceii la tlie plural i.umber.' In many complex senteuceg, it is dnricult for Iearner3 to dcterrnnie nlie her one or more of tlo clause^ arc to be Ciinsi- dered as (he Num nuino ca^e ; and cor.'.eiiueiKly whether tl^e V«rb ehor:ld be ain.-Lilar or p!i:ia|. We shall therefore ttt down a number of varied examples of ih.', t.niure, m uich may eerve as bume povernuicnt to ihu .^cl;jh^.- wiili ri?iieci to sen- tences of d similar coi;?rnjcto;! : « I.ut unly hjs t.^tale, 'his re- putation too has siitrefcd by h's m:::'Co-.ducl/ • He cannot be jost.fisd ; for it is true ihit the prince, aa xvcU aa the people was blame worthy.' • In the mutual innumco of body und soul mere ts a wisdom whicli we cni.not fathom.' • ^"i,tue, honor, nav even self in'ere:t, <-c;/i5;u';c to recoramen 1 the n';a3U - ' • Nothing dclinlits me so much as the \v01k3 c! 1 aluu;.' ' aribcn, which beem.9 at i-rcbcnt unsot'led, I shall b. i 'ly s'ato ths reabons each side adopts-. • Iho King tvich the Lcrds aud CoD)r;ions form an excelie.it fiame of Govtiimiem •' Hume. 'The Hide A. Willi the sid^s L and C. coinnlete ti/e triangle ; PnoMiey. ' Tro^^p.-rity wi-h humility, renders its p033essor tuily amiable.' Mui ray says, Mho word?, « the King,' ' the 6ide A,' and ' piospeiity," ore the true Nomina- tivee to the respective Verb.s ; time ihe IVeposition w,//, governs the O^^ec/jt'e in Kiiglii,!, ; and u irun.slaed into Laiin wou'd govern the Ablative nnd it is manifest the clauses toUowin^ With la the pre red loi? ie.'>!enrp° cRf.-.c-.t rnnv. -.-.;•-. -.--^, .r :■' fiOTAX. " Gr«mm»r, lay bt lli'^r ne of llieia at tlip Verb '•'If? teriiii : hari a man ^1 und liie O'jII iniro- asos nhote i •eiirit', to nrnuliCMlIy ill a supa- l'Opul:it ive •Two or wai/s re- I'laceii /a ;arner3 (o Lie CLinsi- etlier the elore tct liicli iiiay ci to sea- If, Jjis re- •annot bo lie people und soul c, lionur, fiuadu; e.' many of J 'nciion. Murray, 'LTsJ hits !]y s'.ato iiuiiem ;' ,olefe the nders its l3, • the. Nomuia-: governs in would - ollowinj 117 Nominatlvf! cntt. uuil o; Ffoaoi ^ To i( na after wit/i I'ia ii id replifd, • (hat wherercr tl. » juinlly with iho singul om.nai.vf befort it, tl.t Verb should be plural : I urru • *i«3 true iV y •»)•', thai ' the i.rde A ar I It i» true. uijiiria , in ttie » was rij^l.t in us.ng tl,e words • CopuUiv! jConjunciion..' j^m Nuuaa, rather than and. ^op^'-l'vr lN.„„^^'""r "• ^'^P'^'^'ive Conjunction coanecis tm-o or mora a^so h '"■""» '" °"° •*''"«• ""^ ^'"^l' '^'»-' ^« lingular T- also when .«.ry „ used: as. .That supeificial Aolar 'and en ic. ..a« futn.iied proof, „,.t he know. Lo. the Hell^iw T.t l»er« , i:.very man ana woman was numbered;' not tcere. lh«r l^ '^^r"^"'" ^°""« ""'^ Pf onouns which are joined foro- ther by , I Copulative Conjunction, be of several per«ot,9m 'making ihepiuralPr.nou.s agree with then, in per^n ih" .econd person takes place of the thud, and the first o? be h a. J.mes and thou, and I. are atiachej to our country •' [Thou and He divided it between you. ^»aairy , EXERCISES ON RULE VI. rCharles and James writes Food, clothing and credit wwi 1 v,ciJ ] is the reward oliodu sir/ 118 sy:rTAX. King James IV, and most of his nobility was kill- ed at Flowdenfield. Time and tide waits fur no man. In harmony and unity con- sists the welfare and security of society. His politeness and good disposition charms eve- ry one . Diligence and activity is the road to riciies. What si^jnifics the coun- sel aiid care of precep- tors, when youth tiiiiik they have no need of assistance. Luxurious living and high pl'^asurcs begets lan- gour and satiety. One and nineteen makes twenty. What black despair! what liorrcr fills his mind ! This treatise, as also the other wliich accompany it, was written ten years ago. A groat statesman and patriot live in that liouse. Iv.ery tree, branch and root, were burnt up. Wisdom, virtue, and hap- piness, tiweils with the {,olden mediocrity. Out of the same mouth prcccc'ds blessing and CUrSi.;nr. o lie and mo is to do this piece of work. RULE VIL Two or more singular Noun'?, separated by a Disjunctive Conjunction, lequiro a Veili or Pro- noun in the singular : as, " John, James or Joseph intends to accompany me;'* " There is in many minds neither knowledge nor under.staudic'r " ^ The followiiia sentences are variations from ih s rule • A man mav s^e a inel«{.},o, or an aKe^ory in a p-cmro. a» welJ a» read ,h«m m a description ;' re^d it. ' It n:«s, be con- lessed thai a hmpoon or a satire u» notc.rry io ihem robbery, ortnu.'d.r; d<;c* no. carry in ,7. ' Do.lh or aorne ucr.^e mi fortune boou divide iht-ni ;' it ought lo be • dicidts.' Two or more di*linct phrases connected by a Dici.,ncnTa Con,unct.ou require a .mguiur verb : a.., ' That an .u It person «UOUld be poor, or a beau •i':..".r::n! is n. VCJBOH i ' WAj^tvi «ui • h and i up. id hap- STNTAT. 119 l^l'- 'o -n. rule, and >f couho m"'''.^"''"^ '*"'' "^^ "f^P'"^- Y-ng and not M:.r ^'f ;« f^;;: ;,"' ^r'*"?' •'"' '''^^ - t!>i- «en-oncfi • « Vo, r "'■'//'f'' Ims t>,.s effect a. in c-.cjuorcd thi« Hero . ButLT.n ^'^'"""'''^' -"''^ bav« on but nature »;iaA-f, . Poe"- Ti"/ •' V' ' ^'"' ^•^"'^«'- r^^akes a Poet ;' ^^ .he «1^ 7'^" .""^""^ "''"« ^"' "''""• • J'^'ncs or John '^U^,^^^ " '" "'« «*-- '--' " ^o a.y. EXi^JlClSES ON RULE Vlf. I Neither Charles nor Po- tor know, waat big business is. |Man's happiness or mise- ry are in a great mea- euro put into his own hands. >cspisc no infirmity of mind or bod;-, nor any condition of life, for perhaps they are to bo > our own iot. jit was not money and hon- or, but revenge, were ^V hen sickness, infirmity, or reverse of fortune atlbct us, the sincerity of fricndsiiip is proved. Neither him, nor you were tiiere. He does not love you ; George as wel as you and 1 arc hated. A tart reply, a pronenesg to rebuke, or a capti- ous and oontradictiou.«» spirit, are capable of •ro c;.s:;?r^.S j;^'-™« « otherg In Hd proper p«r"on, unti »hf *'15p«?« m%f \)t ihiin «iiipp(i«>H : ' Neither John i« arcii^fd, nor I om ^rrngfd ;' • He han done'u ;* • They hare «loMn if.' Suppljing ihe ellip- ■ in wouirt preveni amlMpuil y anci rrmler ihn t'#'nnnre* corrcc, ■n'h forniB of cxpio'fcion, to render the nen'rnces mom elegunt ; hm in manv ina'ancet thi< mnnoi be d"ne. Many 'irHmm«riHn-< ronfmo ihn rule »o $ingular Nouns, but it is aa applicable ta plural aa to lingular. EXERCISES ON RULE VI If. lulhrr tlinu or Joseph nit Tiiistalicn. Charles or I is now sure of tliis prize. Neither her nor Ihon un- derstands this business properly. Neither thoti nor ho nn- dcrstandest this science I or thou is tlio person, must go there. Both thou nnd we nrt blamed for liiis base action. Thou or ho or I la l)lamr(] as Ihn doer of this deed. Tliey or we is narr^cd ns the authors of this news It could not be Peter, but thou who toldcst the lies. RULE IX. A Pinrrnlnr and a plural Nominative of the sanu person, s<|»ara?rd by a Disjiinctive Conjunction, re quirr a piuinl A orb and the plural IVoininative phu-od next it : as, " Neither honor nor riches con' fir liappiness." In mo«t os-^es the plural Nominative may bo placed neitj the Verli, and when iliis is ihe case, there can be Itlile difiicul-i tv in choMSMig the riphi Verb. Rut pome cases reriuire the eini pnUr Noun p)nced next it, as in the penlcncc : • Not only illl his rirhe,. b-t his virtue van-.hes a.Vo.* Manv GrammananJ and t>mone others Levizac, have g ven such cxaniplea as Ibnj aa proper bn'b in French and Kngli^^h. But it is surely noiL gooJ Syntax, and iHt if. improper to pipce the plural Norai-B native next ihe Verb, when there js but one Verb in the tea-l «YXTAX. 121 lenf«, tiro p»rti of Ihe Vorb miaht be w.nnii-^ I, h.. .lch„ „„..*, bu. ,.. ^,Z vaS:{i."' '^°' '"'■ When not follows the ■ingular No.m iK- v i .ln»ul.r and no- plural, m ,uch aea.enci,*. '^'7J'^'"'"•• »"' not ricbea oiakei men liappj.' "'""• • •" » Gooducai and EXERCISES ON RULE IX. The ship and carnro were iost, and neither cap- tain nor saiJurs was aaved. One or both of the scho- lars was present at the examination. Neither this ruler nor his servants deserves our thanks. One or more ofthcsc men was engaged in this conspiracy. The care of this world, or great riches often ruins virtuous principles. Neither poverty nor riches was injurious to him. Neither ho nor they, has cc nplied with the a- gr Jment, RULE X. A Noun of Multitude renuiroH n c- i plural Verb and Pronoun. agrTe n' with'T'",.'' hingular or plural, accordin^'a. it eonv^v " "! *^« plurality of idea ■ as '"rh^l v ^^ unity or roffued •-' " Thn ;.•. 1 ^ Pnrhament is pro- |asTJ/ch.ef good" '" ''''''' ^"'•^"'- ^''--- mgular. For n^.cJLl\Xr tol''^ '^1"" °^«"'" '« '- barefoot, and the middle sort mn/..:' ? Peasantry o-^f, ' would be better to say . Th! ^. "'* °^ ''■^°'^"" '^^^^ i' h'Jdle .or. make use,''&c becL:o"u7 ^r """''^'^^^ -d iho b.es. is that ot a nut^her. Onihe co ^'^ ' v '.k" ^°"' '^«- ttesa ,n the following sentences in wh^.^M^' """"^ " « ''"«''- Verbs plural, because the idea, h.l ""' "^ ^'"'"'^^^ have tiot without solicitude.*'" ^Th;Hn,fc''\'^?"°^^°""'«'^'-« Ane Houee of Coinmona wer* of 12C 8y::ta.x. 1i>i ■mall weight.' • R«ephen'i party tcert entirely broken up by the capiivity of (Lair leaJer.' ' An a my oJ iweniy-four «h«u- •and were aaacinbleJ.' • There ia indceii no conBiiiution to tame or catelesa of their defence' * All the vittiips of man- kin! are to be coun!cd on a few fingerH, bit hn vices and fol- lies are innumerable.' I" not mankind in ihin place a Noun of mulliludo, and as such re<|iiire8 the Pronoun referring lo it, to be in the plural number their. Some may think that the v«'Ords, • An army of twenty- four Ihouaand 'should have were and not ten? : il the nentenco \v:ts tranf-i)Osed thiin, ' Twenty-four thousand of an aimy were •eun you though properly plural, if now applied lo . '> poraon, as well as more than one. The Pronoun »r< and the conipounJa oumelf, or ouraelrea « are foniolJmes applied by Monarch^ as tiiogular : ah, • We Alexundor Empiror of Kusaia.' EXERCISKS ON RULE XT. liobccca took goodly rni- jneiit which weio in Ihu Lou«c unci put thoiii ui)oii Jacob. Tho wheel has killeil aiio- thor niuii, whicii in tho sixth that liuvc hjst tlieir lives hy this incana. Tho lleiculc3 ship of warloiindcred at sea, it overset uiul lust most part of its men. Tho male amongst birds seems to di.^^covcr no beauty but in the colour of their Sj)ecie9. 1 do not think any one sliould bonr censure for being tender ol'thcir reputation. Tho sun shines in its meridian splendour. Tho mind of man cannot bo long without some food to nourish tho ac- tivity of histiioughts. Tho fair sex whose task is not to mingle in the labours of public life, hns licr own part os- sii^ned her to act. Take handfuls of the ashes of the furnace, and let JNIoscs sprinkle it to- wards heaven in tho sight of I'haroah, and it siiall becomu small dust. Anjruish and discontent iiianifestud itself iu liis face. Snow or ice when it raclO absorbs heat. I RULE XII. Tho Pronoun yc or you should bo followed bj t/uc 01 yvnis, and uot mow, ihij, thine or ihyscLj, iwC. •tr p»r. 1(0 the ?' ' 01) ink to (J plied lo irtelvet , • Wo SYNTAX. 125 n :nnnot some »o ac- hts. ! task 111 the c life, irt OS- ashes nd lot it to- ll tiiu 1, nud small ntcnt iu hid <| melts D(l bj ana fhnu by thy and thine, ntul not you ort/o«r,,, your- self, i^c. J lug Honloncc is llicrcfore wrong '» Tkou must loam your lesson;' it should bo, •• Thou must luurn /A// lesson," or •' i oa mu«'. learn v/ojj.- V^^.^ou." on,l H'r""'" '" «'"'°"'" '"'■'■"'«'">. "'"n is K.norally imagined, ond Iherofore rcimres i.oiico in a particular rule. h ,« aomo t:iiie» violrttoJ III Scrij)turo ; aa in Micali I. lo n . iv,.*n .,. »m«.H o Sapl.ir.- Somo ol tl.o bt-s- K„B)uh .vriler. have .omo- tii.>«8 mfrin J „, ae .he Elogam Po«. Collins wi tho.cli" oT Am in thai Irved AHitninii bower, you lenrned an ull coinmiiiuling power. ' - Thy niiinic soul O nymph en, loured, Cao well reca! what iI-m, jt Jiourd. EXERCISES Ors HULE XH. You should give some of Go yo aNvay for this time thy subsiun.o to t'lo when it L more conve- J''^"''- >"unt 1 will sec thoo. '';:;, J"!';,' ,".i','? ^'^ '^'- ''-c. Lack, ,,. what is not thine. So (hen thou art Ii!)eral of wliut is not yours. IVou wept, and I wept (or tliec. you away, I mourn thy absence. You should keep thyself pure iVom all do^iirc. UULE XIII. I„=in/n"^'''''xr° ""'^ its Pronoun shouhl not ho. h.^O(l either as Nomuiatives or a.s Objectives to ono t.o follows.' &c. without ogreoing with a plural Noun ; and it h 'ho part ot o Grammari- an to explain language already forme.', and not (o form a new one. Since then, • as appears, as loiiow.''," &c. have been u^-ed eo long ; there socuis no method ot explaining ihem. but that of supposing iliem Iiiiper>onal Verbs. It seems as improper to Bay, ' It was tho men,' as in many cases to supply it to ap- pears ; and 'he strange anomalous foim that it olten asfuni'S, jseems to be (ho bent reason, that can bo giveil that such verbb ■houid be used in an impersonal bense. fe 8VNTAX. 129 EXERCISES ON RULE XIV. I looked and was in doubt whether it was he, or it was another. It was these thieves that stole it away. It so happened that it rained whenever we were walkir.g thither. It were the Romans who killed him. The arguments advanced were as follows. He did not think it worth his while to enquire after it. It is better to plant cab- bages now, than to do- lay it a week longer. This contafrion opeiatrj on the body by satura- ting itself with the ac- queous particles of the blood, until it reduces it to its putrid fermeu- tatiou. RULE XV. The Relative is the Nominative case to the V'erb when no Nominative comes between it and tho V'erb : as, " The master who Icmtxhl us ;" " The trees xvkicli are planted." When' both AntececTent nd Relative are Nominatives, the Relative is the Jommative to the first and the Antecedent to the econd^erb : as, "The man xoho is honest will prospei " >> A few inutancfts of erroneous const rticfiorj will ilhist»a»8 Ihi8 rule, • These >re ihe men whom you mi-ht suppose wer'e Ihe auinors of the work.' • Men of fi.e (ak-nta are ..ot alw.y» |he persons who we .should esie«-m.* In the firot of li.e abo/a Dstanco^, the Ol.jective whom is used for li.e Nominative wh»' ind ,n the wcoi.d sentence tbo Noiiiinaiive who Is u»ed for the )l)jeclive whom, ^ The different casee of fp;io, viz. tho Nominaiive. Obiec ive, and Possess.ve, are illustrated m the /ollowi„g sentence Ho trAo preserves me, to whom I owe my be ng. S,ho,e I am knd «,^<,». I .erve .8 eternal.' In the several membee of il.m enlencc the Relative perforins a diff.,en' oifice. I„ the fir^t nfln.boi. ,, marks 'he agent ; i„ (he second it sut,mite to iho '!ri"!?.!'\' "L""." P^^P"^'""" ; in '^f^ •'iird it rcr.-e.ert:,tho 'i?eTrive ; anU in tiie iouiih liie object of an action : and 130 SYMTAX. if iiiiii iitiii Ihereforn it must be in the three different cases corresponJent to tliuse ofTicej). The sentencr above, ' These nre the men whom you might,' he. contnin-* a Nominative between the Relative and the Verb, and therefore Mems to contravene the rule ; but the student will reflect liiat ii is not the Numinativo of the Veib with which the Relative la connected. When the Relative Pronoui is of the interrogative kind, the Noun m Pronoun containing iheanower must be of ihesanie C)tse as that whch contaiiw the question : as, * IVhoMe booki are those ?' • They are John's.' ' }Vho gave them to him .'' * We.' ' Of whom Am you buy them ?' * Of a bi okseller, him who lives at the Bible and Crown.' * Whom did you see Ih-r" ? • Beth him ond the shopman.' The learner will readily comprehend this role by supplying the words which are understood in the answers. Thus to expret^s both an^-iwera at large, we should osy, ' They are John's books.' « We gave them loh ni. ' ' Wo bought them of him who lives,' kc ' V\'e saw boh him :>nd the shop nan.' As the Relative Pronoun when used interiog^iively, refers to the subsequent word or purase contninmg the mswer to n question, that word or plirase may properly be termed the subsequent to the Interrogative. Pronouns and Relatives aie g<=neially placed after their anteceden'S, yet (hey are sometimes made Ic prei; detlio tliingi thfiy rapiesent ; as, ' If a man declares in autumn when ea;iiig them, or in spritig when there are none. th.U he \ovoa grapes,' &c. But such construction as this, is seldom proper. EXERCISES ON RULE XV. If he will not hear his best friend, whom sliall bo sent to admonish him. VViChout any assistance whom can subsist by themselves. Ho who much is given to, will have much to answer for. The pprsons who consci- ence and virtue sup- port, may smile at the canrice of fortune. They whom have labour-' ed to make us wiso and good, are the person who we ou^ht to lov and respect, and wL wc ought to be grateful to. That is the student wholj gave the book to, and] whom I am perouadedj deserves it. Wliom.soever entertains such an opinion, judgesj wrnntT aVNTAX. n 131 If our friend is in trouble, wo who hu knows, and loves, and who he as- sociates with, may con- sole him. Who were (he articles boun^itof? Ola mer- chant, he who resides near the quay. Who was the money paid to? To the merchant and his clerk. Who count- ed it ? Both the clerk and him. RULE XVI. Relatives must agree with their antecedents, in gender, number, and person : vfw refers to man- kind, which to tilings, and Ihat and what to bcih : as, ' There is no person who sins not ;" " Here arc the goods which were sold ;" " What man or beast can hvc without food." The Pronoun u^ho is so much appropriated to persona that there is harshness in the application of it, except to the I proper names cf persons Of the (general terms man, woman I &c. A term which only implies the idea of person, and ex' I presses ihem by some circumaiancu or epithet, will hardiy au- thorise the use of it : ag, « That faction in England who mcsl powerfully oppose his arbitrary pratensions ;' « that factiorj frhichy would have been bettor ; and the same remark will feerve in the following examples : • France who waa in alliance with Sweden.' • The court who,' &c. • The cavalry loho,' I &c. < The cities who aspired at liberty.' * That party among ' us who,^ &c. • The family whom they coneider us uaurpera.' In some cases it may be doubtful whether this Pronoun ia i properly applied or not : as, • The number of substantial mha- IbitantSj with whom some cities abound.' For when a tgrm |('.irectly and neces.sarily implies persons, it may in many cagea, klaim tho Personal Relative : as, • None of the company l^whom he most affected, could cure him of the melancholy un- der which he laboured.' The word acquaintance may have the same construction. We hardly consider little children as persons, because that jlcrm gives the idea of reason and reflection, and therefore the [application of the Personal RrJative who in this case appears [harsh : as, 'A child who ;' but it seems only after the words ] child or children that this harshness is felt, for when children are called bj their proper namee, there seeme nothing har«h ,n 132 SYNTAX. \i : 1^ < u»ing the Panonal Relative with ihem. When the name of i pe.«oii ifl uvad merely ao a nnmo and il does not r-fer to th« person, the Pjoiionn tcAo ought not to be applied, tehieh ia most casea or Homoiimes tohose eliould be used : ' It la no wonder if surh a min did not shine at the court of Queen Elizabeth, tcho was but another name for prudence and econo my ;' better, ' Court of Queen Elizabeth which was but ano- ther name,' &c. The woid wha'>e, is restricted by some (but we believe very few at present,) to person*, for the greatest part of good writera use it when speaking of things. M'Jrray seems to think th' construction not pleasing in such instances : as, 'Pleasure tvhosc nature ;' • Call every production whose paits and ibhost nature,' &c. But the most part of writers aeem to aee nothing displea-ing in the us of this Posseaaive ca^e. In oiu case, custom authorises us to use tchieh with res- pect to pert-ons ; and that is when we want to distinguish onei person of two, «r a particular person nuiong a number of| oihers. VVa should then say, • ^FAicAof the two,' or ' to/t»c^l of them is he or she.' As the Pronoun Relative has no distinction of number,! we BomeiimeK find an ambiguity In the use of it : as, • The! disciples of Christ ttfAom we imitate ;' the imitation either oil Christ or of his disciples may bo meant. l^e accuracy andf clearness of the sentence depend very much upon the proper and determinate use of the Relative, so that it may readily present its antecedent to the mind, without obscurity or ambiguity. Ifho, which, what and that, (as Relatives,) (hough in the Objective ca:#e, are always pluccd before the Verb ; as ar« alao their compounds whoever, whosoever, &c. as, « He whoBii ye seek ;' •This is what, or the thing which, or that ycuj want ;' ' Whomsoever you please to appoint.' What ia some- times appltpd in a manner which appears to he exceptionable I en, ' Ail fevof.-, except what are called nervous,' &c. il] wtMild at least be bolter to say, ♦ except those which are call' ed nervous.' In some cuecs ihe word what is improperly used for that: as, ' Tbcy will never believe but nhat I have been entirely loj blame ;' instead of that I have been,' &c. f| Every Relative must have an antecedent to which it relatei This antecedent howev/ir is sometimes improperly omitted : «»,[| ♦ Who i? tatal to others is so to himself ;' it would be betteti to eay, • He who ia fatal,' or, ' The man who,' &c. The Relative eometimes refers to a whole sentence, inj stetd of a particular word in U : as < Thsa<> mA!><>nr«« *v?a•'^ts "vs SYNTAX. 133 dor'r-J n-i:hcut proper coniideralion, which rau«|.,I nrfat dis- «,,. .'^^''''""/°^«"' ••''"■"^^ ''f « sentence follow ono antecedent. l...m ,-,11 : as « o hou loho art. and m./.^ wum,- «,.(J ,W,o art Hol..,ul np..,n>l u'/hVA (he ivar wa. ...ulor-akcn. enJ thnt' m . .,, very L./rntunp wa. rc.lucc.f -o iho |>,,uk of .leMruclion •' il .-Iioul.ll.e, • and u-hich in tlie very,' Uc. '^aciion , The RcUdve should be pl.iced a. ne.p as possible to id aniecedonl lo prevent obscurity or ambigui.y. EXERCISES ON RULE XVI. Tlii>? is the mail which I esteem so much. That person is blessed whicli walketh in nid- or which. To prevent harelMUJ^ts, that should always be used afrcr iho "vords child or children ; though if does not eccrn necessa. ry when children are spoken of by their naniea. I Some are of opinion that the Relative that (-hould be nsfiy •ftor an antecedent w''ich was prcc'>dcd by it : a", ' Ii \vf,s I that did it ;' but tliere seems to be no proper foijndatcn for tli'3 idea. Some also think it more emphatc than who or irhich when put after antecedentp, which have a sort of iinlir.itej meaning as in this line: 'Thoughts f/iaf breathe and words /AaJ burn ;' but this opinion also eeema not to be leducible loii •eriainiy. EXERCISES ON RULE XVIT. Moses was the meekest man who we read of in the Old Testament. Sydney was one of the best Governors which Ireland ever had. This is the man and horse I which wo saw ycster-l day, ' Humility is one of tli; , most amiable virtues which we can possess lie is the most excellent The men and thind writer who ever took a which he has studiefl :^ I A \-in\ja nni ininrnvpil hlQl.1 SYNTAX. 135 They aro t!ic same per- Boiis who as^sistcd U3 ye^jterday. Some village Ilampdcn who with duunlless bruust, tlie tyrant of his i'mlds withstood. {(jcrmany ran the ime risk which Italy had dune. [AVho is the man who dares say he tsiua not ! All which beauty, all which wealth e'er gave await alike the inevita- ble hour. Tho^e children whom we liavo seen are both healthy. The child who was put to nurse is well. lie is like a beast of prey which destroy.s without pity. TiULE xviir. Whon the Relative is preceded by two Nomina- Itivesordillerent persons, it and the Verb may a«rree |m person with either : as, "I am a man who am a tiachor of truth," or " who t.s- a teacher of truth." \et it is often more elegant to make the llclative land V^erb agree with the last person mentioned than |tlie iirst. The words used by Murray in his rule, • r am the nun Ivho command you;' seem not to be explicit, and therefore %hould be di.^cdrdMd (rem all such rules. There is however Bomciiinea a diffculty in fixing the meaning produced by re- ferriig the Relative to diff'rem antenedenls. PTsrhaps this di/- ferenoe of meaning may be more eviden' lo the learner, f,oiB con-idering liie following aemences as well a» our rule :' • I am the General who git;e» the ofders to day ;' ' 1 am ihe General who give ihe orders to day,' This last sentence should be writ- ten. ' 1 who give tiie orders to day am the Geneial ;' and it "vouid then be more explicit. When the Relative and Verb have been determined lo a- »ree with either of f- piectding Nominatives, that agreement Tinst be preserved throughout the sentence, as in the fol- lowing intance : ' I am the Lord fhit maket'i all things, that ttretcheth (oah the heavens alone.' — Isa. xliv. 24. Thus far lis consistent : the Lord in the il.jrd person is the antecedent ■ fill t[ta V,.-U -_ -._ :^l . 1 •-.. . . ... • 136 SYNTAX. * • I am ihe F.nrd, whieh Lord or he that mnk^th «H ihinjjs." If / were made ihe nnturmlfint ^ t),o Hclalive miil Vi-ih ^liou'd • pifc with It III tlio first pRtunn : ac, * I am the Lord that make all thinjjs, that ttretih forth the lieayens nlone.' Hut nhonid ji foil.) V, • thai aprendeth ubro id the earth hy iny- •elf ;' there would arme a confusion ul persooK and a nmnilest ■oleciBm. That the -"cnnd pertnn mentioncil i« often the best to make tiie Relaiivo axrte wnh, will appear not only from the tiiiagreeuble acnience : * I mn ihe m*i» who commiiid you ;' (where the Uciative la undo lo ag-ee with the first pernon mcniioiiod,) but also from manr other beniencea of a eiiiiilar kind. When the Dety is «(!drei'»od, th« Relative should pener" ally be mado to jiprre wih thou : as in ihi« «eiitence, • Thou art the God, who driedst up tho lied Sea, that thy people niinlii pas?* throiijjli.' Soinu however may thir)k it t'hould be * dried,' but the Scriptuies goiicraliy nuke the Helativo agrre Tvi'.b thou. In tho tliird porson pingtilar of Vorb^, the termination eth ■houid be used m nil Unfjiiaj^o resppc'ing the Dety, as bein<,' more aolemn than tho firniliar s o' cs : aji, • \ am the Lord \v!io tenrhtlh thee to protii ;' and not, ' who teaches thee to prot'u.' EXERCISES ON RULE XVIII. I acknowledcTc that I am the tcaciier wlio ado[)t that sciitiinciit and maintains it. Thou art a friend that has ollon relieved nic, and that hast not dcpr^rtnd me now in the time of peculiar need. Thou art the man who toldest me tlie trutii. I perceive tiiat thou art a pupil who poss(\^sest bright parts, hut who has cultivated them but litt!e= I am a man who approves of wholesome sevpritj, and who recotnmcnil it to 'Jtiicrs ; but I am not a person who pro- motes useless severity, or who object to mild and generous treat- ment. Thou art he who brenfh- eston the earth with the breath of spring, and who covereth it with - verdure and beauty, I am the Lord thy God 9V.NT.1X. 137 profit and who load Thou art the Lord. wh( th.M- by the way thuu sliuuldbt did go. cliooso Abraham, and broii;];htc.st him out ol Vt ol the Chuldccs. niLE XIX. These Distrib,. lives ..•//nr, ncf/Z/f,-, each, rven, nnd the lndol„..to our, should generally, fthou/i; not ahvayn) huvc Nouns. Pronouns and Verbs in ho SMi^nilar number : as, '• K.ther of these w.ll do" J'.acii man must keep /i,.s seat." " Kverv m-in on-ht to attend A/v business well." "One cannot be too careful ofhis health." And those Pronuuna Ij sliould not be used the one lor the other. ^o,J'•^^L^.'""/^''''•'' '^T "" ''"f^^P" u« of these Pro- nouns . I^ei facA esicem others betrer than ihein.olve» •' ii cuousand correc : ,„ proport.or, as oMher ot .hco ivvo rua^^ wanting • /J„e/-y g.ove and ..ery tree wo,e cut down ' . was cut down.' • One nhould .ake care of //,c.V ov u .Mm".-' '• oi his own uitereet.' ii«icrcsi, ' T'fi"''' 'U°^'^'! "'"' improperly insfe.d of ,«.A • a. It), one. hach s.gnifie. bath taken di.tu.c-ly or sep„«,e|! l.i„n ff T^ "^""^ ''""' " collective Noun nhich has a nlural B.gnhcation : aa. • Every hundred year., every aix momhl' |.nhpi,:,a,Nouaa: a.. • Every o.o'a hor.e, had ^wXr '•'va. Lilhor oHbede compa.ues. will ba allow.,i .. .... La 138 SYNTAX. their ginjs and flmunition.> « One'j friends w M sometimes by heir conduct liurl one's intere-.t.' « Evory conjpunv of iheeo 600 men had Cupsdins of Uitir own.' J vert/ is somctimea used improperly in p'ace of one : ns, • The Plague is uually comm'inicaied in tlie East from every city th'ire to .T^oiher by Infeclion alone ;' should be, ' Jioni one city to anoihcr.' EXERCISES OxN RULE XIX.' "M. t . '} Iff It \V Each of them in (heir turn receive this benefit. Every person should bo contented with their condition. By discussinf^ what rc- Jatesto each particular in their order, we shall better understand the subject. Are either of these books yours ? Neither of these men have ^ an idea that (heir opini- on i3 ill founded. Every leaf, every twig, every drop of water, team with life. One should not be too po- sitive in their opinion. Each of these nations have Kings of its own. Every people have its own laws. Every one's servant should obey their mas- ter. Each people has its own Ruler. On either side of the river was the tree of life. Man is born to trouble, on every hand arc evils. This remark suits either Jew, Christian, or Mahometan. / RULE XX. When the Indefinite such means so much or so great, or when a consequence is deduced, it governs i/iat afler it : as, " Such is tlie love of money that few can resist it." " Their conduct was such that I ordered them to be punished." In every other case, suck governs as after it. JV/w or ivliick must not be used for as or that after such. a SYNTAX. 139 theExercsesw.lfshevv? ^ '''' «"d ««« .«.,«. which Such is pffen used when a-t and /Aa/ ars nn» « ibut unders-ood: as, ' Such u .he lot o/rn^n VoZLV'''^'''^' [;o^mo:ro. he . ,aid .n the .c.b • rL"' i^ 'ZlllT:^^ |l.e soon spen, a.. , ^7::.;a^%:;;^^'rufrb'er;?."^" ''»" rrA,j or w/„cA i8 80met/me8 improperly uaed afer *«.A »3, Lot 5McA persons u-Ao reprove oihersf Jook to Xf * ' conduct ;' ,t should bo « a, reprove others ' '*""' ^^^^ EXERCISES ON RULE XX. Elis behaviour has been such, as many will vilify his ciiaracter. >uch was Alexander's love of praise and Uut- tcry, as he aflected to be a God. lie spoke in such a sharp manner to tlte Kinrr, as it cost him his Jife,*^' (gained a son, and such a son, as all men hailed Kie happy. piore was none shewed such courage at tli>s hattle like that ho did. Such IS the uncertain state of man's existence, as he cannot ensure his life for one hour. Such persons that act the hypocrite are not to be trusted. None but Nero could act such a part that Cali- gula did. He uttered such sharp replies (hat cost him his lite. May sucli persons who slander others, be pun- ishcd. RULE XXI. In contrasting Nouns or circumstances by thi. d hat these and those, for.ncr and latter, o^n t lo tioV should'" ho **^%^^'-^ -•• such like phrase ? |ectf i ttde^d"^!: \-^/-^,7P-pHate,y to t^i^ jl ■w"v*v« . as, vv earth a«>d r>r\«7«H*.. «—- 4 140 SYNTAX. I ''• both tcniplations, Ihul tends to excite pride, this dis- content." \Vhero Ihat rcl'cra to tlic liral .Noun, and ikis to the second. Iiiitancoi of (1)0 u«o of this and thai, former and hitter have bcuti givt-n bnloro. It i* ultoii bet'cr tu contrast, wiili * on one,' or * oiio lituJ,' * on llic oihnr ;' lliuii wiili iliuso Dumotixiralivos : an I'l ilm fullowing, ' VVc wern coojjoJ up lit this n"rro«v duliloi aa iT but wl>uii two firos, >v)icro wo cnuM not eacHpe. Oti one aide \vni< the camp of our ''" •• "^^ " r>'-rs(.n«." 1^ llus .s a pleasant walk," .. e. -/his walk A'lje.'ivo T» ,„„^ „„,, Numeral AdjecfivoH [n!;^:.rd,^u-^::t:;:i;:\-:;s---^^ j'l'ei. iinporiunitv- Tl.i. ' ' ' >""'r ''e'ui. ;' r-'-unc. a\lnri V. d'U :..%;■':';' ''"J"-"*'' "'"^ >- ; a ve,y learned. ruUnon^l^o^'^a^l'^"' " ^"'^^ ^'" . Though tho Adj-ctive always rcl,.(c9 lo n >s a smj^le word : ii«, ' col- f mine, corn-mill, fruit-tree.' The uord-* coalesce, when tliey V, aie readily pronounced lo^e'lier, have a long eftobiished associ- ii alion ; and are in (lequeul use : as, • honeycomb, gmyeibr^ad, iukliorn, Yoikdhne.' Sometimes the At'j^ctive» becomes a Siib'^tmiive and Iihs another Adjeciive joiii.;d lo ji : as, ' The chid ^ood ;' * the vadi imnieneiiy ot t-puce.' When an Adjective hua a prcpositinn before it, the Sub. Blanlive being undeiMood, il tuUcs ihe naiure ot an ^^lvelb end is coiisi 'ered hs po Adverb : a-, ' In general, in particul.-ir, in hasit, &c.' that is, * Geneialiy, parwcularly, hastily. ' Thongh the Adjective is usually placed before its Substan- tive, yet bometimis it is placed after it. The instances m which il comes after the Substantive are the foi:oiving. Isf. When domciling depends iipi/n the Adjective ; and when il gives a bettei sound, efpecially in Poeny : us, • A man nencrous lo tns enemies ;' • Fct^O me with loud conveui- ent for me ;' ' A tree three teet thick ;' ' A body ot tronpi fi.iy thousand iiron^' ;' » Tlie lorrtiu lumblinjj through locks abrupt.' 2iid. When the Adjective is emphatic : as, « Alexander ihe threat ;' • Lewis the to/J ;' • Goodness uj^ini/tf ;' 'Wis- dom unsearchable.' 8rd. When several Adjectives belong to one Substantive: as, • A man just, w.se, and charitable.' 4ih. AVhen the Adjsciive ia proceeded by an Advoib ^ «», ' A boy regularly studious.* I }0 tho 1 from janing, > is caso I Sub- it by a le two her of juncecl wauli, :ila are ' coa!. n tliey associ- ibr^ad, nd Iiai ' ' the s S.ib. ilvoi b, iciilnr, * bstan- ces 10 ; and ', 'A Hveni- tronpj rocks 8TNTAX. 143 fonder ' Wis- nlive: voib l.«.w!l„' 7k, f*^ "'''"'*' in any of i., variation, com.. or Jnppy ,s the mm -vho m.lies virlue bia cbnico.' a S,u,.n.nt,ve place-l -.Itrr.n Act .. Vorb : ap « V^ni v of,«n fl,r, A i; „.• 'it'jncno/e. in an exclamatory sentencn tbo A.lj.cuve Roner.-,ily proc-dp. ,be S.h,„nt,ve • as " Hoi* dcsp.cal/e does vanity oiten render if, po.scs«or • " ^ When a Vr.h i^ next f,, , Noun or Prono.in tbp ArH-,.. cr „^,.ct. There m fomeiirne^ ?:oa( brHiity, « ■, well la force .n planng ,he A.ij.c-i.e before ,he Verb ; a.ul the S i^antTva n.mcd,atelyart.>r,t: as. « Gr.at „ the Lord ! ju«t anSuo are thy ways ihou Ki!.>;'.nire y . :.. • or « An inHni-eiy . :.■. Hei.,. ' .The an er" f ! noh.eous ;' and m.ny o-her pbr :,.e. nnv h.ve Ib^ A 'i.Li ! [ e-hor precedm. or following it. Xoun o^ Pronoun "' «P.' Nuner.'^'r"'';-^"''-"';"' '"'-^"J •'' ^''J^^'ivo Prono.n. n;^nd,n« ^...M.nd if .,«Win,t'::^V;i^, „,];---- ofboo-cs u.a.a vnluible present •• ' fh,l ,et.^ « The se i rf ro ! was ,wn (no, th.cl< ;' . ,,,., f.^,.. . fj, ^^^ ;/ ni:le 11) an iioiir ;' 'five milpq ' ♦ iT» ^u •. r . • 'wen!y pound.. ' ^^ ''^'^ " ^°' *'^''°'. r-^uiid;' fl'on'd ,p !V' • •n- ^"° "'"'"'" pounds;' is wrona. it on .7. r 'V'" •;'""■" '"'"" ^""'■"''- -"■ -i'h 0/ like mi'i? on „,,,, . Ten,bou3anc;.sotmon ;' i. vrong. i, oi.h to K Ten ,!,ous,nd n,en ;' and lundr. d i« ,l,c ..no. ulLll S^aui has ala.n his ,bou..nd., .nd D.vid h,s .^n ThouLda/ ■lar nJ!:i^L;;:'':^^ "^:::^«''r. ''.^-'- -'>> No-« in .he a^n.o- 'uiiuuiau, (ue nundredlh part k i , * Tlio icnili company had their own •rus. EXERCISES ON RULE XXII. ITc hns not been here this ten days. These pair of bracclctg arc real gold. His virtues arc that of honor and integrity. Thoso sort of favours do hurt, instead oTgood. Tliesc kind of indnlgcMices so. ten and injure the nnad. How many a sorrow shouhl we avoid, i| we were not industrious to make them. Thomas is equipped with a new pair of shoes, and a new pair ot" gloves : he is servant of an old rich man. Tiie chasm made by the earthquake, v/as twen- ty foot broad and one hun3 «a,,n<.. . Thi. ,ne.n.' or 'that n/cln^ '"''"*"^ "'■'"'^«^' cmen,is for Ins -acrmcm^';."- r;.;.'. ^'" '^»'' - '-norabl. -^'U's IS proj>erlv plural In 1 ? ' """ ^'="' "'• 3. and vvutcrs. ^""^'»'' and a« .udMs u.cd by ,nany good Tlie Nouns .'1090 „,?,?« |r/i, ,.f. "" "'«^ and al.o wall t/,esc and 1. '. vs':;ir'r:,.;::,:^^ (?--,«[ « -one. „ opuc.. „e, a p".) "5. • IMathcmaucs,^ aVrt.'; . f'^^^'-'y Wrong to do I'<«. That metaphytica, &e . fil,n„M ' . This mathema- P'! er. •' ' *"-• fi'^ouJcJ i:ev'cr bo made by any EXERCISES ON RULE XXIII. flc was rich and by this xnranhe rendered him- solf powerful. He was industrious and i'-uffcil, and by this means became rich. Tohn was very sober and Dy these means was esteemed. industry ig tlie mean of '^oiau'niig wealth. M Ho displayed his talents ^^r satire, and by this nieans rrnt rmri,/«. mies. ^ '^"^ ^"^- Joseph was frugal and so'^cr, and by this means became rich. It is a mean I wiJl not adopt. ■"■7 '^''»-' Hieaii be- tween the two measures. '■'\f'. II! M i Ml 14G srXTAX. It was l)y this unjTcncroris He received a thousand uienii he obtuincd iiis pounds in a present, end. whicli was ainpio a- This messenger ,uld of "^^^"'^ ^'''' '"^ '"'^" tlie I'.inpcn r's death, He ^avc both to tho and also ol tho great church and to the poor, defeat in the cast, and nnil hy this alms ob- by (hi^ ncw.i the <:ity taiucd the nnr.ic of be- ofUonic was in much ftiarin. iuii irencrouij. RL'LE XXIV Thoiin;li Adjectives of one syllabic arc common- ly compar':)d with cr and ts^, and dissyllables with Dv^rc and hio-^f, yet they may often bo dine so with either. iJut dissyllables ending in id, cd, oiis, isli, and }•)/, should not bo compared with cr and est. Those of three or more syllables can only be com- pared with more and most. No double comparativcs.j or superlatives ought to be used. y Ma, ray has intiriMtcd that no Dissyllable except those that end in y, as happy ; and in Jc, ns oblo ; or is accented on the List pyliable, as Jiscrcf/, admits of a comparison by er and est. This appoars to bo not q'lite correct. A great number of A Jjecfives of two syllables aie capable of being compared will cither er and est, or more and most. Dissyliablcb that «re not accented on the last syllable, may often be comparfd by < r and est, as well as more and most : as, * Proper, pio- porest ; civil, civilor ; frugal, fmgalest.' Some in /e, however, (which ending, IMurray intimaiea, always admits of comparison by er and est,) are disagreeable when so compared : as, • Fertile, fertiler ; puerile, pnerilest ; docile, dociler,' &c. Indeed most Adjectives that end in ed, id, ous, ish, and ry, Will not admit of comparison by er and est : as, ' Valid, pn lished, virtuoi;s, vicious, childish, hungry, &c.' Some Adjec- tives ending in /, especially ful, are unpleasant when compar- ed with er and est : as, « Frightful.' Adjectives of more than two syllables can only be compare] 3 with more and most, but scire that seem to be of three ae^ properly only two : as, ' Partial, social, patient, &c.' com- J p»red, ' ^artialer. soculect, particnter, &c. ' BYNTAX. 147 Arfjcctivos that iave in thcr,i3e!ves n «itperhtiTc H.anir form ..pera-l Jed : .ud. a«. . Chu-i; ex.rcn e, ^e ?o ,' ^ U &c' T^ ^l"'''"^^ "'"■^' """••'•'«^'' "-^' supreme! He claim, acl.m^sion to the cl.icfct onic...' • The an ^^'i became .o„,„vcrsnl ami nauonal.' 'A m.-hod of aUa n mj hor,,/,^o/,„d grea.est (.appme«..' Ti.« phrase". .Her' fee. .onghl, 80 extreme, bo univereal. &c.' are .ncorrec, because ,f,ey nnply .omeU.inf; ,« loss perfect, Je8« e, "emc Lc' iban another, which is not possible. ^"femc, &c. ^' '3 proper however to apprize (he learnpr »lia» .», l i ' above remark, abou- ch.efe.., &'c. .erm pro ^ \. °:f; 't^ o,.r bnst ^vriiers h^vo .hsreyarded them. Severari, .^ ' ^ i ;c b« f-nJ in th. I3,b!e. „s',n .hepluaso, « ' " ij eT.'17 ten thousand ;' and Add-.on. who ha/been ca "d ,.«Tf I En.l.h crH.Mhat ever wro^o. has several examples'; a Tn'he Cn.pa.gn. • Those who print 'em truest, pra.«e 'em moi" ' I^'^ublc Comparatives or Superlatives aro n.ilt- •■ and should never bo u.ed : .s, • NVor.er. ;s"cr n n^e'T^"""'' most inferior. n,orc better, mo.t awect;.! ^o 't h ;h,e. '^^ r; poueitiilost, &c.* ' "'g"iesi, aioat Adve,b9 of ono syllable which admit of comnari-on . comp.rrd w.h er and e,t ; but Dissyllables mThlc^T '1 hv„h e.ther cr and es/ or ,;,.,e .nd L,/ as .glur^"''^ (more seldom, of.ener or more often." ' * ''^''^"'"er. or Those ending jn ly and tho^c of three syllables can onl. he compared wMh mo.e and rno.t ; «uch Adverbs arL/^/i" Y^l^y, are d.sagreeable when compared, and ahould not t EXERCISES ON RULE XXIV. Though Euclio was pol- ishedertliati the others, yet his conversation was pueiilci- and vapider tlian tlieirs, and upon tlie whole ho wab the IboJishest of tlietn all. fJe wasofthc ino>t .strict- est sect of RcJigious Though none appeared feeJniger than CJio, yf^t he was really the viciousest, and was often angrier at trifles than the test, and then his countenance put on the frightl'ullost appear- ance you can imagine. ;,i^ *5 ilU \MHi 148 SYNTAX. Virtue confprfl tlio su- prcmcst di<;iiity on man and should be his chiui- cst dcdiro His assertion was inoro true than liuit of his opponent ; nay the words of the latter were most untrue. His work is perfect ; his brother's more perfect; and liis lather's the most perfect of all. It is more easier to build two cjiiinneys than to inaiulaiu one. The lun more than two things are compared : as, " lie is ;: better writer than 1 ;" " It was no other than he ; " John is the wisest of the three." Iiiacc'iracies arc oflcn found in ilie way in which the Je'l greos of compaiison are applitd and construed. The folloivipg are rxainples of Nvronj" con>tfiiclion in li;is leepeci : ' Thi« nc-j bio nftiioii haih of , ill otliors adtiiiMcd tewer coriuplions.' 1"li9j word fewer is iioie ronsirued precisely os if it were the Super-j lative ; it siiouM bo, ' liaih admitted fewer coriiiptionfi tiuii ai>;l other.' Tlie word other which belongs only to Comparatives, j ihould never bo used in a Superlative sense. Tliu Compara- tive degree should generally be employed \\hen only two ihingJi are compared ; as, ' Tl i? is tie wei^ker of the two ;' and ti) Siiptrlaiive when more than two are compared : as, ' Jsmeij 19 the strongest of thorn nil.' Severn! good (iranimarianJ,! however, are of opinion tint wiien two ohjecis are not foI niiich opposed to each o'.her as to lequire than before the last, that the Stiperi.it^vo sliO'ild he ein;)loyed, and not the ComparSi tivu : an, ' ^vlaria is luo haiiuaumt^^i ui tiie iwu." The bupii- ejTNTAX. 149 lalivo i- offon rerfainly more agrocal.Ie in sound, and in Home cafci a vorv Hfrirt n(l!,.r-nce »o a Comparal.vo form, uuknt « •onitnce Biitr and disagreoaLlo. A rompari^on in which more than two persons or Ihingi aro co.Toriud, may be expre .cd ... ns proper a manner by ih« ( umpjr.rivo as ti.o .Supeiluiive. Tho Comp>,aiivu consider. 11. e ol;|.ci ol c.-inparison as appcrtoi/iu.jF to diirjrent sorla • but \\,» Siperlalive coiiMdcrt 'h.r, as mc lu.lcd under one epc'cie» IhN. iUv. Coni(>arnlivo : « Homer ib a better Poet ih;»n an* o-iicr of ihe ancrents.* Homer hero etand« alone, oppo-ed to all other ancient Poels. ||o ^vd. none of .hem, and was o«(tcr than they. Tlie same thought may be e\prei«ed by the Super. iMive, when iho ivord ol'icr i^ omitted : a;-, ' Homor is the host Poet of any of the ar.cionts.' Homer has in thi, Fentcnco ihe hghtc8t place m iho species of objects wiiti whom ho ia Djuibered. Tlio Conjuncfion than ahniild be tiaeJ aflur Comparafivea whether Adj.jcHvos or Adverbs, and aI«o afer the woid other, and not iu^ Tho ioliowiri- sentences aio erroneous in this ios[)ect : • To trusi m h m is no more i,ul to aoknovvltilijo hi^ pow.>r.' ' This le no oriier i«nho {,Mteol Paradise.' In iheue neniencos ii should be thaii and not buf. EXERCISES ON RULE XXV. , talent ofthis kiiid would pcrluips prove tlio like- liest ol" any otlier to succeed. lie spoke witli so much prdptiety, that 1 under- stood him tiic best ot' all oUier.s, who spoke on the subject. :^ve was tho fairest of all her daughters. fie is the stronrrcst oftho two, but not tho wisest. .'hose savajTc people >icein to liave no other element L ut war. There were threo Thea- tres in this city, and it was the sujaller ol'theso was burnt. lie has little more of the scholar but the naim;. You whipped this had boy and it is no more but wiiat he deserves. The sun was no soontir risen but they went on their journey. He gained nothing farther by tiiis cunning, ()ut to be praised lor his acutcness M 1 150 8YMAX. ■ 1i RULE XXVI. One Substantive pnvcrns nnotlior '-ignifv inp; a dilToriMil tl.inji,) in the PosacsMvc cnso : uh, " My father's house ;" " Man's happiness." A Noun also {Tovcrns a Pronoun, and tlie Inip< rfect Tartici- |)lo in tlie Possessive ease : as, " \iilue lias its te- waid ;" " 'J'his person's Uisnussing his servant is ungenerous." When ilio annexed Sjbetantive signifies «ho eanie UiiriR na iViO fii-osilion to each oilier. JSoiiiis or Pronouns in appofitiort, are not always in tho No- minative tabo. Tiicy are souictn.es in the O'Djottive os iti tlieso Bcntinicer^, 'They h>vo forsaUen me tlie /wun/nm of livir ;,» waters, and he>ved them out cislcnis, broUtn ctslerft^ \h7it. van hold no water.' ' Tliey elected hun President and Com- mander in Cii'cl.' Wiicn Nouns are connecltd by lli • P.oio- Biiion of, ot the mark ot the Potsessive s, or w.'icn r.jparated by a Uclaliveor Verb, ihcy are not then in nppo$ition, hu: in ditfer^nt cases. In this scniente, ' Ponipey tonU-n ..lI v.iih C'f■'^sr who was 'he grcaiest General of his time.' The i;iter[ri- Kiiion of a Helalive and Verb breaks the construction, .ind the word Gfncjo/ IS in the Nominative case. In tliis sen ence, • Julia wae sniit with the love ol Varus, viz. of hni I ineniion. ed before.' The Relative and Verb when applicil, M^ka him out of the Po^sui'-ive case : as, ' Julia was emit with the love oi Varu-<, who wah he I mentioned before.' The Preposition oj joined to a Substantive is not alwi-ys equivalent to the Possersive case ; ii is only so when the ex- ries^i n can be converted into a regular form of the PoHsesMva case ; we c.'tn say, ' Tlie reward of virtue,' ai.d ' Virtue's re- ; Wild ;' Lut though it is proper to say, ' A crown of gold ;' j we cannot conveit the expression into the Possessive case, and say, • Gold's crown.' Sometimes a Substantive in the Possessive case stands' alone, the latter oneby which it isgoverned, being understood:^ as, ' I called at the bookseUer'fl,' i.e. at ' the booksclier'ij shop.* If several Nouns come together in the Possessive case, the •poitropuc niku i is ttiiu CACU iU fcUV A«|Oi) t*ust «««.<%««••' SYNTAX. 151 rest ■ 8, Joliii anil Rliza's books Jiiotlifr, ai:.'! iinclc'i? ailvice. Til KiM i« in my f»rher. wiien any wordi intervene. tim Mgn o( tlio l>o.--8c-4Mve Hhoiild bo nnnoxed to each • ii» • riiey nro JohiiS &• well «» KlzaV books :' ' I bad ibePby' B:c,an'», the Surgeon's, and ilie Apotliccary's aogistancc' In Poetry the additional s i.. Ire-iuemly om.t-ed, but th« apo3!ro()lie i(;'a;i,ed ia ilie sjnio rn..rmor as in KubMaiiUves of the plurjl iiiimlw ending i„ s : as, • Acnillea' wrath »o due ' riiia stems nut so allowable in proso ; u„ ch the rollowmii erroneo.a examples smI! dfuionanaie ; 'Mules' niinisier •• • I'hiruhaj- w.ie ;' « F.,-tu, c.Mue into Feljx' ruum ;' ' Ihcs'a answers weic in .do to Kie vviinejs' q-icsiions.' l{„t in c&!*e» which would give 100 micb of the hh.i>i^ souiui, the omiaaion takci place even in Pi 030 : ..3, • For ngliieoiisncM,' sake •' • For consiienco' ealit.' Thi-. /i/s./zt^r gound ia caused by the lei-er J. bLguning the next word after one that ends in s or has the ^ou()d of 11 : ns in liio two e.\.uiip!n» above, and in such phr;,s-3 as. ' For Francis' sak,) ;' • Mijca' servant Joahua •' • ;o3ii3' sjinU -hal! rise fust ;' « For lleodiaj' ^nke ;' ' The ^raih of Pelp-id'Bon.' It may seem sian^e thai iMuira'y should have commi'ied an error with rc-aid 10, ' Ilorodiua' sake •' Ibir.oe there appears 10 be no ditForor.co between this phrase [and ' For righi°oiiS!ie:ja' eake.' * A phiQ\ Gi,e me John the Baptist's head :' « Paul the Apos- Dion ake ;' fle's advice ^ But when more than one epithet or title are m apposition >.acec after a Noun, it appears requisite thai the Possessive ».gn should be applied only to the tirst or principal Noun, and ','?, . Z'*'""'^ 'o il>e others : as, 'I reside at Lord Stormonfe. gior jr uiu ii« euiuiaie f Ulv nl.l f, ,, ..A i - '-s a M w ■»> itvac \C2 RY.^TA^. i-!- He emulated Cesar!*, the grea • riie-io Psiinis are D^vid'r*, the tpsl Gt;neral of anliqnily.' the J owisli p2up!e. I he ornani unl of ilia country, anc We ehall perceive the propriety VVc staid a moiUli at Lord Lytiletoii <■, I the friend of every virtuu." !(». if we ann"X tho ot t:i!s ru Possessive •"gn am[i 10 the end of the last clause ii\ lli'-" abo\e ex- !c8 : ' Wiinse glory did he eiimla'o •eaie>-t Cieneral of antiqmty'^s the g David, the Kuifi, Pnest, uti ? He emulated Cecar, These Pdnlnis are J Propiiel of !he Jewi^i people's.' It afMiiiirs III tilts entenccs, that the coiu-.ecing pos^cs-ivo d too rcmoir to bo ei nipn IS p ace It IS much better to xuy lie r p'iiop:i'U0U3 or a-rce abU Th 13 ivM'e, iha Chri-tiiiii Hero and grc Apostle of the Ge;itilcs ;' ih Th S IS MUl the Christian Ileio ;iiid f^reat Ap.isi The application oi the io of the UemHe's advice. Post ir.ve tig to iviort thill one o f tho Nouiis in appos ))iositiun, wou ind also of't-i iiicotrcct as, 'KiiiK Ch:uled's the second's id ho very hir«h and displeasing, « The E;ii[if.'^oi's Lc-poldV ;" The parcel wus leli at Smitirs the bookdcii er'a and stationer's. Substantives govern Pionouns as w ;l| as No;ins in iha Possedsuo cafe : iiotik is mine.' as, • Goodaesa brings iii reward ;' ' Thai The Proaouu hi-- 'v hen iletached from ilie Noun 'o 'v I;irb it relates, is to be considereJ not us a PossesMve Pronoun, hut a, the Genitive ca' book IS thjl ? His C of the Person.ll Proinjun : a:-, Whf It we used the Noun its-ilt, we slioul Bay, when we I'his book is John's.' Thii position A-ill be more evidu dunt consider that botii t he Pronouns in the following ■en lences luuai have a sirmKtr constriiclioii Is it htr or hia honor that is tarnished .?' * It is not heia but hi^. A Substantive or Pronoun frequcnly governs the Imper- fect or Presen Particip'c ill the Po-scssiv e case. Tlius insiead of Haying, eervanl so What is the rcasoi. t th'- person disinissiiig hi ha-tilv ;' wc ought ro sar, « What 19 tiie reason o this person's dismiss .ig h's servant sa h.vsniy. improperly, remeni bei It I leina rcfKouo So we also eay il a great exploit ;' but we oight to siy, ' I reiiiei:ib-.r lis oouig reckoned, &c. The following sentence ii5 correct and proper : • Much will de- )en d on the j'upil's composim, but "more on /jts reading frequently. It iv'ouhi not 1)0 correct to say, V, ' Much will de- ppiul on the jntpil compo « This will be -Aw etTjci of the pnpiri <-om^MJsj«i,' frequent K , We also properly say, tK ■ ini CO itead 01. ' Of the pup i The Engli h Posseesive that we often mako U!»e il coiiipoiing frecjiantly nd expre.si liic eaujo niaiiOa. up has of:cn uu unpleasant sou fill? Particle o/" instead of It, t^l rdi:i! ii;;u is ='• SYMAX. 151 the fo'Iowing srntences, in taken : ' The Genera! in (h tion ;* • The Commons' vot which this meihod h e arm a« not been y d name publifihed a decl do Id ver tnii»l3 betier to .-,iy, « In iheVi y ignorant of the kingdo e ;' • Tfifa Lord's li lara- oue« ofihn CJommons ;' « The h ousu o n b condition, "le of the army It Urilesi « Pre cer- h is alao ratiier hsish i the kmj;dom, with iho Kama Sulittanhve tlia Pope's and the King's plea f Lord The The vo'es condition of as. VVI use two Posseasiveg sure lom he acquainted wi»h Pope and of li.e K.n;^.' would have been bet Th« pi casure of ih< er. We eometimes meet with ti ono another, of.d coiinc each of (hem : ae. c'.td by (he 1 brae Subslantives dependen t on re severity oj Mje distress ofii Til the Kinif touched ihe nalio th 9 laborious mode of cxproi--io • O/some o/iho book^ o/ each of thcs posmon of applied lo VVc II in uo •e jon o/ a striking instance of fol caialoijiie Will be given, at the end of 'the work lowing sentence ; a cLiHSrs '^hicratuie. In some cases we use be the Pit'position of as. ton' Sometimes inderd. It i!h the Pos^e ssive termination and 13 a discovery o( Sir Isaac N unlcs other form thij method id absolutely ■^ we throw the senten ew ce into iidi ill"UI-ll tlio ense and to gjvo ihe -dea o £0 ci.ll.Hl, Which 19 the most imporla.u oi the rel |e . hy fhe Pos-es^^ive case : for th jiuro ot my friend ;' and ' 'L\ Ig-U very different i,le.i><, the la necessary, in order to property, stiictlj i9 P atiotis cxprrsE- e f .\pi£3)-ions, • This Pic- iciure ofrny friend's litrictest seii-io. The idea Ibetter manner by saying : ' This Pi'cturVbel tier only is ihat of prop, would doubtless be* sug- riy in (be conveyed in « When the double Gene onging to my friend. IS not necessary to disii live, as some Grammarians f erm i«, i-e sty unit 0, it IS generally omitted nguish the ben.e, and especially in E y, It seemd lo be allowable only in ;xn ence of a plurality of suljec's of th ^^irosso^s, • A subject of the Euipero' ny brotlier'.» ;' moro than on*. a,,h;^« ixcepi to prevent ambi 2i!i v.'ouJd be h.tler t le crown of iar waH never o avoid the ivo the sentiment another form of I ilher of n uiai.y cases it is better and more eleg.nl (o use t*, th or the ^ izn of the P 0^'3pa«l Va an lac Kins of Ftacce ;' instead of, '^io' i^ brother V-'be' King l.vl SYNTAX. of France,' or • The KinR of France's brother.' It is belter loeay. ' I am an enemy to dlene..,' ihin ' 1 .'.ra an eaeiuyof idlenej. ;' ' Ho was a uMtness to iUIh deo.l.' .aiher thin, H« wa- a w.-nes. o/'ihis deed ;' ' She i^ n.ece to iho (Joverr.or. rather than, ' She is n.ece of the Governor.' L.l.lo cxplanaio- ry circumsiances f.re piirticM.uly awk-v.ml between a I osscs- give case and the word which usiially follows it : as, fehe began to extol the farmei'^. as she died h:m e.xcehent r.nder- ■t.nding ;' it oug!;i to bo, 'The excellont unuerBiiuiding ot the Farmer, as she called iiim.' From the fore-oing observations, we may learn, that we should use the ^u;.. ..f thn Po.sesaive. or the IVepofinons oj or to, 99 we j-jdge they would reader a sentei.ce iierspicuoub andj agreeable. EXERCISES ON RULE XXVL m A mans manner's influ- ence W\i tnrtuiio. Tlioso Lady's formed themselves inlo a socie- ty called tlic Ladied'd society. The boxes lid is broken. Both box's lids arc bro- ken. The anniversary of King William's and Queen Mary's accession to the throne. This house was Joseph's and Robert's property. On the trial the Judge and Jury's sentiinenls were at variaaco. Not only the counsel and attorney, but the Judge's opinion favour- The captain's and mate'?3 and seamen's exertioii-s. were the means underJ Pr<»videncc of the slii[)'s and cargo's be- ing saved. They are John as well as! INIaria's books. This measure gained tliej King as well as people'jl approbation. We should be subject lor| conscience sake. Alexander the Great, lii.'l history was written b'j Curtius. He was reading Kingj James's the lirst's hirj tory. Augustus's Senate durjl ttot deny him in aiivj thiiiL' he desired, kar srNTAJ:. !o5 This ieM was covered wiiii ass's skins. For Ilorodias's sake liis brother Pliilips's wife. 1 1 left 'iic work at Jones' Mio printer's and book- bindcr'^^ |l 'vas then at Lord Bel- vilii;'s, my friend, pa- tron and benefactor's. jThis palace was the (irand Vizir's Selim's. He took rcfngo at the Governor the Kimrs re- presentative. I^Vhose vvorks arc these ? Thoy are Cicero the most eloquent of men's. The world's government is not left to chance. ?lio married my son's wife's brother'3 son. Ilia !i my wife's bro- ther's partner's honse. Phis estate of the corpo- ration's is much incum- bered. It was necessary to havo both the physician's and (lie surgeon s ad- vice. The extent of the prero- gative of the Kinrr of l^iif^land is sutHcientJy ascertained. That picture of the Kinrr 'g docs not much reyem- bic him. Those pictures (,f (1,9 Kinnr were sen. ,0 him irom Italy. The time of WiHiam mak- ing the experiment at length uirived. Such will «^ver bethe had effect of youth ascr,:;:i.. ting with vicious com- pany. The bomb shell burst, and it bursting caj.ed the ship to take tire. They obeyed tl.'c Prv-^toc- tor's, as ihrv called liim, imperious rr.au- datcs. HULE xxvir. The Verb /o ie has a Nominative before and fmi ;/■"""'' '''^'", '^ '\^' ^ Possessive, and in the vernr*.^^ n,'- '"^ ''^''" ^ Verb or Preposition T" ^h% ^:>''.If^t.ve : "I am he ;" - it is his is me he )ok |ruck " I took it to be him •" (I T* II '. . T* I , ..U.J iii.n ne gave Uiis to. " It i I'm '4 !;l 156 SYNTAX. When to be is nndarstocl it follows ihe same rul-/ : ««, • He seems the leader of a parly,' supply ' ^o be iKe IcaJer, &c.' Murray has flssorled that the I'to cases which nre before and .'' f^PPort us ;'-' - Truth" cmobles her 7'' ff iiinii I lovo I serve • " " V otintccrs. irtue rewards her iiswallv In English (he Nomin..five ca.e, c7pnotinrj the R.bjecf. I > i?oe. beforo the V ori, ; a.,d iho Oi. jec.ive ca-e ,1. noting pjf ;;: . %Tu '" 5"'"' '■ '"• * A'^---''^^ c.on.,.ereuitv me noree ; • To dance tht N 15G SYNTAX. child.' These Veibs certainly nssume n Iranfi'ive form, and may not in tlicse cases be impropcily dep.uminaied Trnnsiiivo Verbs, Some wrifera, however. upe coriain Neu'er Verbs, •B case. if they were Transitive, putting after them the Objective agreeable to the French idicm ot Reciprocil Verbs, which is foreign (o the Engjiih and ouphi not to be adopted. The lol lowing aie some insioncea of this prartice : ' Jttpentin^; hiin of his design. riie popular Lords did not fail to enlnrne theniselvoB on the subject.' ' The nearer his ¥iicces»e8 ap- proached him to the throne.' ' Go flee thee nway into the land of Juciah.' • I th nk it by no means a nt and dtcrnt tti'nj; ;o tic charities.* ' Tliey have spent their whole lime and paina to agree the eactcd with Uie prel'anc Chronology.* Active Verbs are sometimes as improperly made Neuter : as, ' I must preinine with thrre cirrmiis'.ance?.* ' These that think to tngrutiate with him by caluinni-jtrofr me.' Too Pre- position should be omitted at:er premise and ingratiate. Some Verbs, as those of declarinfj, maliins', and naminrr, are often followed by two Obj,'ttive= in apposition : a?, ' Tiu-y desired me to call them brethien.' ' God called the flnna- ment heaven.' ' He seems to have made hivi lohut lie was,'. Some Passive Verbs, as those of tcactiing, asking, for bidding, denying, promising, &c. adinit an Objecuve ca«e after them : as, • I was taught mu-iic' • That q'i«;si on was asked me.' ' The presence of the King was forbidden her.' ' Ho was refused books at first, then he was pic. 'ted them, a length they were given him.' A part of a sentence as well ns a Noun or Pronoun majr be said to bo the Objective case to a Veil) : as, ' We ofton aee virtue in distress, but we should conaider how £;reat will be her reward at last.' The Auxiliary Verb let, governs the Objective case : a», ■ Let us judge cand.dly ;' ' Let them not presume' The Infinitive mood governs the Objective case though inel Verb is Passive : as, « Brutus is to kill him ;' ' Peter is gunej to release them.' EXERCISES ON RULE XXVIII. *■■! Their vices debase botli Yc who were dead hal!i| he and she. he quickened. Cesar ordered both he The man who he raise .„ J i.1 J - I.. I»*a^f kV Mv .Ji%*H4. sJiki k! U !^\J Ki i hi \ iS "i^- #1 r\ n /I I SYNTAX. 159 You have reason to dread his wrath which will one day destroy both thou and she. He who was so good to thee, thou hast killed. Ho and they we know* but who are you. He who committed the oironcc, thou shouldst correct, not I who atn innocent. He invitod his brother and I to see and examine lii;-i library. It is dutormincd that Pub- iius is to kill only she. Who can we so justly I ne, as tlicy who have endeuvoured to make us wise and happy. Tlioy who he had most injured, he had the greatest reason to love. Who Hove I will choose, and tiiou only have I chosen. Who did they entertain 80 freely } That is tho friend who you must receive cor- dially, and who you cannot too highly es- teem. Who should I meet but my old Criend. Whoever he meets, he accosts. Who shall we send thi- ther ? Whosoever the King fa- vours is safe. Ambitious men, always strive to aggrandize. I must premise with this circumstance. He will one day repent him of auch vile indul- gences. I shall endeavour to agree the parties. Being very weary he sat him down. RULE XXIX. Certain Neuter Verbs denoting motion and j-haiigc, admit of a Passive form, particularly come, go, becoino, grow, fall, and return : as "I ?'".';'""-' ] ^^^^ gone, I am fallen," Sec. but such ^,3'^ " Cease, sweryc, agree, amount, enter, wxc. ahouid not be used iu a Jpassive form. \ erbs A.. ,„... ino SYNTAX. The Neuter Verb is vnried like the Active, but havrng in BOm« degrees ilio n&iure of the Passive, il ailinits in many in- kiances of the Paf^siivc form, retaining etill the Neuter signifi- cation, chiefly in Jiuch Verbi as signify some sort of motion or chan;;o of condition. It would be improper therefore to say, * i have fallen,' ' He has become, kc' instead of • I am folJ- en,* • He was bt^ccme, &c.* Yel wo may say either, • I have returned,' or ' I am returned.' The following aro some examples, which are erroneous, In giving the Neuter Veib a Pafsive lorrii instead of an Act:ve one, ' The rule of ourlioly religion from wh ch we are infinite- ly siverced.' ' Tiie obli:iation of ihit covenant was als^o ceased.' ' Whose number was now amounted to three hun- dred.' ' T\\\3 Marehall f/Ja« iiitered in'o a conspiracy aga nst his master.' • At the end of tlie campaign, when liaK the men are deserted or killed.' Ii should be have Hwervcd ; had ceased. &c. EXERCISES ON RULE XX?X. If such pracliccs prevail, I have come according to what lias become of the time proposed ; but virtue. Tlie influence of his bad example was the ceased. ;u The mighty rivals are now at length a^jveed. I have fallen upon an| evil hour. He was entered into the connexion before tliei consequences were cot>j sidered. RULE XXX. One Verb governs another in the Infinitivej mood : as, " Cease to do evil ;" " We shotild be| prepared to render an account of our actions," The to of the Infinitive is omitted after the Verbs' durst, dare, know, let, make, have, hear, see. need, bid, feel, please, behold, perceive and ob- serve. The English Infinitive mood, is made by prefixing to, i«j a Veib. Some writers seem to think the to an Adverb, bulj Lowlb, Muiray, and oiherr, wiih more propriety, consideni SYNTAX. 161 as ft PrcnosWion. Though (he Infi janct (o sinie Finite Verb, yet it „.„, oilier parts of >^l)ceL•h oi by nn.jtlior lofi nitiea ia commpnly an aj- may bo governed by all the initive. By Sjbstaiitivn'i, Adj iCllV boy hud {jreat anxiety to learn fast ;' ' H 03 and Participlee : as, « Th IS I'rove. e was ea^er to iui- By a P.onoun : as, « I found her to be dece By Conj inclion^ when it foilowa lion eo inlr.cale as lo psipjex 1 itful. as and than : • A quea- 1 "1.* • They wished for nothin mwc than to know Um busmcbs.' By Prepo iiion?., Adverbs and Interjection about to wri(o •' > " > /orget her.' „ . , ^ • as, « T w ut Knows /iou) to write veiv well ;' • O as to By a Verb in the Infi niiive : as, « To cense to do evij. Among caily Eng'i-h writers, the Infi. ceded by /yj well a i ti \'ive was often pre- rnare, and often in tlio Bibl whicii is sornetimea found in Shak eru9alein/o;- ly woisliifi.' I '•, ^s ifi Acts xxiv. ' I went es- up lO though unnec thereat ol ilie ^en^cnce fii'll.' ' To i.ioeeed,' I 1-5 eoiueiimea in use even yer. -^saiy. Ti;elnfi iiiivc ia often used independent of To c oniesa lijo truth, I w as in m ay conross, To conclude,' &c. thai is « That [ Tiie r nlinitivc of I he Verb be is often und suppoecJ It necessary ati Pi-'V to be erstood : as, « I PI Ailer i)!c.;se, the to '•lioiild iieceasary. er.se give it lo me ■; give it 10 nic,' &c. Tlifj to of the Infinif Pi (ienerally be omiUed as. case excuse nie j' not « Please to t>ie Verbs, dursfj ' I VV09 tnade to jjo (I coui.e,)f vice.' It is the P,i nior.ei ve> is iisunlly put after the Pas's ives of evceplctl in tho uile, except let : aa He was let run hm ice in to givti li'm leie iinvviiiingly. soinetinies used after the Active vo -t Tense, especially of have : as, « 1 had give EXERCISES ON RULE XXX. You ought not walk too Ke did not wish obtrudo his company on us. hastily. I wish hitn not wrestle with his happiness. Wc ou^iit torsive our eaeuiics. N 2 I need not to solicit hiin to do a good action. I dare not to proceed so hastily. 16^ SYNTAX. I have seen some young persons to conduct tlicinsclvcs very dis- creetly. Did you not observe him to turn pale. She bade him to go away home. It ie better live on a Utile than outlive a great deal. It is the dinorence of their conduct, which makes us to approve the one. aud to re'oct the otiier. He made one to believe this iiction. Barest Ihon to leap into the tide, and to swim to yonder point. You beheld us to retreat from tile field. 1 heard him to tell it yes- terday-; I have known him to kill two foxes in one day. He felt a numbness to creep over the arm that was hurt. Do you perceive it to move. Please to forbid this has- ty marriage. Let me now to go home. II RULE XXXL In the use of words which in point of time re- late to each other, a due regard to that relation should be observed, and the proper tense used, Thus instead of saying, " I remember the fatniiy more llian twenty years ;" we should say, " I kavt remembered the family, £;c." It is not easy to give particular rules forlhe inanagemenl of ihe Moods and Tenses of Verbs wilbrospoct to one another, so that tliey may be proper and coiisistent. The be>it rule lliat can be given is tins very general one : * To obsejve what tbe eeuse necessarily requires. ' V. may however be of use lo give a few examples of irre- gular constiuction : • The blind man said i;:ito him Lord thai I might receive my fif^ht ;' ' If by any meana / might aitain unto the resuireclion of the dead ;' « may,' in both tiiese jilaces would have been belter. ' I feared that I should hava iwBi ii Lefoie I aiiiveii an the city ;• • bhouid lose it.' • 1 haa S.'NTAX 163 «"o.I.l be. . iff could /.«.• p :forn d ,"' 'Vi'"'"''' " '' " cause he should have known ,, "' "• ' «"b«li'uted for ,h. ^ lave me I with ih e epitaph of a chaiitabi w..» lenso improperly u^ed 8 man, which h an IGt CYN-^/X. much p!fn?cJ me ;' it o'lght lo be, • winch much plemeJ me ;' or ' (till much pleuso ma.' In rases whOre questions arf answered, ih*' Iinperfcci Tense elio'ilil gcMcraliy l>': ii-ed Jui'i tiol tlio PfC-eut : o», ' Jubiii uiiavvoreJ uitU eaui ;" not * auswira and suyi.'' KXERCISES ON IIULE XXXI. Be wiso ntid good lliat The wcjrk has been finisih you might be liu|)[>y. cdiust week. I had rather stay than In this C'athri>dral is prC' s(Mvcd for ujiwaids o (>')') yeairi, a dish, uiiii.h (hoy ^ay id made walk so far Be that ns it will, he can- not jusiily his coiidiict. I shoui I he obliged to him, il" lie will j^ialily me ill tiiat. Tlio nf\t new yoar.s day I shall be at suiiool three years. lie Iia.sh.'cn foriiieriy dis- orderly, but lliis yuar, as yet, he wuo very ro- ot euieiald. They niaitilaincd that S'l i|)iiire coiielusion, that all mankind riaCi Iroia one iiead. He ha.5 btv.'ii at Loiidoiul year, and .seen the Jvii)" last winter. Johii will (»arn his wouc; when hio service is couiDicaied. gular. And ho that was dead sat After wc visited LondcnJ up and begantos|>eak. ^,, returned lo ui.r| I have com[)a3sion on the quiet eottage. nuiltittide, he',:au.^ethey May it not be ex[)ecte(| tiiai. he would have de-J contujue witu inu now three days. I did not think that ho would have done this, but 1 anx tnistaken. Her sea sickno;?>! wn^? ^o great that I (^Itoii fear- The Doctor said that fe ed she would have died ver always produced iv^.r.,..^ ;..„! ii? . '' * fended an authority scj long exercised. I should have been weli pleased to see vou suc-j eessfui in that buoincssl SVNTA3C. 1€5 nULE XXXII. Veibs of I he Ii,( w riN',' and • (o ho. „.,j, initive mood in the followinij rortn : • To ffi. ;'•/'/'// wi/fi ii,e tiMiL' ol the u '" It ; bii, vvjieii Vedis of ih uhvays Oerio'o someihirij; conte tn- la I ai overmna Verb, or «i his cnnversi- eiffm. violence. Til and That uiiiiippy man is su]fj>ns'"tlecl ts rsecc ?ary, ply tins fiilp HI- have only to consdtr wiieiber ibe iLlTniiive ri fers to a (nne anlecede.it Pre^ I or F'i'di e vv rc";! goverriii);j 'Vo b, and lbs 'nr.ii v. :,;li iii;l nil I id t: >.vc slitiiiin 1 II. e w ill be easily nsc!;r!ained. li 1 \v ■b 10 sij.iri:y I hit ( rcj'iiiiiiij at a piriiciilar mm; in reiolk"'! x\n ibo *-i:,iit ol a (li^iul, ^OllKj time havin;; initrv( ned bciivcfjii ibe see ng .-.tid ilie rejoicing, Il hould oxtufi-c iii\sf!i thus: * I iij/iccd 10 have soon iiijj friend, the lej Tiie s-eeii.-i in thu c.i>o was ev demlv antecedent ■31 oie n;i un il liieieioie ibo V.^ib vvbuh expresses the foaiiei Diusl be in the Furlect of the Ii.iiniiive. 'Yh may be e.\pie->sed in a diir. satne mcaniiijl rent form. Been my Inei.d or :.l in h.tv i\2, sueii niv tr ent I rcj iict;d that I liad and tiie P' l-Tiety o! a doubtiul point ol liiis n:,tine nay be tried by con-j verting the pliraso iiiLa ila corrt-poi.deni ioiiM of e.vprLjsioa. Rill if I wish to c'ignify 'bat I rejoic'? .it the sight of tnjl friend, and thit my j.iv mid li s p esence were coiitenipDr.irj,r I s-hou'dsay, ' I icjoic d lo sm my friend ;' and the corrucme-il of the foriii of the luipeilect i:iay oi'u be tile. I by a cnrre-pcai dent (ornj of exjnesi on : as, ' 1 rtjiiecd in ctcii.j! my friend. As the Verbs ' to desire, an J 'to wish,' aie nearly rsl la'ed, it maybe snppo-ed ihit Ihe la'ier Veib Ihe the forri'? rnnst bi' followed by the Present of tbe Infin tive. Put if A Fi:t uio, rericci that the act of dciring rtfcis always to tfie tliat the act of wisfjng refer- sometimes to the Past, as wti| ad 10 th.> Fi'tujc, we wiil pcicciveihat the loliowing oiodtst SYNTAX. 167 expression are jnstifinhle : « I wish that T J,.,1 „ -.i •I .v.sLecl .0 have uTixen scene ^Ivishecl.irh"^""" '' soon.;' and .1,., ,,. 'oliowi„; p',i Vt i on ?' w'''^ sire to have Hritfen «nnn».r •> . i 1 ^ ■ i|'roper . 1 (je- er.' In regard .oL'., ' . ! '^«;«'^« ""'' 1 '-ad ^vri.len soon- beuer .0 give the e^pr;4o„T oas , e ,' ve fend h.rn w.se and virtuous ;• • To h',ve 'e/r,rr-l 1 l"n2or would hnve di nu^rfi ' i !."^''''rcd h,s lepemancQ <'!'.^ Ti . Oii^qodlih-d hmi lor repent n'» i.l nlj •' To assort !Mi ?i.>-,o utIcis- ,'.t i',.,i v .■ 1 t ,. • . innoJ hTv« ,nT,.,> ,. > ' ■ '"^ '" '"'•' '"•''"'iva J>..- ,„' P '' "•" ^^-""'^ '1 ■'i.x-tion^ of Pf"-.,, 1,1,, T> •' ^■'■'' "'C^c Vp.:bs ns.-ocinfe w,.!, V,., b^ in -.il |P...-in;, p., I:e ; '.veined Verb in iho Infin liveHl- Iv.iv J K'.pecu ih-,, r^ . ■ 7"'"^" "er-) n, UiO j„hn live h|. |rii:eaM hn 'iire nt iIk. ,, -w . ' ' ' '*•* >!..S-H,nli ,! ,v,|° , 1,,-" "- ^•■';' •■■'■™'<'ing « .l„ The Dtfoetive Verb rif/o/i^ 'r-rn, r„- Periort O! 1 h:; Inlini; 've f" ^'0 1',' or ' He ought to Lave do:;Q it.' may be ii-eiJ t'-l ,-r wii'i ihe ou-ht W " may s,,y, ' {,, EXERCISES OX RULE XXXH. HopccUo b,,,^ gp^„ ^^ Ilisrno.nie "••('iidbctornliisclenar- t'n-o, !,„t did not. '^f;>iiod (0 luivc written Juii) sooner. s wore disap- pointed, whilst Miev oxpcctcd to have fonml an oppoifiitMty to have betrayed liiai. 168 SVMAr. I always intended to have rewarded my son ac- cording to his merits. lie ordered me to have done tliis work bel'oro ho returned. We have done no more than was our duty to have done. It was a pleasnm to have rcccivcnl his ai)|)r()bati- on of my hibors. It wouhl havo nfTordcd still ;;re;!t('f ph^asuro to rceoivc hi- ;ij»|)r<>h;itiun at an oailier pciiixl, hilt to rrccivr. it at all r<'tlccts credit upon me, FroTTi \u^ tna^iiij; f^atin versos, lie ap[)rarod to study Virgil with groat attention. To he rensurod hy him v\ Mtiid soDii have prov- ed an insupniable dis- couragemciit. These prosecutions of William seem to be the tnoat ini(iuitoua mea- sures p\ir.sued by the court, during the time of Parliaments beinir suspended. It required so much caro tint 1 thought I should have lost it before l| reached home. He would Dot have bceni i'ormiffed to have ca- tered lliis iiiansion. I commanded him to havel written y(iU a week ago. If theno porsoiLs had in- tended to deceive', tlicvj wonli! have taken carel fo have avoided expos- ing themselves to (iio| ohjcction.s of their op- ponents. From the conversation I| had with him, he a| pearcd to have been a| man of Icltcr;i. Jl^ IIULE XXXIII. Participles like the Verbs iVom which they nrfj derived, govern the Objective case, and rre govcrnj ed l)y Proj.ositions ; as, " 1 atn weary iriik In am:! liim ;" •' She is instructing us ;" " The tutoriij admonishinjT Charles." Not only the Prpfrnt Putioiple of Active Verbs cove;:! tho Objec.ivo case, as in liie example in (lie lule, Lut the Perj STN'TAX. 169 frri Participre .Uo ; „. . Ho ha. wounded me and run off ;• Of Having woiinJed me ha ran off.' Preposiiioni also Rovv,rn ll.o Tresont P.irficiplc, at In ihtt example in the rule, anc! iliey arc often understood : a» • By jromisii.g much and performing little, wo bocomc U picLble :' I. e. ' by performing, &c.' . .,'^'^? ^"''ciple wiih a PreproBilion and uhcn accompanied by the Infinilivemood, may bo tonM fore.l as a Sub^lanlivo rhr-,.0 m the Ol.jeciivo ca8o : as. • iJe studied lo avoid giving offence, by expressing himself too scveiely.' The Parliciplft should be crcfnllv disljnauishfld from the ra.e Absolute. This ca%o h.s alwiye a Nominative an., rover gov rn'. the Objective case, ihoi.!?h it is 6nn,-.:me>» preceded by a I .eposiiion : as, • In the ^.i;, riain- t' • shndows fl-a away.' And as it is indoperiJc-it of the rest of the Fotcnco, it ni ghl be called : « Tlic NoaiJnativo case Ab.ioKito indept-iidcnl/ A sirange use of the Par.i-iple beinc;, hag fa'eiy been in- troduced by pomo New'pap. r writers : as. « The wo.mded soldiers are bem^ carricjcciive. V«t It Bcrms nrces>-.ry to be criK^iJcrcJ separatel); to^bnwl the proper jse of the PHrticM'lR ; .•■? Ucmo govirned bv Prej^j- •iuons ; us being dm'JntuiBhed trout tlie ca^-c Absolute", &c. EXERCISES ON RULE XXXIII. Estremi.ifr Ihciisrlvrs wise Ihcy became fuols. Knowin,'r Ik; to be my superior, I checrruiJy subiiiiltod, Fioin ha vinrr exposed his- eelt' too freely in hot cliiiiatcs he lost his health. Suspecting not only ye, but they also, I wasl studious to avoid all| intercourse. Tic seemed surprised &t| seeing we there. I could not avoid consi-l dering in some degrcef they as enemies, andl he as a suspicious friend. RULE XXXIV. ^ The Tmperfcct or Present Participle is somc-if times changed into a Substantive and has an articleBT before it, and of after it : as, " By (lu observing rfln this rule you will bo wise ;" " This was a bclrayir.'H^ ij/hi.s trust." "' This Rijie arieea from the nature and idiom of our lanouapl and from a? j hiin & principle as any on which i( is founded namfly that a v-rd which has tho nriirle brfore it and liie Po^ r..8bive Prepopitiou oj afer if, mui^t be a Noun; and if a Noa«,[ nought to fiii.ow tie consiniction of a Non... «nd not to havil tUQ rcfiimen of a Verb. li •« .ho Participial lermmaiion of i!i(| sort of wordu that is apt to deceive ns and make us treat iIkb asifihey were of an amphibious Fi)ec,es, partly Noiin3«i)l partly Verbs. Thn following are a fe»w ejcanip'es of the violstirn ofiM rule : ' Hcvrtiseat lo I>r i^ieachmff o/ttom •TNTAX. ni ance ;' it would not be p.n..^5. . ;:; .Nr;.^'./;T:.rY.;.^L'»v'"'^'". - woulH he r!j»hl aa. by uglit lo be, « The k K toe good.* '':;":!v;:^'=''^'^--'«p-cede C!p!e and Wio Pos>e-sive P, III' tli.T 1 ""•' <')Mvey 1 1.0 Si me 'oposiiioi, follou • fhe Pfeaenf p If'"-' W. lilt, III il iiiciininT *■ ''. Will not in arri- everjr pre-.-31'd lio pieasiifc lO rfrlicle iifid P[ as wouifi bo conveyed t 18 C(lpll>'f (),'■ ;i ,|;[f, I'-i bid Ti (h« h •urn 11" I ICtl. StilSI! do i"-i 111 III af!"!,' ilio pf 'II. oarin H fpotiiion H «,^ii for (he- ..alto „» liaimony o "iDSdpliCr. ,';,;;:: p:'"!!r .,,?;• jt^"- '5 femencc, h>l;c'n pliiced befuio ii, b jficems proper in [I [lervin..' of h^ ru!e Ii- if y rf ('uirin 'C'p'e into M V«'l i ■>(ii|i;:ir(' » 'l;e folio H of after it, Th, f^li di-penJs upon /^ a Sub''.aiiiiv# vvinfT I'lSiirieJ uifcr Itie Pa Jt-came wi-e and rjood B h cir cL- De Klip otior T r'";i')Ie. In t of JS 61 ud> l«l i»i.eni8 improper lai oil T K'ni'ili arrivfd. ifi tune of Wil, "9 spnfejieoo/ alho Sijcl '■"!i's making ,i,e (,, \f') •^ Ol.^orvinp ()/ ihe ru!e ' a sen I en ce as. « Much je'iiiciioii eoijiids raiher liaishiy f picceile, tlicP,.r,UMple, it woiildb^^'b I'inie.'il in a;. other forui i '"''y P'S9, though th would xpeririient ilnpenrls UD. " g^Tiern 1 wh ere, P le con- . ■ro8es»i\ei yro's obseivine of Ihe r nsieaj of fajii be "ig obsGrved ^an Ills or. sa ttter to express the ten- ' 'Much depends unuQ y ' AfJch depe Ible icip.'e IS folio ved by a Prop on oiiiserv in as. Not i-tlendiiiL' to his b poHiiion, 0/ seems nJg on 5b« S if.' When th« Some Verba (hai have of (which uEineda ru.ned him not admiaaa. hppear not lo bo sul tie.ir 11 f, J"ct to this makes part of the Verb) rule : a? P^r!i..i,;,-e t,/.' WJiere th "fi'-'n:'-,' of die K !.«•*, deaih,'& '\useJ, liio article must not h e Pa ClSHpprovo of lie tiioii ey promised, &c. e placed btfo la d niciple of fe as. Such In '3appoinnng biui c/ EXERCISES ON RULE XXXIV. V Pxe»-cisin>: of our rea- Tlir. «^# r n 172 SYNTAX. A man cannot be wiss and good Without tlieac|uir- ing knowledge. The changing times and seasons, the removing and setting up Kings belong to Providence alone. This was in fact a con-- verting the de[)osit to his own use. She was unhappy from the marrying ot" a man of bad principles. Poverty turns our attenti- on too much upon sup- plying of our wants ; and riches upon enjoy- ing ofour supcrlluitics. By the being scrupulous in keeping ofyour word yo'i will gain a good name. Pliny speaking of Cato the Censor's disap- proving the Grecian orators, expressed him- self thus. The not attending to this rule led him into error. It was from our misunder- standing the directions t>at we lost our way. By his reading of books written by the best authors, he was greutly improved. RULE XXXV. The Perfect Tense should not be used for the Past or Perfect Participle, nor the Past Participle for the Perfect Tense : as, " He has xurote me ;'J for " He has rn-iilen me.^' " 1 begun the speech ;'' for •• I began the speech." As the Petfecl Partic pie and (he Imperfect Tense are often of different forms, care mwai bo taken that they be not indiscri-l minately used ; -t is fieqnenilv said, • I was chose,' for * I wfj Chosen ;' • I have cat.' for ' I have eaten ;' • His worc» wef«| Interwove with Pigln,' • were interwoven ;' • ite would harfl •poke,' ' spoken ;' ' He hath bore ^vilne^8,' • borne ;' ' Tbij sun hi9 rose,' • risen ;' ' H.a consiiUuion has been gtestijj shook,' ' Bhaken.' It is frequently said, ' He begun,' for ' he began ;' ' Hil run,' for ♦ he ran ;' ' He drunk,' lor, • he drank ;' ' He overj runhis gnide,* lor • overran Ins guide ;' the Parlicipio tam used instead of the Imperfect Tease. • VNTAX. 173 Tlicre are Home Imperfect 'f-n^r^ iIm» nr« ,vf,* l . ,.if,.,,i,o iv,,-,:c, r.,;„.p.. ..0.,;,,!'.',?:,, 'fin*; • t of Vcri-:s u,!„ a *. M...y o( iho I.n, .- ,,ect Tenses • a, • *«V? 6r./.., .;.,ycc. &.-.' »-v.l,een used l.y our L^"";,erH^f7K'' !• 1. c.,.!,.r,, a, rar.i.pl,-. ; ,„rt f-cm their eiamp'e t e ,. r....y ^( thi. rule i-^...'.VJn..u.e3n.iobrb"Z;u eJ;^bt such wurue tbouia iiji be ho employed. <»pinion that EXERCISES ON RULE XXXV. Tliey wished to have wrote him on the sub- ject. They have chose the path of virtue. If t'io^G events had not Itl! out so, 1 would have comp. He returned the watch that he had stole. His vicrs have broke his iicalth. ITo !iad mistook his trufi inlcrnsf.s, and found himself forsook by his friends. f The broad tint has been ate, is soon forgot. IIi> fjarm.out Iiad no seam and was wove through- out. He had not yot wore ofT hi-i rough manners. [I was showed St. Peter 3 Church. 1 wish I had never knew him. lie has bore a part of all your futirrue. They have underv>'ent great drstress. Tlie French language ia spoke in all Kuro];e. Your land has roje ia value. The Thames was twice iVoze this winter. This Lord was trod to death in the gate. Thir3 business was not well execute. Vou have took improper li'jertiea. He was heated and drunk witli avidity. A second deluge learning thus o'er run, And the ]Mo!ik? finished what the Goths begun. Q a 171 SYNTAX. Industry is wanting to make you rich. He has swore solemnly ho will bo revenged. Ho said ho would do it, nnd so he done it. I seen him in lown yes- terday. Ho talkt and stampt with great vehemence. RULE XXXVI. Adverbs require a proper situation in a sentence I the I'assive l*ar- au( viz : Mostly b'.lure Adjeetives tioiplc : but after Active and Neuter V^ubs, atK ad well a.s bn« lVeve remaikably been lalilllcd ,' • w • DisHO. laiioiis on ili< inch have bocn rcmuikably.' The Adverb .ihould ijencraliy bo placed before the Pascivt P.ut'ciile, liioujjli !»on)P'nnc belwcesi its Auxiliaries,, an in i|i«j following example!*, 1 wa!> kindly received,' not ' received Ho bd8 always bciiuveil with propriety,' not be- kiiKily. baveii alwoys. The place of the Adverb, between the Auxiliaries, Been)! not essdy deieimined, • llo hns ;i,'cn de^neeH upon „» ;' • Tbo women u.>/,4nran7v codWibuied all ilieir ringi and j.; wo la to asBisl Government.* Tlie Adverb /A^re U oficn used «■ an expletive or at a word ihit aid* notiiMni lo tl.e Mn»e ; in whicli caso il precedea the Ved. nnd ll.e Nominative Noun : h^ • There is a peraon at tl.o door ;' • Tlirre are nonie li.iivoi m the l,ou«e ;' which would be a>. well or beiior c.xpit^sed by sbjimk. * A peraon ia ;.i the door ;' • isomo diifves iur in the lioiisi.' fcjjniei.ine* it u ni..d.! UHO of lo nivo a Hinall d<--rco of emphasis lo ihc ,en- "'"'""." "V,/' '^'^"' ^'""*" """ "'"'"^ ^'""' ^'^'^ *vliof.ei.«me waa Joliii.' Wlion II IS applied in its wirict noiise, it pt'iicnaily h;llo«9 tho Vcib a.%^Xa^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // r/ ^ fe 1.0 If^i- IM I.I 2.2 I. lu 1: 1^ 12.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 ^ 6" — !► 5>^ "^ *^f ^^ w x5. ^^ Photographic Sciences Corporation A^ S ,v ^4^-^ \ \ ^. % V ^^ l\, ' \ ?l? 33 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY 14530 (716) 872-4503 %s 'W \ 178^ •r.XTAZ. EXK'^CISES ON RULE XXXVIIL I cannot do no n.^:e work to day. I see you will never be no wiser. Love neither riches nor honors nor no such perishing things. Be honest nor take no shape nor semblance of disguise. Afterthisnotice, no claim will be admitted under no circumstances. I am resolved not to com- ply with the proposal neither at present nor at any other time. There cannot be notjilng more insignificant than vanity. He shall get nothing no more than the rest. JVor b?t no comforter r.t- teuipt to allay my grief. Nothing never aflTectcd her so much as this misconduct of her child. Do not interrupt me your- selve, nor let no one disturb my retirement. We cannot by no means ponnit this measure to be done. Though my big dog looks fierce, vet he never bites nobody. Neither throatcnings nor no promise could inako him violate t4ie truth. Precept nor discipline is not so forcible as ex- ample. I have received no infor- mation on the subject neither from him nor from his friend. They could not persuade him, though they were never so eloquent. RULE XXXIX. When motion lO or t'rom a place is implied, Iho Adverbs /ji//jtr, thither, and ivhilhcr s\\on\(\ be used, and not here, there, and where : as, " Whither are vougoing;" not, " wiierc are you f^oing." "Come hither quickly ;" not " come here quicklv." When moiion to a place is not implied, Iiere, there, anif Wti«re cbould bs euiplo\eki how^veri and Qot UiiLer, iLitLor« STXTiT. 179 •nd whither. Surh ^xprepxionn -a. . wi -.i. c EXERCISES ON RULE XXXIX. The General is expected Briny , She appeared on thi. occasion exceedng lovelv.' 1<»U Gr.mmari.n* bowoTer di.pme tb* propn.tr of tbj, ,.*!:\ ISO 8TNTAX. for tho'igh it may oflen answer, in »omo instances it makM bad grammar : a* m ' She appeared exceeding lovely ;' winch ■ hnuid bo, • exceed ngiy lovuly ;* for lovely is an Adjective, and should be qualified by ihe Adterb exceedingly. Thia sen- tence i« an bid then, as to say : ' Extreme lovely,' for • ex- tremely lovely.' Two words succeeding each other ending in /y, are mdeed disagreeable in sound, but it would be better to oflfand ihe ear, ihan wrile bad grammar, or rcaiher avoid exceedingly altogether, and write eery or some other wt.d in itii place. Adverbs are likewise improperly used as Adjectives : as, • The Tutor addressed him rather warmly, but in terms suitably to hi^ otTenre ;' • suitable.' ' They wcie seen wandering a- boui solitarily i.nd distressed ;' « solitary.' ' He lived in a manner agreeably to the dictates of reason and re'igioo ;' • a- greoable.' ' The study of Syntax should be previously to that ol pimrtua'ion ;' ' previous.* In many cases it is not esiy for yoiin|» persons to decide wheifter an A')j'jciive or nn Adverb should be u«ed. To de- lermne tliis, they ought to consider whether qua/i^y or man- HPT ts implied. An Adjective is propei in the former case, but an AHverb in the latter : the following examples will illustrate this ; thus, in the phrases, * He is sincere," quality is implied ; but* He acta sincerely,' manner is denoted. In « She always aj-ppars ne.^t,' quality is intended ; but, 'She always dresses neaily,' manner is inipiiod. Adverbs may also be known from Adjectives, by their qualifying Verbs Adjectives and other Adverbs ; whereas AJ- jeclivei qualify Nouns and Pronouns only. Examples of Jdverbs qualifijing Verbs. The boys write well. They march quickly. John will soon learn. Matthew reads finely. Maria sings sweely. I walk fast. Eliza is more amiable. James is often sad. •■> .Adverbs qualifijing Adjectives. You ore quite bu«y. Jane is most amiable. He is very grave. Peter is truly honeef. Adverbs qualifying other Adverbs. This boy learns very well. John comes less seldom. I will como much oft ener. He reads loo fast. Walter gives us money John acts most nobly. very freely. Adverbs are sometimes used with Nouns and Pronouni : • Tbii is the very man / • It was I truly who did it.' SYNTAX. ]g] „,.n„^''7 °^ T \^'^ ^"'"' '''" A.Ijnctive» for Adverb, in * m.nner ,ha. offend, tho R,.lcs of Grammar, a«inM.l.o„. Thus tl.c godhke ange. «,.«w.:reci m,7d ;' /or • mildly.' AnJ in Thomson ' Gradual swks Ihe Itt^vzo , mo » pas^/ci cn\m^ fiTu/a^'r r "• • '^''^^ '"^>- •''"'^'^ '^^''^^'^' .ho'.cence of 'a h^uro of Grnmrna,, lor such usages, but it would have ,„l1 "'''? ;>■""")'"«"» will, elegant writing, ,f (hey had not taken such iibertiei wi'h lauHuaoe. Ailverha hove also been usod by Poels and othf.Ts as 55ub- slantivea : as, • An oi.rnal „„u, does always last ;'-Cow/ey. In 1C3, heformc.Jil inlo a community of rpgulars, e.r.ca tchen It has has inciea-pd ;' i. e. ' sincR ui/iic/; time.' . A liUle i/^/,,/f and 1 eh.i! not Fee you ;' i. e 'a short lime.' ' It IS wor.h iheir while ;' ' II deserves iheir lime and pain' ' To do a thing « ant/ how/ or • some how ;' i. c. « in anv ' or ' fiomu uiaitncr.' ' EXERCISLS ON RULE XL. SliP renrls proper, writes very neat and composes accurate. He was extreme prodigal and liis property is now near exhausted. Tliey lived conformable to the rules cf prudence. He had many virtiirs, and was exocediiifr beloved. He speaks very fluent, reads excellent, but does not think very co- herent. He was exceeding care, ful not to give ofience The conspiracy was the more easier discovered from its being known to many. He is like io be a very useful member of tho community. None could fight bolder, or behave nobler, than this young soldier did. He could affirm no stronger than he did. Few could speak nobler on the subject than ho did. Use a little wine for thino often infirmities. Conformably to their vehemence of thought, was their vehemence of gesture. We should infuse into the minds of youth such precepts of virtue as are likely to take soon- est and deeoest root. 162 SYNTAX. We may now hope for a SVe may credit him for soon and prosperous he says express, that end to the war. he saw the transaction. RULE XLI. Prepositions govern the Objective case : as, " I have heard a good character o/Zjcr." " Much shall be required of them, to xcliom much is given." The following are examples o'" the Nomi:iativo case being used insiead of the Oljtctivo : • Who iserve.l thou under V * Who do you speak lo '' « We are still nii'cb (it .1 loss who oivil power belongs to.' • Who does thot ask for ?' • I'il give tlia money to whosoever you plea^o.' In ail iheoc places it ought to be whom. The Preposition is often separated from Ih^ Relative ^vKich it governs : as, • Wliom will jou ?'ve it lo V instead of ' To whom will you give it r' • He is an author whom I am much delighted with ;' ' with whom I orn, &c.' ' The world is too poiile lo shock authors wiih a Iruh, which generally their bookstllcra are iho first that inform them of ;' ' of which generally, &c.' This is an idiom to which our langiiago is strongly inclined ; it prevaiN in comfitou conversation, uiij suits very well with tlic familiar styio in wril.ng ; but the placing of the Preposition afier the Relaiive, is more graceful as well as more perspicuous, and agrees muci» beiicr wiih the solemn and elevated style. Some writers separate the Preposition from it3 Noun, amo sentence : aii * Th» ,>,m^u^4. t. . L' „ u vii.»;iiic . mw, I ne combat bttwfen. tKirt. between thirty (rench. and twenty English ' Thu P,.n« * ot. 6c/«...„ govern„.g both .V.un. in .he Sbjec.Jve cf.e.'^"''"- EXERCISES ON RULE XLI. I hope il is not I he is I ^y,\\ walk with ye to the aispleased at. Pa^k ^ We are all accountable ^ shot beyond John but creatures, each for his- Tom shot beyond me solt. and he also. They willinnly and of ^^ ''o is he so warmly con- thcirsolves, ofiered to cerned for.? make u,, the dUrerencc. Does that boy know who lie laid the suspicion up- ^*^ speaks to .' on some body, 1 know It was not he that they not who in the com- were so angry with. pany. To poor we, there is not much hope remainirfr. Is it after he, or who else you come ? Is it under Peter, or who that you now serve .' What concord cari sub- sist between those who commit crime, and they who abhor them. Who did he receive that intelligence from } lie is always angry with whosoever asks him for money. They were refused en- trance into, and forcibly „..u tlriven from the house. 1, but not between she I wrote to and warned the ^- general of his dangef. It is not through James, but thou, I am to re- ceive this benefit? There is an equality of riches between him and RULE XLII. Particular Prepositions must follow certain words or phrases, and otiiers cannot with propriety he subsfitiifPfi r«r *i, „_ :_ iu- /• ,. . y'^yy^^j 181 SYrCTAX. TABLE. Abhorencc, of. Accused by, of. Accpiifted from, of Acted with, through. Adorned with. Adapted to, for. Aversion to. Agreeable to. Agree to, with. Approve of. Averse to. Aspire at. Astonished at. Bestow upon. BrajTgcd about, of. Bridge over. Brousrlit into. Boost of Built of, with. Call on. Changed into, for. Communicated with. Compare with, to. Compliance Comply Confide in. Conformable to, with. Conform i Conformity ' Connived at. Consonant to. Conversant with, in. *Convic cd of. Descended into, from. Depend upon. Derogation to, from. Died for, by, of Dilfer from, with, or ) ftbout. \ with. to. Different from. Didiculty in. Diminution to. DiHnp[)ointed in, of. Discourajjcment lo. JJisparagemcnt to. J)iaposcd to. Dissent from. Distiiiijui^shcd for. Divide among, between Dominion over. Kager of, for, Kncouragemeut for. I'^njinncd in. Kvception to, from, at. Kxclaim against. Kxpert al , in. Kxtractod from, out of Fall by, under. Famous for. Formed into. Fell into, under. Fined in, by. Freed from, of. Glad of, at. Get > over, above, Gone ) beyond. Impregnated with. Independent of Informed of, about. Insist on, upon. Leave ofl*. Long after, since. JNIade of Martyr for. Marry to. Meddle with. Meet at, in. Much of. STNTAJr. 185 Navigable for jVced of. Observer of Ordained by. Overrun with, by. Prejudice against. Prcauine on Profit by. Prevail upon, over. Provided with. R<^gaid for, to. Reconcile to. Jiegnlalcd by. Kcjoicc at. lieplete with. Repine at, Resemblance to. Reserve for. Resolve on. Sell at, for. Swerve from. Shoot at, beyond, be- sides. Taste of, for. Treatise on, upon. Thought of True to. Vary from. ^^ait upon. Worthy of. Several of thc.e wo. J. may be followed by other Preposi- oti , to fall ,n, (o comply w„|, ; to fall out. (o happen by to:S.;:.1;;;^'^-'''''^' - bo«. e.,eH. ; to fS? upo'^ e.lanv'rn'VT"""'' '"""'! ?"^''"'°'"= "^ ' I*" ^ have boast- e. ^n U n^. App.ove and .iisapprove are of.en used wiihout 01. tion to tyrannize ;' • di-rosed cd-^es nmdfTi.uIt to .ny lo u l.ch ot lv^o■prepo3ition8 the I'.'ekre.c. ,.. lo be .nvc.n, a. b-^ih are vi-< tiiknn with oiralagRni nti/i killed bj a auoid ;' and llioir il iToieiu'o will Ijo very obvioiia, '\^■illl reflpoct to crrorp* in tlio tppDca'lon of the Prepositi- on of: * Ho in resolved ot ^o ng to ilie Porsinn (\)url ;' • on |;nin(;, &c. ' • Ho wis totally (UpLMiiient of llu Pupal ciowii;' • on the pnpal, &c.' ' Ho was eager of recoir.riu'iuliiif> ii lo oIktm ;' ' in rccointnendn'jj, &c.* ' l( mi(;lit hnvepiven mir O nro.iier l,i!«;e of iIh anti(|iiitied.' A tun^c of a lliing imples in:t iinl et'j lyineni of it , Imii a fastte /or it , imiilicB only a CHp.i- ci'y lor eni'iyiiion' : • Tliif 1.;h1 n gte.iier ►hare of incilinj{ liitn than nny nijurd after IiIh fiiliicrj coiinuandi ;' ' diaio in iiic- liijg/ uiid ' legnrd to iiia fathor'ii, &c.' With respect to crrora in applying to and for : ' You have bestowed jour f:ivcrs lo the most (foseivii)}; persons j' • tijuin iliu most deserving, &e.* ' He accused llie midi^teis fbr beiraymjjihe Dutch ;' * o/" hiving betrayed.' * }Iib uhliof- rence to iliai ;upcrsti ions limine ;' ' of that, &c.' ' A gn.iit cliiiiiiif.' It) the I eluir •,* * for the belter ' ' Your prejiduc to inv c•.«'l^o ;' ' it'^aiiist my cnice.' ' Thn Enj»!i«h were vcy (i tl'jreiit peop'K then to whjt !hey ;rro nt present ;' • from wli.it, &e.' • III cotnplnnce to the deelaranon ;' ' with ill) dcelar.itiun.* * It i« more than they ihoughi for ;' • thought of.* • Tl.oui is no need for it ;' ♦ ol it.' ' No dipcourajre- ine.'it lor iho aiithorj 'o \>roerMd ;' ' to the au'.linra, &e.' • It •was pcrfceiiv in coiiipl iinco to t>ome peivons ;' ' with ^< iiic, ftc' ' The w:!e:*t piiiiees neeil not think ii any dunin'Mioti lo tlie'r fl;reii 100-3, or (lom^aiion to iheir eufliciency 'o rely i ju.mi couns-ol ;' ' (limiiiuiion <>/,' and ' deiog;ii:on from/ \Vilh n-pecl to Uie erroiuoii'' 'iv-e ol with «i il ujion oi m : • Ilreiciesiin^' hiiucll wiih ihe Kim:.' 'Those thmjiswli. Ii liavi> the pieili.it rc-t.nil)laiice with each oihor ficqutnily <''ii- lor the most.* ' Tlial fui h iejee!i(>u should be confonanl vviiii our cfnunon natuto ' * 'I'liO Ji s cry of Pcler is ngrecable wi h the sacied tox's.' In all iln; iii;ove irisUnces it should i;o, 'to,' instead of • trilh.^ ' It is a imp, that peiliaps I clio^ld not h%ve il.nii^'.'.t on ;' • th( dj'Jii of.' ' A p e..ler cjuantny nifiy le taken Irom ilu- heap win, out mak ng any sen? ble al'CfM ion upon il ;' * in it.' • Intrusted to poreons on «hon) 'he P.irli- nteiil could cuniido ;' ' in whom.' ' He waumade much on at Aigca ;' ' mueli o/.' 'if j'Ol cy can prevail upon loice,' ' over lotee.' ' I do likcwae dissent with tlio txam i er ;" • from tl;e e.\aiii:ncr.' With respect to the erroneous use of in, frcm, ly, inl<), iijiii'- * iic; aiiu'uiii Lie iuiuiiiictj lu buiue puris ui iis ti.ui^i.- SYNTAX. 187 hy c ; aboHl, m ' concerning.' • Upon fuch ocea*iont •■ Icll I..10 ihrir cotfn.7.!,nc« ;* • under/ • Th.t variety of f.cil. on(. ,„to «.,(•!. wo arc ttill eng.,Kr,J ;' • ,„ which ' • To r«r torn tny.Hf .nlo tl.„ f,.vor ;• • lo U.e favor ' • Could be have piodicd (lotn ,.,,,oaio I .'.v,,er cnce. ;' • /„/ rfpealcd.' • A Mrici ol)iervcr Hftor Immo. ami 'a^l.io,., ;• • „/,,„.,•..• • The charac tor which wo mny n-w vnluo oiir.olvPH hy drawinK ;' • upon tlf.win« • ' Nonher of ti.ein shall inako me awerva out ol ibe path ;' ' Jiom ihe pjih.' Tho }'ropo(.iliori nin.uir,, implioa a numher of thinga. It cannot p,„,„.,ly |,e uaml m conjinclion wi,h (ho word evrry, Ml.ich I* 11, tl,o «,i.irul,.r nmn'HT : as, • The opiii.on aeeina lo gam gioiind luhoii;^ ( vciy body.' Tho Pa>po>iiio,n ?u or un^o and til/ or until are oflen ronromi.I.Ml ■„ moaning. To ih ,i-cd wiih rt-pcc! lo boundaries till wuh tHspcct 10 tune or d^a'reo ol iatODHiy : • They aailed 10 Ihe SOh (li;rrce of lal,t,.,le ;' • Ho s„l, jnud ihn cafomd (o Iho 7ih de<;,ee.' 8()ih d.-rec, nod 7ih d.g.cn arc here boun- diricd. Kill III this arnunci', ' lie uallu-ilm iho >.i.ovv till hia Icet were frozpn ;' til m.irks tho drf^r.c of in(oii»ity. • He rcMi,.,l ihc hoa*et<) Clirisimas ;' is ihcrolore wrong, it khould be, * till Cliii.Hiiiin.'*.' Ovrr iriofipi) upod improperly for n'xivc : ap, ' Ilia rent is over £:}()!) a jcar ;' lor • above JiS'O.' Af corioin wordi nnr] piirases require pnrtirular Preposjii- r'Hs afer llifin ; so rcrlaiii won]:', and phrasea icqiiire pariifulnr Pitposiiioiid bclotc ihcri), aad sunie both bcloie and after them Od ill tllisl A' ilio lii'ijiiiirniT. At Ih.; end. Al Ve: dcaiii of. A! llti; disliuU'O of. A; fu^t, Or laft. At I he e,\priice of. Al pi ivi 'e .~.<1p. At pibhtj auction. At each rnd or sde of. Ky means of. hy a kind or sort of. TAHLE. D' ring j)Icnf=urc. For love of. In addition to. In arms ng..inst . In tonforiiiMy to In coiis((j'jenco of. In coiiimtiiiornt:op. of In conbidcraijon of. In coiirert with. In durcFS. In I be hands of. In Ironl of. In regard of. In place of. Under iienulty of. In ilie rear of. Of the og" of. Of the dize of. Oil account of. On condiiion of. On each side. On Iho part of. Out of respect to. I'reio iiions feeui ^oniclimcs (o be need >;tiporflijou8ly as in Ihefo fenienrts : ' The emulation who shonid serve ihor couiiM^ ucai no ioig3[ euijiitis among Uuxn, but oj who Bhould 188 SYNTAX, obtain ihe moil iurrtlive conimtnd ' * It i« situation chiefly which drciJe» oMli« forliine* and rfmracfcrii oi men.' Of m these lenlenceg wo'ild be better omitted. F'lr seems buperfluous in the phrase, ' More than he though) for.* From §eem« rodnridant afier forbear, henrc, ihenre and nCfl ' •■. * I-Ih fluid iinl fnrlifir frn-n itT\,\rtmin rt tha Un_- > rrom seem* ron'mosni aner lornear, tienrc, Ihenre and whence : a^i * Ho could not forl)ear from opposing the Popo.' • An ancieni auihor fuophosie'* horn hence ;' * Kroin ilience we may dale ill? ili)\vpil;ill ;' ' From whence conto \oii.' These moles of phra-col();/v ihouoh improiier, ticcm however, so irmly foo.cd in tlie Euali-h Languaj^o ihai ihe omission of ihe Vupjsiuomi would render lii ■ phruhCs loo ei iff and formal. IT. fi Prep EXERCISES ON RTLE XLH. lie wTis totally depondeiit You socni to have no rc- of tlie prince's I'uvor. gaid alter )oiir luinily. Me was accused of Cesar I liavc no need for it now before the Senate. \\ c IS now enga;ied with 3Iy abliorrciioc to this wi iting a history Vice was jircat. lie did not dillcr with us ill opinion. I was a dillercnt man tlicn to what I am now. I have complied to vour desire. j^is is no (liscourngc- inent lur those inen. It was done consonant with yon- instructions and in conformity with your design. You do not prolit from all these lessons. lie is very export of the swoid exercise. I sh.'ill not iiisi'>t more for your compliance. Ho has a taste of painting and poetry. We can confide on no person in this place. This instrument is well adapted ibr that j)ur- pose. You seem eager of com- He was acquitted of all manding yourselt. i^ij^.^^. He was eager to the They now find a diflicul- ri.>i>» ♦ .. „r.,ll ;., _ .1 : . SYNTAX. 189 no I am conversant with bo- You brag greatly in you tfliiy wealth. You are an observer after He seems averse from charms and spells. using these means. Tills is no exception from ^Vc used to meet of an tile general rule. evening at the hotel Those doctors differ a- niong one another. IIuw long is it now after ho died. This was done not Jong since that time. He is easily seen through cC those who are inqui- sitive. What do you sell this for pe. yard. Your honor now lies in stake. IIo began his history with Cyrus. You are in no danger by me. He went to the name of the idler. lie is descended of the Royal Family. lie acted thus entirely for revenge. This Doctor cured all diseases that fell into his inspection. This form? one cxcoption to the f'orjncr preposi- tion. You may call of Charles to help you. Ho said he would wait of me to the Theatre. I liopn you will take no exception from my free- dom. Thoy were martyrs to tho cause of liberty. They formed themselves »n a Phalanx. Sho was preserved a- gainst such tempta- tions. The change in his disease is to tlie worse. Proteus could change for what shape he pleased, Tl'.e antlion was changed to a fly. " Do yon find great difficul- ty of doing this. He boasts much about his A treatise of Grammar noble friends. and Loiric. 190 SYNTAX. I have shot by the mark. Catalinc is fnmous by his I was provided o'' a pro- conspiracy. per answer to this (lues- They were quite astonish- lioii. cd with thia news. lie built a bridge on thia In bravery ho may be broad river. compared with Cesar. He deliberates of going. Von soein glad of my We are now freed of the calamities. evil.s that liinig on us. i .„„ ^.jad at your coni- 1 his sum was divided be- p:i:iy. • twcen these tlireo men. 'fhis is a principle in uni- Tho property was divided s^*'" <^ <>'"' Mature. among James and Ho (•ould not prevail with ■»• cter, iiiii, ((, altLM" his mind. He was convicted in pM- j ,^^,,1,^(0 so.notiung btt- J"'T- tor than that. They coruuved with his jj;^ senlim.nts are ad- trenchery. France had tlicn domini- on on Spain. This town is governed with a mayor. This country i:. indepen- dent on Ciiina. J now dosccnded to the cellar. This Palace is built with marble. verso Willi his actions. 1 ho[)e you will not vary with your word. This field is overrun by thi.stlc-s. He repti'-ed much in my success. I'lial country is now an- nexed with France. They exclaimed violently _,, . at these conditions. Ihero IS no encourage^ ment to industry here. lie was distinguished hy bis bravery. You do not wish to in- Their mean conduct re- ^''"Se with your ruls. < 1.1 '. _ T 1 ■ 1 • uUCCU iiiCrii uUilU Uii- 1 iiavc no jTCjUCiiCC iu dei*.potice. your Religion. She is adorned in every grace. SYNTAX. be 191 Homo reduced Carthago Alas ! Poor Celia died to her yoke. oflovo ofAlonzo. llcdiicc this vulirnr frac- JIc died for crief. tiou info a decimal. r,., • , , . ' 1 Ins man died by a fever. He will not bestow his lip ,iip,i ,.< ,1 ■ ♦ 1 bounty to another. '' I tutl''''' ''''''''' '''' I u-.ll not comply to this J must dissent with you ^^—■^^^^^- in that idea ^ It was no dispanigcmcnt Nothing could be better or them to bo only nd:.|,lcd for this nur- larM)';rs. pose. To hear the complaints This River is only navi- ofthc Poor, is- no do- gablo to boats. ro^atitju to their hitrli V,>.. ,v,,.i, ,,"; «=" Von make no exception iioin tins proposal. Thv. Noun is governed of The Jlcvenuc ofihis state the \'crb. IS Over one milli«>ii. ni LE XLIII. The Proposition In is elegantly omitted after showing, getting, buying, selling, erl)?- 01 ffivni", I»aving, trniiig, leaching, bringing, driiyinT, lend- ing, writing, sending, and looking like : 'tis " [ gave hiMi a book ;" " Ho taught me Grammar ;" •' He looks like his father ;" i. o. " rravc to iiim' " " taught /omc," " he looks like/o," kc. The to is in^erled hownver, when two Prnno(in« or a Noun and Pronoun come uiier Iho Veib : as, • Give U to r?,e •' 'Send a pen to him.' ' EXERCISES ON RULE XLIII. Ve gave to me no meat. Fetch to me the inkstand. Let him give to me what Hand to me that book. to" IS mine. Tell to me the truth. TTo (lid I(>n(1 ii\ n\a (^,rn. pounds. I I 192 SYNTAX. They have sent to me the present. Sell to me your horse. Bring to me a light. Get to him a book. I taught to thcc to write. Write to hira on this sub- ject. Give to the horse his oala. Lend to me your sword. Buy to him a copy book. Pay to me what you owe. Teach to them to read. Shew to me the Church. lie looks not like to An- drew his brother. RULi: XLIV. The Prepositions to, at and in arc employed be- fore Nouns of place, thus : 7o follows Verbs of motion, (except arrive,) aS) *' I went to France ;" " He sailed to Lisbon." ./?/ is set after the Verb to 6e : as, "I was at London ;" (except when lo he is combined with a Verb of motion : as, '= I am jjoing to Spam.") Jil is also sot before villaces, towns, and large distani citirs : as, '• He resided at Richmond, at Ports- mouth, and i? now at Paris " .7; is p.ut after arrive and touch : as, " They arrived at LondoUj touch- ing at Plymouth." In is set before countries and large cities : us. " He lived in London, but he now lives in Russia." From 'ho abTve rn'e, it follows that we may sav : ' He WIS l)orn or lives at Piri-, or in P .ris ;' bul we cannot will proprieiv say, ' Ho was bnrn or lives at LonJvTn, but in Lon- don.' Hn' V. lien a ppr on issiid to have died, at sliould {renor- al'y be u-cd : ac, ' Jle died at London ; at Paris ; at Piiila- deipliia, &c.' In usiii? nimt"^ nf Island.', it ia sometimes not easy (o dc- terniwie wlinilier at or in i? proper ; in g>'ner3l however, if the Island IP iirpt; in si, .n'd 1)3 us^d ; bul at it small : a?, * Wt Hrrived firsl in Sicdv, and eoon after set sail and arrived ot Malta.' Wiih res[iect to mmes of sfree's. square.", &o. m shonM generally be u'ed, fxr«-pt a mimber is mentioufd. when we Ghould U96 al : as, ' 1 iive in ijuefln uireetat No. ;>.' ST.VTAX. 193 EXERCISES ON RULE XLIV. lie lives at France but intends soon to go for London. I arrived in Plymouth at l^ngland. lie was born at London and now lives in Gret- na Green. I have been to Paris al- ready, and intend to call in Geneva on my w;jy for Italy. We touched in Lisbon, and afterward-? ai rived ill Elba, and from t;:erc .sot sail and arriv- ed a* Sicily. Ho was in the appointed place of our meeting long before me. We intend to reside some- time at Aipctioa. Ke has beeii tu London, after residing a year at Franro, and now lives in Islington. Ho lived at Grosvenor square, but now resides at Duke street in JVo. 10. as . 1 J RULE XLV. Conjunctions connect ihe same Moods and J enscs of Verbs, and cases of Nouns and Pronouns: ffVr u ''^"^^'"'' '« ^" t)e ipprovcd and practised ;" It thou smcerrly desire and earnestly jnirsue virtue, she w? /^assuredly bejound by thee, and prove a rich rcw-Md. " lie and she were school fellows ;" i lie master taught ucr md me to write,'' A few examples of inacc r.cy re?pecfmg (his rule may ur her d^.play i.s util.ty. « If he prefer a v ir 'ous liillZl 8Mcere m h.s profe.s.ons, ho will succeed ;' • if he prefers.* Toclen.'e .he miseries of 'ha unhnppy. and wantmg compos- • tIIp"', '^''"^•'^s.ian ;' ' and /o want compassiin.' Tl e Parliament addressed the K ni, and has been prorogued >hc f^me day ;' « and v^as prorogued.' « H,8 we.-Itl, and him adcand I (o l,ve harmoniously ;' • comrade and me.' ' My sister and he- were on good terms ;' « and she.' ConiunCiions are ind^ioH mn.ln l« > j;,r . _. . s- a..J lenses of \f'b«: but la these instance, the Nominaiiv* 194 SYNTAX. must genernlly be r«pe«(ed, which Is not necessary (though it may be done) under the construction to wh;< h ilie rule lelers. We ought lo say, ♦ He lives iftnpcraiely, and he bhould live temperatoly.' • Ho mni/ ret'irn, but he will not continue.' • She wa.i proud, ihongli slie is now Imnihlo.' For it is obvi- ous lha> in fluch ^eIllt•IlcuH, ihc Nominative !»iiould be ropea'cd ; ■nd that by this moanp, ilio l.iiter nictiibois of tlicae Bentcnces are rendered not eo s'ric'iy dependent on the pieceeJing, as these are, which come under the rule. When in Uio profrrcss of a sentence, wo pass from (h« Affirmative to the Negative form, or fiom iho Negative to the Affirmativf, the subject or Nominative is always resumed : as, • He is rich, but he is net respectable ;' ' He is not ricii, but, be is respectable' There appears to be in pjeneral equal reason for repeating the Nomina'! vo, and re.'''.imin;^ tiic snbji'ct, when tiie course of the sentence is diverted jy a chanpo of the mood or tenses : • Anger glances into the breast of a wise man, but will rest only in the bosom of fools ;' 'but rcs's only,' or * but tMvill rest only.' ' Virine is prais^ed by mimy, and would bo desired also, if her worth were really known;' 'and she would.* ' The world begins to recede and will soon disappear ;' ' and it Will.' EXERCISES ON RULE XLV. He spoke Latin and writes Greek well. Did he not tell theo his fault, ar\d entreated thee to forgive him. Professing regard and to act diflercntly discover a base mind. If he understand the sub- ject and attends to it, he can scarcely fail of success. Between him and I, there is some disparity of years : but none be- tween him and she. To be moderate in our views, and proceeding temperately in the pur- suit of tlieiit, is the best way to ensure success. My brother and him arc tolerable grammarians. You and us enjoy many privileges. She and him are very un- happily connected. Wc have met with many disappointments ; and if life continue shall probably meet with many more. 8TNTAX. 195 Rank rpay confer influ- ence, but will not ne- cessarily' produce vir- tue. He does not want cour- age, but is defective ia sensibiiit/. These people have great riches, but do not com- •nand esteem. Though Charles is some- times hasty yet is not ungenerous. RULE XLVI. «nn,n^,?'"l^.''"j""''^'''"^ '■''^"''■^ ^^° Fndicative and some the Subjunctive mood. When something con- tmgent and future is implied, the Subjunctive should repent. J he Indicative sliould be used when nei- iner contmgency nor futurity is implied": as " He IS hca thy because he is temperate ;" or when doubt 1^ . nphcd without futurity : as, - If he is as sincere as he pretends, he is really a good man." &. J^^»C:onj.nc.,ons ,/, though, unless, excpt, whether, Mf.f 1"'V^'"'"''" '^■"bj'^nc.ive mood after them J? • If . hou 6e affliced rcpme no,.' • Though he .lay me vet nimselt. No power except it were given him.' . Whether t wore I or they.' But ovea these Coninnrtions when fce en.ence does not imply doubt. adm„ oi the ladicaVvo : «. Though he is poor, he is contented.' "'^auve . as. y require the Subj.jnctive mood : as, • Love not sleeo /<•*< (hou come to Poverty.' • Tnlie ht>P,i%hnt .Ur. , Jacob ' If w.,.i. I ; r ,1 "'^' '''°" ^P^^^ not «o rl, f/ "■'' i«^ following ,t. when fuiuniy is denoted .in"i:it si^:.Ved^ a:"^"y^^:h:"f I73t:;:'i :'^; '"'"^^ n^L„ ,f . ' '■' ""^ "^ our sint-ere 1 am haoDv. on .'If he do submit tf w.ll be from nores.i.y ;' . Thowh he des «ubm,t ho ,3 not convinced.' ^ // thou^rio,* hearty fj! give him, forget the offence.' •i»"j'i«i ,«n,7„V!uP"* ?! '^' ^"'^ ^'^i'^h Grammarians calJ .he Present isetfected by varying the lerojinaiions of the aecond and ihixd !96 SYNTAX. '!i , f personr sincular of the Indicative ; (his will be eviilent from the following examples: » If lliou prosper llioii ehouldst bo thaiikHil ;• • Unle-s he study more closely, he will never be learned ' Some writers however would express these seniimenls vv'itlioijt these variitions : * U \\\o\i pronperest ;' ' unlest. he studies.* Am] as ihero is diverBi'y ot praclice in this point, it IS proper to ofTer the learner a fovv temarks, lo aseist Ihena in dis'ingui-^hiiig iho right application of these different forma of expression, i' may he con>idered as a rule, ibai the changes of 'errninalion aie ntcesi^aiy when llicoo two circumstancea occur ; Is', when he suljuci is of a dubious and coiitiiigont nature ; and 2nd. wh^n the Vtrb has a reiereiice lo future time. In the foliov\iiiy sentences holh these circumslancen will be found to unite : ' I' ihoo injure anoiiier, thon wi't hurt iliy- self ;' • He has a hard lieari, Hnd d he continue iinpeiiiieni ho must sutTer ;' ' He will ruaimaiii his principles 'hocgh lio lose bis esiaie ;' • Whfher he succted or not hii intentio'is is laud- able ;' * If he be not pro-iperou-s, he will not lepi.ie ;' ' If a man STtiite Ins i^crvant and he die.* In all these examples the |hings signified hy the V' rb:< are uncertain, and lefer to future lime. But in tic iiistaiicei? ihai follow, futuie time is not re- ferted to, and therofore a d.ffereiit tonslructiun takes place : « If ihou livest virluouely thou art h&ppy ;' ' Uiiltss he means what he sajH he is douhiy fui diets ;' * Tlioujih he ffcwis to be simple, he hi;« deceived us ;' • Wh'ithnr virtue is better than rank or wesl h, udmiis not of dispute ;' • If thou believest eincetely thou mays'..' There a e many gen'ences introduced by Coniiinctions, in Tvhich neither contingency nor futurily is denoted : as, • Though he excels her in knowledge, she exceeds liim in vir- tue ;' * It he believes the the tru'hfl of religion he doe>< not act accorditi}; lo ihem.' In ihe examples fo'lowing, contingency ia denoted, but no' fuuiiiiy : ' If ho thinks as ho speaks ho may safely be trusied ;' ' Me acta uprightly unles-* ho deceives me ;' • If ho ts dis;><)sed toil, I will jicjform the ojieiaiion ;' « If ihou art the K nj; of the JuWs (^avu thy-elf and ui-.' In tho fol- lowing sentei.ce? fuiurity is .-^i;,!! Hed but not contingency : ' As Boon as tlie sun sets, it wi!l bo cooler ;' ♦ As the autumn ad- vances these buds will gradually em gra e.' From the preceedng ob-^ervaiions it appears that with res- pect to what is termed i he Piesent ten-e of any Verb, when the circumstances Dfcoiuingency and iiiui iiy concur, it i«; pio- per to vary the ieriniiialioMS of the second and third pei.-on lingular ; that wMliont t!ie concurrence of i!ie-e circumstances, the terminations should not bo aliered, and the Verb and the Auxiliaries of the three Past lenses, and the Auxiliaries of the /irit Future uuder^o v.a altera. iuiis whatever, except the Iin- SYNTAX. 197 r^rAr of the Verb to be which when used .ubj-mctivelv i, vari- ed .a a , tne persons of the .inguJar number f,om that VhicJ U has n the Ind cat,ve a. the learner wUl i-erceive bv lu n^n. ,o the Conjugation of that Verb. ' n-rning lo It appears from the tenor of the examplet acJdiioed Ihx m case« wherein contm^enoy ^nd futurity do notconcur' hi. not proper to turn the Verb from its «ignifica.ion rpre enl •imc. nor to vary it, formation or termina.inn ThrV! K would then be in the Indicative mo-^d whateie^Von^ \^^ might attend i,. If theae rules which -ee'^.^'lfr hr.':: d.sjnci.on between the Subjunctive and the Ind.cauve mooHl .n tins lense, were adopted and es.abli.hed. we "houid hav. onthspoml. aj.rinc.pleofdec.ion, «imp e and p.eci e !n3 read.ly applicable to every ca.e .hat m.ght occur' mr^l somet.mea happen, that on .his occa.on! a st.ic. idhcr nce^to Gramtnancal Hule. wo.ld render the language «.>ff and ormal- but when case, of .his .or. occur, it is better to give the Ti- press.on a d-fferenl .urn, .h.n to violate Grammar for the sake of eaae, or even of elegance. * in .he^uL'o'f",)"„"'^ r''' r '^' «"-°"'"^'>y »>»vo fallen Into. n the uso of the bubjunct.ve mood. Some writers exnresi h.mselycs, .n the Perfect ten»e as follows : ' U ,hou hallZ. e„runed we mu.t subm.t.' The proper form is. ♦ If,h„" Se ■•. 57""' '","?*' "^ «^""'»"y '"«' -»-^ -'2« me '-llsa. XN '"'"' '"' '^°''«'' '^°'' ^"*' "«' ''"^w" In the Piuperfecl and Fu,.,ro Tenses we sometimes meet with such expressions a.. « If thou had apphed thyself dilirm h thou would.t havo reaped the advantage;' • Ur^le iTou ^hall .peuk the whole t.uth. we cannot determine ' Thia muJeol expressing the Auxiliaries, ]=, „ot warranted bv the P.ac„ce of correct writers. They .hould be hads, and /Li/! a> we fin , hem used ,n the Scripture.. • If .hou hadst known etc. '-Luke x,x. « 1( ihou wilt thou cansi, &c.'-Mai. vi.. The second person singnlar of the Imperfect Tonse in th« M 'Z'r 'r ' '^ "^"^""^ ''"''^ '" "« 'e'n.ina:ioM : as, 1 iDou loved him, -hou wouldsi obey him ;' ' Though thoa ^;i conform .hou g.ined no.hiog by it.' This variat^o^ b m- proier, and our version of the Scriptures decides aga.nsl if 1< thou hnowcst the gift, &c.'_John iv. • If thon didst le ceivcit why dost thou glory.'-I Cor. iv. 0fthS'pHL'I°\''"''r'^''''''""'''''^" '^''^^ '^^ Auxiliar/ea chanl , 1 , "'"""^ "■ '? "'""'^^ '"^ '"^ Suljunc.ive, do not cl.ange .he om«k .»,«.. '-o'u-.«- „vo ;' . Unless thou rouldst read ;' and not -'if thou 198 fiYNTAX. mny or can fo ;' &c. It fc(;rm« ^ufiit. >'ii' '>n lh\t r'O'Ht to ad- '.( :f (JraRjfiisrp, 7'.. jf ihou iitavkt be tl, • orit C8 of Jtili.Frn ariil I^cw.li, lln)Mj|ili ilie HciipMircH «No lo low llie -a u-; riil(! ll: »,s^ 'ictlii-r kill".' — Nell. vi. lull vmi^ feHft'il.' — r.-al. cx.w. 'I'll': suiio C'liij'inclion yovcrning lioth llic Indicative and Ihc Si. I')i.nci.v<' moods in ilie s.-iine seirence, and m the same cirfHii nianci - bfeiis lo In' a yrcii iiii[ ropritly : a?, 'li liirri) be l)ut oue liciJy of Le-ioin^uj!, it is lu* Lciuir tliam lyiuiiDj ; .f llior* iiiis *.f vbi i- ation ; oi.d '.hev i-'ip|)0.-u ih.ii it !.•> si.riaiiim u'kho wiiicii rou- tititiHua the '■i-t'iicl r;i of ini>;)diJ. U is ll o {)[iiiiiiii of oilier (jrair.iuariarr', (in wliieii cfi:; o". «c ccucnr,) ilial bcriilcs ibe Iwo cii>r-< inentio.'i-Ml, all Verb^ 'U 'he tli i e Pi'-t, and tlio two VtiluiH TeiL-erf, Hie ill 'he S'dijiiiiciive hhmj 1, wlieii tliev denOiO coiiiiiiijcnev, ilionuli iliey hive no: any cinn^'e of itrtr.inaii.ir ; find lli.ii wlioii ronini>;i'nfy is not f^ :(;iiilicd, the Veib lliioii,'^!i all ihcse fiire leiues b-'ong!' lo the Inibea'.ive jiiood, wbaltver Corj'isic'i o'l may niitrid it. Tliey lb ol» 'ii-it the diliia imi and nature (J tU'i ^''jl>i inciivi; tiio >d have lui rcljience to chai^.^c of terrnnir.tiiMi, bm that ihey rorcr murely to Mio ni.iiiier of the hcinw, aci:o 1, or p isyion siLMiilied by the Verli ; and ilial the S ibj iriclivo inond in i v r> s proporly ex:~t wUliout a van.il iuii of (he. Vi-'rh, .•,.-i i I'c 1 1 l^'itix :iic,od, ^^l.i(.■!l has no leir.iiiia ion difFoict)' ti'.iii iho ImI I'liive. Tiic dtcir o'l of ihis point iiinv noi be tboiiiTJi; ofnrieii con;-(?'j;iei;cc. I»!'.l ili? niled iviiicli a?cer;a'ii ih • j-n-ni leiy of v.iryiMij. ox no' vai) iii^, the te.m;- lia'ions ol li.e ^'erb u d! ccit.'irdy be dccr.iod Mnpoitant. These rules (T.ay be well ob^e: ved without .i ur.'iuri.niiv of t^cntiiucnt re-'}ieLt;ng ill n.uure and 1 mils of the Subj inctivc mood. Tlie Conj :nc''or, is frtqiteii'iy omiilcd, and the Verb is llicn eaid lo h. ve a L'onj ir.ciive form : its, ' \\'ere ilitre siodif- tereace ibi le v^onfd be no ctioce.' A dmihlo C'o:ijunQ.live la . ... ,.i . .. „_ .,r ., „ : „.^,. ../><• SYNTAX. 199 use of : ai. « Had ho do..e tl.ig. he had escaped.' Thewnfnr. JO llic common form would read ihuH ' li iL i j ,*""'*"«• would have eacaptd.' ' '' ''" '""^ ''°"« ">"' »»« EXERCISES ON RULE Xf.Vf. Whether he confesses or Let him «l.n» .-^ .,0 no., ti,o .ruu. „.„! bo ilx':Tzz^z:. irhe bo, hut, in health, 1 am content. in was you, I would do as you did. If thou do believe the truths of Jieligion act virtiiduslv. Tiioiii^h lie do praise her, it id only for her beauty. discovered, If he acquires riches, they will corrupt his mind. Though he urges me yet more earnestly, 1 s\v\\\ not comply ; unlosis he advances stronger rea- sons. I shall walk in t!ie fields to day, unless it rains. TTp jc; c^ n..,..^\ c j ••*<• 's so conscious of de I shall walk in the iloMs rforvinjr the rebuke, to-morrow if it is fuii lie disa;)provcd ol the moasure, because it were improper. Thoufrh he be hi;^h, he haili respect to the low- tiiat h(^ dare not re])iy. If ihou dost not forgive, tliou maysl not bc^ior- given. However the affair ter- minates, my conduct is unimj)cacl,ablu. Whether ho improve, or Tdl repentance composes not I cannot determine. hi:5 mind, he will be u ! that his heart was ^^^rangcr to praise, tender to feel for my Though virtue appear ""^^^- severe, she is truly a- 1 The promises, he will liable. P^;»'^«iia. If thou know ol this affair Despise not any conditi- ^''^ ^^^ *''*^" ""' leH • on, lest it happens to be If thou would improve, tiiou shuuid be Uiiifjeut. 200 SYrCTAX. If thou had succoodcd, Though thou might hnve thou wouldst not bo foreseen tho danger, happier. thoii could not have a- Thou cannot deny the fact voided it. though thou will not acknowledge it. Ifthou have promised, bo faithful to thy engage- ment. Though success bo very donbll'ul, it is proper that ho endeavors to succeed. I will either send it, " Xeither he nor I RULE XLVII. Certain Conjunctions pair, and should be ac- companied by llieir associates, as follows : 1st. Uliilhcr — or : as, " Whither ho will go or not, 1 cannot tell." 2nd. Eilhcr — or : as, * or Iring it myself." 3rd. »Vt(7/icr — nor : as, am able to do it." 4th. c^s — as, expressing a coiJ)j)arison of equa- lity : as, " She is a^^ aniiublu us her sister, and aa much respected.'' 5th. Jls — so, expressing a comparison of equa- lity : as, " Jh the stars, so shall thy seed be." 6th. Jh — so, expressing a comparison of qua- lity .• as, " Jh the one dielli, so dieth the other." 7th. So — as, with a Veil) ox|;rossinga compa- rison of quality : as, " To see thy glory, so as I have seen thee, in the sanctuary." 8th. Si) — as, with a Negative and an Adjec- tive expressing a comparison of quantity : as, "I'om- pcy was not so great a Cjoneral as Cesar, nor so great a man." 9th. So — that, expressing a consequence : ap, ( ( t-I „„ I'.. *: .1 j/. I u „ _ .. I .1 _ - 1 . 11 i«c -.Tasou iaii^iicu, iua; lii; uuuiu ucu; v;(;iy iiiuvc. 8Y.VTAI. 201 10th. Both— and nal and actual sin." as. We have hulk origi- 11th. T/iou;^li—yct -ncvcrthilcsn : as, "Thou'^h was rich, ijft lor our sakes he became poor T" J liough powerful, iitvcrUultiss ho was meek." Conjunctions are oflen improperlj empIoyeJ, both in pain anu aingly. r ■ ■ irha is someiimes used for as : as, • There was nono (o eanguino u-A(, d.,1 not .qM'rehen.l ill ronsr,j„e„co» ;' il oui^lii lo be, • so .".iDgumo ai not lo ;ippfeiiend, kc.' Ji» is some.imes u8. &c.' , hough Mu„av and Others .h,nk .1 shoul.l aUvavs be ' .,o fur, &..• *«„ ,b„ullne^ erally howover bo used befo.n caudid, and noi as ■ a« « I must be so candid as to eny, &c.' " ' Conjunctions are sometimea used superfluously a. n, «s ilul they require a great deal of e.\an.i,ialion.' TAa/ -a o.len properly omi.led and under., ood : as, • J b«« you «ould como tomo ;' « See thou do it no. ;• for. • ^Aa^you wo" d &C-' • tl^at you do .t not.' But in the followng .,„d .n hr phrases u were much better inserted : • Vet ,t it .ealon He ftienio^y of their virtue, reman to posterity ;' i, .should be '• vel ■t .SJ..I that the memory, &c.> ^s i, ,mpropeW> oma.'ed' n .holollowtng phrase.: ' Which nobodv presumes or is so .san- guine to hope ;' ' I n.us, however be so iu,l to own •' u shouid be. ' as to hope ;' ' as to own.' ' ' '''*'""^ As is onen used by itself : «9, « He offered himself oj a teacher, thougl. unable to rend.' "mseif as a As when connocfod with the Pronoun such eceiriB to hava the forte of a Relative Pronoun. *^ Ff/ and neverthclesn are offnn «,«„«,!.. ^^:... , .tood^lter though : aa, • •rhoush"pow;;ful ^ie was'S"'''*" 502 ■TNTAX. 'SW Conjunctions *f*' •ometime* croTded tmpropprly tofelher : ■ 0, • But and if that evil ncrvanl nay lu hm bofrt ;'— Mall. xxiv. But attd aie .iiiiuopcr and leilunJant. Some writers are of opinion, ihit lest should not be em- ployed in BUch phrises : as, « llo was afraid le^t I «oipcr u-^e ot two Ne^»niivM, and in.ty ai properly be evprc-eed thus, • Thev shull not go, either James or John.' Or and iior may ofleii howevnr tie need witli ei|iial propriety, as in thi:* Bcnlence : ' Tiio King whose character was not fiufiiciontiy vgorous nor decisive, aestn'ed to the moa- • me;' or woii[d jierhap!* ha vo been b"iter, but in f;enor;il in Burh •onieiice^ nor seems to ifpea' tlie Negative vrh p opii- ety, and iheteforo givori more cmpliasis to the expression. Or, or, in Poetry i» generally used, rather than , either, or. EXERCISES ON RULE XLVIf. ITc wa3 neither cold or fervid in friendship. We should or be true to the trust committod to us, or relinquish it. The sky was so red as blood. One is so deserving as the other. I must be as exact, as to keep precisely to the line. This is an event, which nobody is as sanguine as to hope for. lie is not as much esteem- ed, as he thinks him- self. There was something so amiable, and yet so piercing in his laok, as affecteti me at once H'ith love and terror, I mtist be as candid as to own, I have been mis- taken. Our conduct so far, as it respects others, is un- exceptionable. No errors are so trivial, as they do not deserve to be mended. ^\ ill litis assertion re- ceive so much credit; a3 he intended. ■TNTAJt. 203 This business is so plain, lie will not do it himself not ex- as 1 need plain it. You must carry this your- seir, or send a poison with it. nor let mo do it. lie hohavcd well so as his conduct was ap- proved ol'. RULE XLVIII. When things nro compared hy the Conjunctions ns or t/uin, the latter J*ioiioun agrees with llio Verb, or is nrovorncd hy the Verb or a'Prcpnsition e.xpress- ed or understood : aa, " Thou ait as wise as I " '• ^- " tt=^ • a'<» " " They loved him more than '"c ; I. e. " than they loved me." " The senti- luont is well oxpn-s^cd hy l*l:xto, but much l)eltcr by Solomon than him ;" i. c. " than by him." The proi.riety or imprnprioly of many phrasf^s in tlir pro- ceeding as well as m some olher forms, ni jy be discovered l.y stipplymg ilio wonia dial are not expressed, which will be t-v i- (ienl from the foliowin;; inJiances of erromotis cnnslruc'ion • ' He can read better tJi.in me ;' 'He is ns t;ood as lif:r ;' • Wh«- Hior I be present or no ;' ' V/ho .lid (hin ? me.' Ky suppiyin;,' the words understood in each of these phrases, their iinpropnc- ly unil governing rulo will appehr : .ik, ' Hener than I can read ;' ' As good as she is ;' ' Pjestui or not ptesent :" ' I did it.' '^ The Conjunction but xecms to require as mucli attention aclhciH or uf ; in such seniences : as, ' No i^erfon was jne- sent but ho ;' « I saw nobody b'lt him.' Ii ll.e Eli.pjis is sup- p'le I in these sentences, it will be, ' But he waa prc-ent :' ' but him I saw.' Notwithstanding this rule, than and as h.ive generally the same case before and after them, which will aj.pcar Pom tho following examples ; first ihe Noniinnlivc : as. ' lie )s richer »han I ;' Secondly the Pu^e-'si.'o : as. • Ilia riohea ]z Greater than mine ;" and lastly, the Objeciive : as. • Me beat him as well as me.' When the Relative who immediately follows than it eeenis ♦j> form an exception to this rule ; for in that oonr..:jiioii the Huiuiive IS put in the Objective case : as, » Belzebub than 204 SYNTAX. v>hnm Sitan excppfed none higlier Bct.* — Jifillon- Tn Buch in- Binncep, if ilie I'errionsl Prop.oiju wero t.<3od, it would be, ' Bel- zebub than //?, fic' The phrase • than whom,' is however nvo dcil by I'le host moilern wr te; • and the propriety of using it at alli has been much contiovci* (i of late. From as, thati and but, bavi.i,; >o often ihe same ca-so be- foir nnd lii er ihfm, and from \ha7i. Hcemiiif,'ly govcrninrj ti'C Oijectivu cai?o tchoin, "ome have ll ongh', they were Pionoii- tioiiB, but this opinion jeema incorrect. EXERCISES ON RULE XLVIII. I am as learned as him. Ho can speak better than me. The untlortakitig was I'lMch better oxectited by them than we. Ti.cy know how to write as well as him, but ho is a !)etter grammarian thtui them. Tiiongh 1'"; is not so learn- ed as hor, he is as miich respected. V/ho betravcd her com- |)ani;;ii i not mo. Vrito revoalr^d t!ic secrets he on;') it to liave con- cealed ? not him. Who related fal^'^l.oods to stuccn herself and to bring an odium on others : not me it was her. Charles IQth. King ot Sweden, than who, a more courageous man never lived Salmasius, (a more learn- ed man than him has seldom appeared,) was not happy at the close of life. There is but one in front and that is me. Nero caused them :•.!! to bo slain but he and she. RULE XLIX. In n comparative sentence os or f/^ffushnuid t ot be uso , improperly, the one for the otiier ; this s( n- lence is thorebue "incorrect : " lie was more belov- ed, but not so much admired as Cintliio ;" it shov-M T I wK l^ii* t\nf • o.w MV(*^' SO much admired." SYNTAX. 205 con* Th« The «x«mpfe '.n this rule, presents a most irrcf^far Btriicfmn, namely, « He was more brlovrd as Cinthio.' uord? morr nnd so much are very improperly s'ateJ as baviiie tlio ppme regimen. ° In correcting Mich eenfencps, the Ellipsis miy or mny not hi suppl eJ. If It .-onduces to .he cle^nnro of the con.truciiori It slioiiM be done ; as m tl.e followrng Ptnfrpce : ' Will it ba rr~e,l tiint «lir.>,,t ...Imr. tUn omission of words would obscuro the sense, or be ITNTAX. 207 iu. bd attended with an impropriety, they should be express- ed : as in this sentence, •' We are apt to love who love us ;" the word than should be supplied. Almost All compo'inded ienlences are more or lets Eilipti- cnl, 8onie exnrnples of which may be seen under the different l<.iri» of •peech. Tho following Instances contain much of (he E hr.oi- : ' To let Hood ;' i. e, « to let out blood.' • To l«t down :' ,. e. • to let fall or slide down.' ' To walk a mile ;* i. e. ' walk ih ouf^ti the ppace a mile.' « To go a fidhing ;» i. p. • to go on a fitiliMi^ v')yaj;fi or biitine«9.' * I dine at two o'cIocK ;' I. e. ' a' two of llie clock.* The i-^lhpsis of ilie at tide \^ ilius used : ' A man, womaa Br.dclii'.l ; I. (.1. ' a iiihii, a worn in, and a cl»ild.' ' A houst ai.d jifiroeo ;' i. e. ' u liouse and a garden.' ' The vun and moon ;' i. e. ' tlie sun ;iiid the moon.' In all these instancea, the article I en;; once txpresee I thfl repe'iiion of it becomes un- nere^sjuy. There ia however an exception to this obsiervation, when hoiiic peculiar t-Miphasis requires a repetition ; as in tho followi.ig sen't-nre; • Not only tha yesr, but the day and th« hour.' In ihis ca^-o, tho Eilipss of the last article would be iiiiproper. When a different form of the article isrequiied, the ariicle is aho properly repeated : as, ' jj house and an or- chard •" insteid of, ' a house and orchard.' Ttio J\i\)un \^ frequently omitted in (he following manner: • The laws of God a^id man ;' i. e. * the laws of God and the Uwsof man.' » The wise, the good, and great, sin as well aa o here ;' i. e. « the wht-. met), kc. ' Tile Ellipsis of the v'7'Zyecn;intilul, and nlie was goot • Thou art pdor ai.d wrfclied, and inisiTai)lf, and blind, un naked.' II we would li;i upihn Kilipsis in (he Itit fen'enco, thou art ought lo bu repunicd beloie each of the Adjcc.ivcs. I f in fuch enumeration, we cluiose 'o po nl out one proper- ly abova thereat, tha- p.iirds his word, but iliou dost not ;' i. c. ' do.^t not r.j^ard it.' • V»'e eucceeded but they did not ;' i, e • did net succeed.' '1 have learned uiy task, but thou hast not ;' i. o. * hast not learned.' The Ellips's of ilie Jdvcrb is used in Ihe fo'Iowing mnnncr; • He s.i)oke ai>d .icied wi^-eiy ;' i. e. ' ho ppr ke wisely, nnd ha acted wisely.' • Tiince I went and (;ffere!l my services ;' i. e. • thrice I went and liirice 1 olitred my soi vices.' The Ellipsis of the Prtposiiion as well as of t'lO Verb i» BOen inihu foCowin-^ insLu-cca : ' He went into the iibbevs, halls, and public build, ni:s ;' i. e. • be went into the atilxyK, he went into il;e ii.ills, and lio went into the fiublie buildinos.' • He fpoko to every man and ivonian ilwre ;' i. e. ' to evtiy nitin and to every woman.' ♦ Tins day, nexlmomh, last year ;' i. c. • on tiiis day, in the nu.\l month, in tbe last year.' The Ellipsis of the C(;??jft;jf//on is as follows: 'They confess ttie power, wisdom, >;oodness and loveof iheir Ciealor;' i.^e. ' if-i power, and witdom, and (/oodness, and love. &c.' • rhougij i iove iiim, i do not Maiitr Lim / i. e. « ihoujjh I love hiui, yet 1 do not flatter hau.' SYNTAX. 209 The Ellipsis of the Interjection is not very common ; it however is sometimes used : aa, • Oh .' pity and ahame !' i. e. • Oh ! pily, Oh ! shame !' The example-* that follow are produced to shew the impro. priely of the Lllipsin in some particular cuses. The Antecedent and Relative connect the pa.ts of a sentence togeiiier, and to prevent obbcuriiy and confusion, should answer to each other with exactness : ' We sneak tiiat we do know, ind testify that we have ^een.' Here iho Ellipsis is manifestly improper, and OU{;ht to be supplied : as, ' We ?peak that which we do know, and testify that which we have seen.' ' The land wai always possessed by tho.e intrusted wuh ihe command ;' it should bo • those to/.wi.. — I mind. 1(2 210 SYNTAX. These rules are nudress- ed to none but the in- telligent and tlic attcu- ti\ . These counsels were the dictates of virtue, and the dictates ol lienor. Avarice andcunniufj may gain an estate, but avarice and cunuin:?' cannot gain IVicnds. Witliout firmness, no- thing that is great can be uudertaUcn, that is j dillicuit can be accoin- plibhed. The anxious man is the votary of riches ; the negligent of pleasure. Hie favor or disapproba- tion was governed by the failure of an enter- prise. He has an affectionate brother, and an airec- tionate sister. His crimes had brouiiht him into extreme dis- tress, and extreme per- plexity. We must guard against too great severity or facility ol manners. In the circumstances I was at that time, uiy .,^,.^^..A I.,,. ly upon Kie. That species ofcommcrce will produce great gaia or loss. His reputation and his estate were both lost bv gaminjj. This intelligence excited not only our hopes, but fears also. He is not only sensible and learned but is re- ligious too. Who would learn this science, mu.'^t have a great memory. By vanity we provcke enmity, and we incur contempt. He saluted every man and every woman there. This shi|) had several men died of the scurvy. All those possessed of ar,y ofiice resigned their commission. This may atFord some profit and anmsemcnt. Perseverance in laudable j)ursuits, will rewaid our toils and will pro- duce unexpected gi nor his reputation. Nor life, death, angels, prineiju'ilities or pow era engaged in (hat shall separate Ub Irom Uivsteries to us. ne.-s, but 1 shall never be en^ajied in it. his love. Reliiiious j)ersons are of- By tliis ha!>itual indelica- t*-" unjuiitly rei)resei!l- <'y, the viririns siniU.-d '''^l ''^ romantic or visi- at wliiit they^ blushed ut oaary, or ignorant of bciore. tlie world, or unlit to lie are reconciled to ive in It. what fbey could not be O my father ! my friend, lorinerly prompted, by how great has been iii/ any inuuccmeut. iniiratituuo. 212 SYNTAX. No rank, station, posses- What is human life but a sioiis, exornpt a maa niixliire with varioiisj from contriljuiine to the crusses and troubles. "^ g"*^^- I In is a cicrfrymau an. Tin' Jews are Abraham's, Isaac's and Jacob's otrs|»riii^. 7. Tlic excuse was admitted ofl)ylhe coinpanv. o. Our sect diller with them in op'uion. 9. Alalia alwavs appears amiably ,• she ai'vays behaves mild 10. 'Ihis oliicer was punish- ed for the uut executing the law. 11.1 aiu exceed- inii joyful in all our tribulation. 12. Take you this j)l(!d:j;e, and ^ive mo thine. 13. IMc being but a child, was unnoticed. II Let you and I. be not at variance lo. This ina >Vt.aii «irj iO iiiaKO iiie |it;»>j. iVluch of the good and evil th.it happen, ^etMu the eiiVct of chance. 41. It is not 1 who i.c wishes t u wed. 12, JNOw not only iiis liiends, but his wi'o too leaves him. 4 3. After living uiuiiy \ ears at L OH- d *n, he died in Home I. '11 lavo with ye 4. ir le poor iiUva}.s y e was raist o d from a ^^late as bad, if not worse than bankruptcy. 4G. I then in- I tended to have sent a mes^:age to him. 47. Every one tliiit la();»'jth ot' the water as a dog, h in shall thoii Sit hy himself. 4;{. lie was so alleri.'d, that I was in doubt whether i' could be liiin or lot. 49. Wo admired the ofiioer s, as we thouglit him, dress and noble air. oO. The Senate was divided in opi- nion on this subji!ct. 51. 1 caniu>t believe but what they are free of this crime. 62. Was you present at this great spectacle ? 63. If he be honest, 1 care liuie for his other qualities. o4. 1 looked and saw no man but he only. do. When shall I see him ever again, oo. It is not the uttering or hr^aring pious Words, th It coiKAitute the true worship ot God. 57, If tin; heart accompany not the words, we oifer a sacriiice of lo(4s. 68. The idleness and ignoianco ofthese men, if it be allowed to |)roceed will ruin us. XT i vj : ! U i an han i'\' IS axj uOITJpicte, &i --'••-3 cd not I not contaia impcrfcctioa. CO. Either of these Ihico iU tl4 fTNTAX. extremes shall bo pernicious to virtue. 61. All must die, whether thov will or no. C2. \Ve are ia a pcrilouH situation ; on the i'ornicr side are the ar- my ot° our enemies, and oil (he Intter, nuinbers ot wild beast.s, 63, When we have once fixed the lino of our moral <;on(liict, we ou::lit not to tranj*<;ress the line. (M. It"! 4iud known my friend's distress, it would bo my duty to have relieved him. €'>. A rose, a tulip, or a liyaciiith, please the ryo by tlieir iine colours, as bcautil'iil llowfis. GC 'I'lii-s cmiduct wuh equally unjust a.s dislionorable. t!7. SuUKlhing more than gtiitlfiiess and ad'abilily, eom|)lac<'iic.y and mo- desty, are necessary to [\)\tt\ a <;i>ud man. dU. In his ci)iidu(;t was troacberv, and in bis uurda fnitblcHs professions. ('>V Prosperity and adversity may be improved equally, botti this and that proceeds Irom the same author 70. If he sincerely aciiiio\vlcdr;>ive iiiin. 71. On lliise causes depend all tlie ha|)[)uiess or niiaery which exist a- moijjr men. 7'J. Virtue and mutual confidence is tlio soul of frieiidsiiip. 73. liy these allainments are the master honored, and the scholars encouraged. 7'i. She was really in that sad conditinn, that her friends represent her. I'j. 'ilie enemies who we have most to I'ear, are tl;nse of our own hearts. 76. Thou art the iMe.ssiaii, who was to come to save the world, and hast been so lon<^ prorni.sed. 77. This machine was not more coin[)lete, yet not less inferior than the one Ixdore described 78. Tiien this olli- cer lay hold wl"him, and immediately executed liim. 79 If you please to tliink ofour disaster, you would easily conceive our mi.^erable state. iJG. 'i his is one of these cases that re(iuire peculiar attention. 8i. There were in the metropolis much to amuse them, as well as many things to e.vcite disgust. 8!2. lliches might give us respect in vulgar eyes, hut Bhall not recommend us to wise ajid good men. 83. Time and chance happeneth to all men. 84. De- sires and wishes are the first spring of action. 85. Thouffh this affair he mysterious, it is worthy of in- vestigation. 86. liis cuiiduut shewed him little iesa i I' I u ar^TAi. 319 61. All a arc ia 3 the ar- ubtjrs o( tlio lino ;ress tiie VV.SH, it A rose, iieir liiiti lucl \VII8 tig more uikI iiio- bU. lu i'aitliless may be '(Is Irom : causes exist li- ce 13 the .Mits ure luragcd. tliiit her I who we I •Is. 7G. suve the (7. Tili3 i inferior this olli- ted iiiin. >ii would 'iliis '\3 ttentioii. J amuse 1st. 8i2. yes, but en. 83. 84. Do- n. 85. Iiy of in- ittlu less than a fnol. 87. Which of the mountainn of the An- dcH, is the loftier ? 88 Ot'thcir more posterior de- si:,'n3 I know not. 89. Wc do not know who to trust, them who seem true or false. DO. 'J'his is the pri- son where wo were confined. "J I. These prisoners arc boinj^ taken to jail. !)'2. Art thou he (hat earnest from Rome ? 9 3. Several alterations and additions h;id been mado to the work. 0\. lie look every ad- vaiitairo to make money, and by these means be- ramc rich. !».3. () piety ! virtue ! how have J nep- Icctcd you. 9fi. Let us trust in (iod, which roiscth the dead. 97. Since he sunimotis me, 1 must the others. 98. The climate ofEiiffland is not so plea- sant as those of France, Spain or Ilalv. 99. John's ball is rounder than mine. lUO. 'J'jic goinfr not to Pi-hool every day, was the cause ol'tiii.s boy beinrr flofrrrcd. IQI. IIc wislics t lio wholc liuiMaii race's salvation. 102. They were jturposed to vi.sit the city but are not arrived yet. J0.'3. Celia is a vain woman, whom if w^ do not flatter, she will be of- fended. OF PARSING AND CONSTRUCTION. As we fiave now finislicd the cxp'nnation and Ru'e<>of the difffTcnt pirts of epeech, it miy be proper to give some ex- amples of the manner in which Learr.ers .«hoiil(] be txercised, in order to prove their iitiowledge, and to rendei it Taunliar to them. The nature of llie subject requires ilia' ii should be dj- vided into two parts ; viz ; Pariir)g a» it respc.ts E'ynio'ogy s'.one ; and Parsing a;* it respects boh Etymology and Syntax, which ia also called Conatriiction. SPECIMENS OF ETYMOLOGICAL PARSING. " Virtue ennobles us." Virtue is a common Substantive, of the Neuter gendfr, thethiid person, tliC singular number, and in the Nominative case. {Decline the J\oun.) Ennobles is an Active Verb, of the nr-t variety, of ifie first Conjugation, Indicative Mood, present Tense, and the third person Singular. (Bepent the i'reseni Tense, the Imperfect Tense, and the Perfect Par- 2f6 ■TNTAX. (triple ) r% !9 f Pffonal Pronmn of i1i»« Tifit pcrion Plural, ■aj 111 iho Uoj-ictive cq»o. (IJeeliue tt.) " (looflnrss v ill be rcv.nidcd " Conilnf.i* i" a rorirnmi "^ .hi'aniivo, of ili'' Nf .ilrr {TPn.'rr, in 111" NuiiniMiive LA'*-. { f)> i Inir it- ) Will he r nnn ,lfd , IS ij V-rh of iIk; li » ('or>j ii^n ' i..i, .vd Hpcni).' vir.tv, iM t!io r.s'ivi! V.c<, i!i • In 'iraiivo Mooi!, tlic Fust Fuluie 1\i,sp, and the ilrnl pfr^jn Siiij;ular, " (Jratitudc Im a di-li'^htfiil cmr>tinn " nm'il'iil'' i^ 1 r-iMvnnn Siih-M.l vi TiJiis""'.'!).! tin (I r-'-"" Sn-MJar. ^, is the lu.l-ii'n »• :t l.e N""nr s/.-ndrr, the (liird perfOii, llic Singiilur iuMiil)er, ami (he Nom n:i!;'" c " Tlioy who forgive act nobly."' T!ici/, i;^ n Perronr^I Prono'in, of llie Uiird prrcon, lf'« Pliini! nuii't>or. nid in tli." Nom iiauve case. {JiecUne it.) V.n-':iv, \* nil A-'i^'f' Ve-b, of liir li.st varittv, i.lllio i-ocon- cUrv Co r)M!;(i!i<>u, hifiriiive Mnml, Piesfn" I'lT-e, and ibe t'l'rd lerbOd I'liir.il, wiio-^o prrtt-rite mil Pas PiriiLipIo aro ri.ff'venl, ami ll.rit fo nin ilil- P^.tt np'e in n. Act is a Verb Acl.V, of ilie ■*0C'Mii| vincty of '1 e lir-«t Conj'!!;.-!! Ion, Indica- live .\!ood, Presonl iVn^^c, anH lli'^ if. ni prr-on Plural. jVoliljl is an Adverb rf (yiaii'v. {Ui-peit flic ./Iilji>clhe J om which it i« ilrrived ; "'li thf dt^tces oj comp'irison, hoth of the Adjective an) /idi'ctb.) " Tiiiio (lies, O ! liow swiftly flics." Time, )■< a common SulisTn'ivi- f ili»> Neuter pcnder, nn'1 in ibe Nom:np.'ivc cifo. Fiief, is a Nei);er Verb of ilic fu-l ^ variety, of ilic secoii'!-^ry Conj:ip;:itir,n, in i h" Itd-cTive Mood, j r">;>en! TenFC, andi ho t liird person Sin^Fulnr {Ihpenl iht Prenrnt niul Iinprrffct Tni-^ex nr.d Pnst rarticiple.) 0' \* an Inierjerlioii. Ktiw and siofih/ arc Adveibs". " Time cuts down all with his scythe." | Vj,i.» 1^ \,p-p po! n rci, n on J^ubrMntive. 1' is personified n ibe Masculiiio gender. Cut$, id a Verb Aciive, oi ilic ibira iY?fTA\ 217 ▼ •r'rtT, of the ••eondiry Conwiij»lion, Indict'iv*! Mfinr!, md lliit.l pfr«on Kitianlftf. {H'lvitii: the "line trrininnlinn \, in all the Ttn^rt inul Pnitt I'urlii >i>le, ami furininz id Imjtftfrrt tiroperly, only ly the .iltixifiai y ih'l.) Vown if B Pfopo-uion. .illl !•» in Adjt.-c jvc, put S'(b!«;nniiv^!j, »gnif)in^ • all lli-na-.' With i-» « Prfpojnion. ///» m • I'tunniin in 'lio I'o-mn'ii'VB en**. Si-yihe in a rdmrnrin Sub* • aniive of the Neuter gendor, the Ibird peiaon, and (lie lingu- lar D JtiiLer. FPECIMENS OFCONSTRUrTION, OR OF SYNTACTI- CAL PARSINc;. AS WELL AS ETY.MOLOiJICAL. " Ilnw wnnncrfiil nrr ti;c works of llio great Crea- tor, \\ ho made all lliiiif^s oriiotliiiig, and sup- ports us every moiucnt Ity ln3 power." JIoiD woniterful, how an Arlve b fiiilifirs tvori'lerfuf an Adjt'ciive, and M C«'nerally pl.icfd hcloro it, 1>J Rides xxivi. aod X r,. The wiirhi, ihr Djfi.u e anicle is i>liitcd bo/oro fiihcr is nculir or Piuili! N'»iin«<, b) K'l^e li. Of povern* Cre- ator in 'iie Olijodive race by liiHe ^li. Great belongs to ita No'.in I'ipntor by Rile \\\\ Who a Rcl.it ivp, fprecs wrh its Anldiltnt Creator by Rule xvi. and is the Noniitiiitive to the Verb tnnde, asal.o if) sitpporfs to wbch Vc.l) it i-i under- ttiod by Rule iti. Siipporla an Active Verb prveLS ux in tha <)!>J!»cli\e caao, aareoatiiy to Rule xxvni. Kvery a Di-'lriba* tivfj Pronoun, th?t nRrei-s in ilie S'ligular with moment by Ri he mpporis ux, during every moment. Py governs power \a the Ol'jfctive caae. " Peace and joy rrc virltir's crown." Peace and joy .tre rommoT Substantive:* joined by the Copulative and, by Role xLv. lliai 8a\8 like caeta are coupled by Conjiinctionit. Peace and jov ft;o Nomina 'ives to the Plural Ve b are by Rulo vi. Virtue governs crown in ihe Posfiet* ■ive case b; Rule xxvi. k " Strive (o improve." Strive i« a Verb Neuter, of ibc first variety of the tecoo- dary Co.-ijiigaiion, in the Imfteraiivti Mimd, and of the second person Sngiilar. {Repeat the Imperfect Tense and Pa$i Fartifiple) To improve is a Neuter Verb of ilie first variety At' Ino firai r^n..iitr*n t..ii m iliA fiiAntliwA V1nr>ri a 11^ nf\vArn»a ~ 'J "5" " ■ ' " ~- ~" S " ~ by strive according to Rule xxx. C18 SYNTAX. u ill *' Who prrscrvrs us ?" JVho n »» R>!iii'vn I'rodDuri o! \\ r Iiiiriopfttivo kind n in the Ni'iiiiri.T I vr I'.iff S himiIh'. Tlie wtiul .. ■.vincli n relil (itfl sul).-iqiit-lii ) 1" 'lu- Nuiin (n V niuiui) coi t;i n ii^ \\>i; (U)h'v Co iho qi.-si on, wl irii lu'is' l.u a N in i.a'ue hk'' rr/in, nH ' i ptcsei vci II-.' J'refftvfs u hn Ariivi' \'i i li o' I hi; lir-*i vm ety of lir.'t ("onj^'atKin, Iim'h ,»t \ c AIim'i!, I'm -i nl Ten.' n^rcciinr null i'.!" IS'iniinnive inhti. I 's i> u Pcr.onal I'louou guvoruci in ilic Olijiciivc \pnim nmi i^ ilii: N'njninnllvo (o I V, r'l ntr. J\ of is ji i^fo.\:\\o Af.v'M'i. I'/inn 'fnvKi i^ Pc: iicii)ial Atij'r ive in I hp |ir.s!'ivc -liile. Tl e t wo Ncyativ nt ai'U MU I'jim un jininnaiivi! by I-'u'e xxwiii. " IIo is as V, r •' lis I." ne is Nom'nnilvo to I'm VimIi ix. .7'r(lin^ lo It ile xi.vii. / i-i Pi.inoun in ilic NununatMi (■•»,•. !i;;iieing with llio Verb at •iiiderslood accurdinj^ lo liulu xi.viii. " Tt wa;? no i 'lior than he." It i- .1 Neii'f Pron'-'iti crnnofic 1 m ilip Mnpniiinc ^<», e cordiiii/ u) iJie En^.iah id.i.tii e\id»in»'ii in Riilo x;v. Olhn * T'fonoiin 'liat r(i|"ircs Ihui .iMor it b . li il»' >.\v. He. is t JNoinmaiive to Ihe Verb liJus, mid- isiood by llulo xLViii. " Woes thco, O I wrclcliod man." Woci is n-. Intoi joc'ion tlii' alwajs }^nvc-iis tl •• ('''jfr!' ■nd ?r has thee afu-r n, by iUilf i- O .' mi i;' iij o i generally prcfixMi lo '!ie Voci-i no. ti'rii'rlicd .tn />i'jeciivu I longing lo man, a Noun in iho Vocutivu cuse. " It is not mc, wliom he designs to hire," It a Neuier Pronoun, /s Ins a Nntmni ' ivn bc^nre a alter it, cxct^p' -vhen lollowe'l by an Ii-iin live, &i'. by Ui xxvii. jVot a Neifaiivo Alvo:b Jl'>ii>!'i ■.^ i;''!ii' p in 1 Objcclivo, govi-rnrd by 'he Ac'ive Vfih fteni;uis, bv \\ XXViii lif a ProiiiMin, Nuniiiifi ' i vo lo (!,f.i^ni. To hire Active Vci b in llie Inrtni'ivp ■.'ov<:rniiie me, (;i'*pr the V( to be.) in ihe Objeciivt", by H iic x.vvii. K . e Kll i)f:i3 ■•ii(>|iiicu iiits ftiiiwnCtt <; (U)H'ver •rlio, hH ' fie in !ir''ie4l of tlio Aiixiliariei « will be," and (tie Pirfof't PariKtipIo pudont'd. J\'ul is a Norra ive Adveib, pf.iccd Ixifori" the Verb, by Rule xxxvii. r^/i/css ii a Disjunctive ('oiijimc ioti. lii/ioit is a Neulor Vii!> (if lie fir-i t'oiij ig.iiimi, .tmiI sccoikI vuiie'y, in ihe Si»b- ji.iciive Mo)d, ilie P.e-ent Tfii-ifj, nnd n:;:rei;H wi'h its Nomi- naiive ' fic' li IS in ibo S'llii'iiii'i iv(( Mood, beranso it im- p'ies a fiihiro Fen-^o, «nd dcnoteH uttfe' trim y, signiljed bj lh« L'uiij jnciion * miies?,' agreuabljr lo Uulo xLvi, " Good works being ncgloclcd, devotion is false." Co nl n'ir!;a beitta nealectfd, lioi.ig inih pondeni oflh« rost of ibo .H' iiieiu:*', im ill:; r.iso ,Af)io!a:e uccDrdinf^ lo ihe ob- srrv itun milcr Rire i'i. Devniion i« a cotnt'iioo SubHianiive. (Urpriit the person, kc ) Is, it- a Vcib N. uer. FaUe la :ui Ai'jectiiL' in ijie PoMtive jdaie, «nd tiel )n;;s lo ilsSub*l»ii- live ' dcvyiioii,' underi'.ood agreeably lo kule xxii. " The Kmpcror UTarcus Anrclius, was a wise and virtuous Priticc." The is the Drfinite Ariclc. Kmjirrnr is a commnn Sub- etfini ve, the M iPCtilinc ^enrlur, and in the IVoininitlive case. JfiDi-iisJluieliuii, ij a proi)cr ninie cr Stihst am ive, and iii the. N'oniDa'ive ra-iC, becui-e ii is pm in app.i.-idoti with th« Sul)-ji.!ii! ivi; ' Kniperor," n^^r^eribly to ilio ol)-3tanf ive ' Prince,' uliioli is a coin* lujn Subsiantivo, and in ilie Noniinalive case, «» bemg nfter tn be agieeably to Rule xxvii. " The King wishes rnc to write them, that he has bound their enemies in chains." The i-j the Dt'Tiiine Ar'irlo. Kins i^ a common StibstaO' tvr. M'lshes is an Acivu Verb ol lio second vmiety of tb« lirs; (,\)niiii^alion, lli.il when s is ;icl.!t' I pnt^ an e ii,>fniij ii. arj •gtces With US Nuiuiuaiive Kingt uiiJ guverna iho Prououi) 9.10 StNTAX. « me in »he Obj<*ciive c»§e. Ti> irri75 ia «n Ac'.ive Veib of th« fi dt variety of ihe seconjary Conj^tjaiion, in llie Intini'iva Mood, 'hat oni!t9 to afn r it, but undersfood before 'be Pio- n. 'I tfiem agteoably \o Rule xbiii. That is a Copulat vc Conjunciion. He m a Pronoun in the N(jminaiive case, and •^iee:i viih has bound, \vtii< li is an Acive Verb of the fonr'h VJT-'ctv of ;ho seconlary Cunj'ig^tion, that forms its Pres-eni and Paal Paricipla iii nd. Their a Possessive Pronoun. jFiMf »nies is the Pl;iral of enemy, governi-d by bound in 'ha Objective. In a P,epcjriiiion goverjis chains in llie Olj:c iva case. •' To countenance persons who arc guilty of bad ac- tions, is scarcely one remove from actually comniitlinj^ tlicm." To counfenance pei sonn who are guilt ,1/ of bad actions. Is pan of a siiur.ce uch is liiu No:nin<'ive cise to ihe Verb • i-,' ugree.ibiy to Hu e v. Scarceli/ and actually nre Ad- vc;b3. One U a Numeral Adj^idive Hgreemg wrili the Substan- tive •reiiiove,' in ilie S'njiuljr, agrCf^bly 10 Rule xxii. Be- move is a common Substantive of tiie Neuter {^endor, the tlurd per.-on, Singuiarniimncr, and in tlie Nominative, a* beinjj af; er tlio Vetb to be, agreeably to liule xxvii. From is a Pieposi- tion. Committiua, a the Present Par ic pie of ihu V^rb Aciiva to • commit,* which \i a Veib of tfio third variety ot tlie fir.t Conjiiuaiioii, which double* tlie las! ('onsoiiant when t>»^ , cd, hv, are adde I. Thetn is a Porsotial Pioaoun, of the third per- •on, the Plural number, and m the Objective case, goveiiiCd b/ the Par ic'ple couimiiiing agreeably to Rule xxAui. " Let me proceed." Thi? ncntonce accord np; lo the idiom of tlie English, is in t!ie Tmpentive Mood, of the_^;*f person, and S;n;;ular number. Fome lrfeably to Rii'e xxx. and it govetued also b; Itt ia lb« Objeciivt, as ii it wa« a Substantive. SYNTAX. ^321 " Living expensively and luxuriously di^troys health." " By living frugally and temperately health is preserved." Liviitj expemively and hxi/rhvu'i/ is the Nominat'va cn"P lo ilie Verb de^irovs, ao.eo.il.ly 'o JJuIe v. Destroys i» a Verb of iho -econd viitieiy of ihe lirsi Conjugation, and'gOT- eiua liealili in the OUjec'ive case. i?7 //u/n;r fnii:al/}/ ami temperateh/ is a S'lbstantiv* phrase in the Ot.j>f ive c ive, governed "b/ the Preposition « Ijy,' according lo Itulo xxx ii. Tiie preceding specimens of Pnr?ing »nd Construciion, feeni sulTicien'Iy exp'icU ami 'iuersili^d, lo eligible (he learner to undersLinJ Ilio n;iiiire of ilii- emplomient ; and to ijujlify hirn to point out, and apply tha renianung Kule», principal or auboidinate. QUESTIONS IN PARSING AND CONSTRUCTION NECniSAUY FOR THE EXAMIXATIO.V OF PUPILS. Into how many parts is Grammar divided ? Of v.hat does Orthography, Etymology, Syntax, and Prosody treat .'' How many parta of speech are there, aud what are they ^ ARTICLE. What is an Article and how many are there ? What id the Definite Article ; what the Inde- finite .'' SUnSTANTlVE OR NOUN. What is a proper, common, collective, abstract, or verbal Xoun i How many Genders hnv(; Nouns ^ Is not tliP Feminine kno'vn from the IVIasculiuo by Uiircifui words us iv-iiig, Queen, iio. r S22 SYNTAX. i i -I''. i; Do not the terminntiong cs^, a, '"-', ''"r, rld'^fttn^ ina, also distinguish the Feiniiiine iVouj the JNlau- culino ? Are there not four cases in Nouus, and what are they ? Decline the Nouns man, fly, and fox, in all tha cases ? How is the Nominative known from the Voca- tive and Objective ? Is s the usual sijin of the Possessive case ? Have Nouns two numbers, the Singular and Plural ? Is the Plural mostly made from the Singular by adding s i How do Nouns ending in y alter a Consonant form the Plui-al ? Do some Nouns ending in/or /e make the Plu- ral in ves ? How do Nouns ending in s, ch, sh, o, and x, form the Plural ? Do some Nouns form the Plural in en, inc, and change oo into ce ; as ox, cou, tooth, Sic ? How do such Nouns as Ellipsis, Emphasis, In- dex, form the Plural ? Do not some Nouns forn- the Plural in a and i, as, stratum strata, bandit banditti ? Are some Nouns, as deer, sheep, used both as Singular and Plural ? Have gold, wheat, Stc. a Plural ? Have ashes, scissors, breeches, a Singular ? ADJECTIVE. What is an Adjective common or numeral ? How many degrees of c ■TKTAX. S2S gnlnrly formed from the Positive by cr and est, and more niid most { How are good, bad, less, far, S^c. compared ? How are Adjectives of three or more syHablcf compared ? rnorrou.v. What is a Perponal, Pos^prpsive, Relative, In- tnrrofralive, Destribulivc, Indelinite or Demonstra- tive Pronoun ? What are the Personal Pronouns, Sinf^ular or Plural ? Which are Masculine, Feminine and Neuter ? Arc there not fuur cases ux Pronouns as well as Nouns ? Decline the Pronouns I, thou, he, she, it, we^ ye, they, and who. How are the Nominative and Possessive cases in Pronouns known from the Objective ? Is wiio applied to things and which to persons ? Is what and tliiit applied (o both ? What sort of a relative is what ? Are such Pronouns as themselves, yourselves. Sec. Nominatives or Objectives i What are the Possessive Pronouns ? Wiiat are the Dibtributivc and Indefinite Pro- nouns I VERD. What is an Active or Transitive, Passive and Neuter Verb r What is a Defective Verb, and which are they? WHmt is an Impcrsoual A^erb, and how i3 it formed ? 224 BTIfTAi:. What is n ]\I.->nd, end how many Moods arc there, and what arc ilicir names r Wliat is (!ic (liiRrenco between Iho Indicativo and Subjunctive JMood ? What is [\ic. difuMence between the Indicativo and Potential JVIuod ? What is tho difrM'onco between the Imperativo and Infinitive Mood ? What is a Tense, and how many Tenses aro there, and what arc their names ? Have tho Indicative and Sjbjunctivc each six Tenses ? Has the Potential more than four Tenses ? Has tlie InfiiiiLive more than two Tenses ? !Iasthc Inii)crativc more than one Tenso^ ? What arc tli!i Auxiliary Verbs ? In what Tenses are do and did used ? What are the Auxiliaries used in tho Perfect and Piuj)erfoct Teases ot the Indicative and Sub- junctive ? What are tlic Auxiliaries used in the first and second Future Tenses ? What are the Auxiliaries used in the Potential Wood ? How is a Passive Verb formed ? What is the difrcrcnce between tho Imperfect or Present Participle, and tlio Perfect or Past 7 Is iu:^ always the termination of the Impertcct Paiticiple V In the first Coninirntion, does the first person of (he Imperfect Tenso, and Past Participle end always in ed 1 When a Verb ends ii» *, such as love, is the t omitted when inc^ is added ? STJITil. SS5 there, icativo icativo crativo scs aro ch bix 3 ? S ? ) ? Perfect id Sub- irst and otcutial rfcct or ipertcct orson of| always is the I When a Verb ends in ee, as decree, when vig it added is e omitted ? la e put bef.»re swljcns ia added, in such Verba as li'utcli, Lux, press ? Is the last (consonant doubled of such Verlis as di(Jcy, open, visif, when uii^-, cd, ^i.c. are added 7 fs the last Consonant (Inublrd of \'rrbs having the accent on the last s\ liable, as il,lir, cov.xpel, nnul, blut, when iii^, ed, is.c. aie added / Ildw do Ver!)s ending in y afier a Consonniit, as h-ij, form the Pa-st Tenses and Past Particij)le ? Do such Verbs as /fr/i7, hvrcd, jlee, lose an « or t ulion they form the Past Tense and Past Parti- ciple? Does the Past Participle of the secondary Con- juo-ation end in n, t, a; and k, and also d with ano- tiicr letter before it '-e names of persons and [places in the .Si;i.'.^ii!;ir or riiual .'' Is an Arlifld put before an Adverb ? I\Tiist a Verb r-^rrec with its subject or ncmina- [tivo, in niirnbtM- n,. 1 person ? Is the Infinitive !\Iood, or part ot a scntrnco [ever the Nominative to a Verb V Is it also sometimes the Objective (o a Verb ? When Nouns are coupled by Conjunctions, must |tne \ erb be Singular or Plural I Vv^hcn Nouns ate separated 1)V T^i.^junctivc Con- junctions, must tlie \'erb be Singular .' When Singu'ar and Plural Nouns are separated jy a Disjunctive, nus^t the Verb be I'lural.'' Wlicn a Verb is pre,:eeded by two Nominatives ). different persons, may it njrree with eithpr '' Is the Relative ever Nominative to a V\^rb ? 520 STNTAX. When aNonn conveys vluralily nr iinitv of idm mt.st it iKvvp a Singular or I'lut al Verb nnd Pronoun? Must Personal Pronouns nnd IlcUitivcs ngroo ^•ith lluir anlcccd..-nt3 in gcnucr, number, and person f* I\Iiist yr or 7,'.on bo followed by yon and yw nrc r';;.9 and thcsr , fovhier and loiter, useu ns Dcniotist ratives ^ Di Comparatives and the word other require thrill after them .' Do Suneriativop require n/and not other ? Is it pronor to say the weaker ohhc three .'' Is it nrop'^r to say the wisest of the tVrO ? l)oc^, one Noun govern nnolher, as also a PrO' nouna-id the Present Parti.;iple in the Possessive case t When lins tlie Verb to he a Nominative, am when an Obje.ciivc alter it .' Do Active Verbs govern the Objective case ' B^ s-^mn Neuter Verbs denoting motion, an^ cl'.anrre ndmit a Passive lorni ? Does one Verb govern another in the Infinitive' nf idrn, ron«)un? s ngroo •r, and d your, tivcs or lingular in place nc agree Numeral cans, a er, usee * require ^r? ICC .' ) ? so a Prn- ossessive itivc, am SVXTAX. 229 ca scase lion, an' What Vcibs liavc ihe to of the iMfinitivc omitted after ihcrn .'' Siioiild wor.ls liavc a due relation to cacli other 111 ])oint of time f •Must Vcrli.s of hnpinor, dcsiiir)f:r, intention, or comfuaiul, be followed by the Present or Perfect of tho lulinitivc .'' Do Participles as well as Verbs govern the Ob- jcc. .0 .' Arc Participles governed by Prepositions ? Ih the Present Participle sometimes clianf^od into a \oun with an article before it, and o/" alter it? Arc Advorbs placed mostly before Adjoctiv and Passive Verbs, but after Active and Neuter ? How arc Negative Advcibs mostly placed? Do two Negilivcs make an Affirmative and aro they ever improj)er ' Wlien motion to or from a place is implied, should ivhin-e or^l•!^l|lur be used.-' Do Adverbs qualify only Adjectives, Verbs, or other Adverbs ? Do Prepositions govern the Objective case ? Must particular Prepositions iollow ccrtaia words and phrases ? Before what Verbs is to elegantly omitted ? Do Conjunctions connect the same Moods and Tenses of Verbs, and cases of Nouns and Pronouns.'' What Conjunctions arc chiefly used with the Subjunctive IMood.'' When is the Indicative to be used, and when is the Sultjunctivo ? What aro the Conjunctions that pair ? Vrhcn things arc compared by as and than, how must the last Pronoun agree ? Infinitive CjO f YNTAX. w: Vriiot *:■^<^o. of the lust person should follow ai. p IiifCijocti>u I* ^ Wljat case should follow vo ? What is an IClliiisi^s ? Ili.w niust it ho r^ipi-rud in nurh ;i f^cntrncc a'* '• !)o not laduigf in f-uch i.vuv] auiusiiacnl " What word;^ inii:it he omiltid in this, '• He ia a good luuu, he is a \\i.-,c man .'" 11 Jl I'll iii S31 PaOSODV. PuosoDV consists of two parts, the former toachos thu triio Pi:()\uNciATio.N of words, compri- sinir, AccHNT, Q'ANriTv, IvMMiAsis, Pai'ses, and I'u.NXs ; and tlie latter the laws of \'liisjkicatio.v. OF ACCENT. Accent is the laying of a poculiar stress of the voice, on a certain lifter or svllahio, in a word, tliat it may be hotter hoard than the rest, or dis- t!:i;j;uis!icd from tlicm ; as in the word prcsitme, the stre^.-j of tlic voice must boon tiie letter n, and second syllable swnc which takes the accent. This is called the common accent. Accent is eilhrr Principal or Socon-Iary. The Principal Acccnl 13 that which ncuc-aarily distinguishoi one s^ll.ible in a word from tho rc=>f. Th-j Secondary Accent is that tutn* ul-ich wo rrny occisioniily place upon an .ihor syllable, be- fcides that which h:i9 iho principal accent ; lini-, ' Uomplaisant, caravan,' and ' violin.' h r.e Iroquentiy an occent on the firat' 08 well a? on ih^ 'i.-i F;-!!.ible, iinii:r!i a soinewliat leas forcible onr-. Tiie 9 1I1J0 m.iv bo observed of ' Kcp^rie-j, referee, pri- vatejr, doin ncor, &c." H it thou-h an accent ia allowed on the first syllable ot il.fj^o worf!.s, jr ,9 by no means necessary. Tliey may ail widi propriety bo prono'inced wi'li one accent on tl.e Ins', syllable. It may be funhor observed, ihiit thouoh the fvll:iblo on v\hich tho pnnc pal nrcenf is placed, is fixed and Cfir'ain, yet we ficfmcnily r;!.,!;ij il,o secondary principal, nnd tno piincipTl second iry : ili-:?. • L'Hrav.tn, comrdiisant, violin, repartee, referee, privntrer, dommcer,' mny nil huvc the preat- C- sin .;s on tl:c ti;>t, and lii; l-.si on ilu |,,-t pyil„blc, wi hout en.y v,(!'e.-i.-.e 10 ihe -'.-.r : n.y, i; ,iny be a.-it.i'td, iliat putting I'a pM^cipiI accent on ii-i- first .-yl :\li\,) of ihe^e words, r.iid m *0 H KJ II il 11 graving or dJBCordaiU ; but plucifig an uccent on tht 232 PROSODY. ! i- eecond syllable of the:e words wonin entirply df^range tliem, and produco jircat har.'hr.esd and dissonance. riio sameob- Ef-rvaiioiis m ly he app'ied to ' Demons:!- ition, provocaiion, navgalor, alii^alor.' and every similar woid in ihe lan;,'uage. Accent seems to be rrgnlated in a c;rcat measure by Etymolo;rv. In words fVoiii the Saxon, the ac- cent is gciitM-ally on the root ; in words from (he learned lanmiaii«s, it is generally on tlic terminati- on; and if to these we add the diiForent accents wo lay on some words to distinguish them from ethers, Ave seem to iiavc the three great princiiles of Accen- tuation ; namely, the Radical, the Tinnuuilional, and the Dlslindivc. Tlie Radical : as, " Love, lovely, loveliness ;" the Terniinational : as, " II;ir- mony, harmonious ;" the Diatiuctivc : as, " Con- vert, to convert." ACCENT ON DISSYLLABLES. Words of two syllables have necessarily one of them accented and but one. It is true, for the sake of emphasis, we sometimes lay an equal stress upon two successive syllables : as, " LJiiect sumetimcs; " but ..'hen these words are pronounced alone, tlioy have never more than one- accent. The word a- men is the only word which is proiiounccd with two accents when alone. Of Dissylb-ibles formed by afTixing a termination, the former sylla'olo is conunoniy accented : as, •' Childish, kingdom, actost, acted. toils(;me, lover, scolfer, laiicr, foremost, zealous, fulness, meekly, artist." Dissyllables formed by prefixing a ;-yllable to the radical word, have corinu'Ji.ly the accent on the latter : as, " To beseem, to bc.-^tow, to return, to revcng?, to revile." Of Dissyllnbles wb.icl'. nro at once Nouns and Verbs, the Verb has eommonly the accent on the latter, and the Isoun ou iliC formei is^iiuuig ; a^* rnosoDY. 233 ihfm, ob- me cation, ace. asure ic ac- ni (he iinati- ifs wo tlicrs, cccn- lonal, Love, Iliir- Cua- ono o f SP.iiO 3 upon incs; " tlioy (1 u- 01 ll t wo T ocom'nt, a C'.'i.iont ; to conti.'cf, a Cui.tr at. MTSi'^Ti^, a nr. ■nrc. scl'l ))c;iiinno Tlils '-ulc has liinny cxcr;-'.ions. Thoiigli Verba ct Xouns ' Deliiil.t, 0111 liavc liicii • rat o;i Ine loiTiicr olten i.avo it on tiio hit cv s\\]:'A)lc 110- S dcr oflanmin,',"-, must 1 onus winch in the common or- oUcn trans.'iiit their a-: avc ])!Tced(; \' urb.- :!'!'• inv invcrsf i- nled th. e.c:it to t!ie \ crhs they !or in, i iii; ' tiio ^ , ou n 1 '• to water co.Tospoud," must h Jo.Tpoiidciit ; ' vnter as th iuu: 1 liavo to '0 prcv'icclet Verb m a a c to \ [)nrsr!it. 3') tiiat y,o may concli.uic 1 the ?\ in " cor- clain. jriority to whe: » ver eros deviate Iruin t'lc ruh\ it i. iiance. a:K ■r.nerauy in th law of accent laUes puaeo. w'jru.j on y V, ncre a fcupei i;jr A I I T^ en, ( / abl o:-;ce aliov. :nig in 'raiiM V av'ou'. (.■V\ . 3 mil, CI- wiilow, wai tU', nc, a , '!^«y!iaa!o iMf ,!f lanuiii, ■H:)l)l rlKi 1)'^ i!). IJCS' i( r. ceuiu^c u-.;ent ti 'i UiCl ila; ) t3" > U !1 ■j ill t. I i vJ 1" have (h-.) aecent on the foi icr p vlh DisfvUahh tcrnnn; 'in: a con •I'ter. ant. ;>Vl^e. (' jca^i.- or na\ unr lation, : as, lover, kly, (ii[)ht:;ong in t!>e la^t ;• .^ ihil f>!)easo, e V ^u! or on 1! t \V;J C-.ii ):;i;nani Att Ciui : iho accent :'' except *' /^i-" ci->io ;" and sorae wovtis \v!ii-h have a i'l-cpcsitiua : a.', " i^x.tu^ide, iadentuic, iave^tuic." 1';i yllablrs rndi-ajj in •■■'c commonly ac(Mnt flic .lii-.l Jyll^blc ; C.S, •' i'Laitiid-, b.ubitudc, r.cti- liulc." Ti-l -".liable?; C!>dinp; in a:or, Isavc the accet-t them; . .:,; svllald.; : a's " Spectator, creator.^ i-,c. ' except, " O'l-atoi, senator, bavralor, Icgalur." Tr;.::vl:abbe' vliir'i have in i'le ndddic pyUable a (li'dithen;^ : a-., " i:ni!'av( -v : n-- •> v'owil !;e;bn tv/o C( nsariniils : as, " iJoin^^^ac, ciiii^iic;' the middle ryllablo. Trl -yliables that linve, tr.eir accent on the Ir-; Bvlluljle. 'a'-e eoir.mny.'.y Iheneb : v^, " Acquierr.-, ivpaitf*!, laagav.ia:' y' ov [\n-x a;a> wo-.a's fiMia-. d 1/ p.'elixinu oi:o or t'.vo -"^vlhibles to a l"a,'"; s\ Ihibiw ; u.^, *' l!i::;::::are, cvciciuj^e, uad'jn-:.tc/' •^ ai.^-" accci.i rilO: vPT. 235 nation, iC rtuii ■ f '.Ucin- cnliug, " Ar- nccrnt i nor: CO, •ent on " and O.'C l^V J specify, .at tlio :o f.rit aC'"f";t cr:v.i on 1 . v.s,C . ) > •llablp ^ 1 I.o[or3 ihr. Irst liii'^i'fi'i liii'.'J by ' . . ■ 'iw I u^i ACCENT 0\ POLYSYLLABLES. Pol'ysvilaljicp, or wf.rd., of more than three syllable?, gcncially Inilnw .he accent of the words Irom uluch th;^y are ticrivotl : as, "Arrogating, confincncv, incontinently, comrnciidable, commu- nicablcnr.:.s ;" liioii;^Ii in some instances, they do not follow this rule : a.s, " commend," is not accent- ed the same : ;;s, " recomnieuu.aiua." V» ords cndiiiir iii alar, have the accent general- ly on the peniihi.'ii.itc or last syllable but on° ; as, •' Libonitor, emond.itor, gladi.itor, equivcc.stor, nre- varicator.'" Words ending in !c commonly have the accent on tho lu-st syllni'lo : as, "Amicable, despicable ;" u!.!osd tbf; second yy'labie has n A'owel before two Consonants : as, " Combustible, condenmable." ^VoIds ending in ian, io.i, ons, and /;/, gij, and 1)",', ( 7, iiave their accent on tho aijlepenultimate, or iusi sylkibic b.it two ; as, " Plusician, salvation^ victoiio-.:?, activity, longevity, aaliolugy, astrono- li.y, emergency." ■Words which end in ia, in, cnl, iai, phy, {yif have the accent on the antepenult : as, n>id (j. '• {:n( jch);) dia, pnr.ctilio, desiotical, characteiisti- c-d. ai'illeial, maitial, [diilosopiiy, geometry, soli- loij^iy/' 'ill' Rules rp^perting AcceT. aro not ndvanced .i3 conj- picto or inljiliblo. 'Jfifv ere r.;:i.cr jiiopusod ^i> utcliil. Al- n.OJt c-cfj li,ii^iir,3e 1..1S lis cxorjijons, anil in Edl'IsIi as ;ii u•^'^^ .orijijei, inucli m.,rA ho Ic.incd by c:;anip!e audaullioril)'. CF QUANTITY. The quantify of a syllable is that time which ia occur;v;d in [.-i-onoi'.neing it. It u considered ad I^'iig or I I,( it. A s'.lbiblo !'; \o'^^T-. v^hcn t!?o n"eenf if! on f'so V u.vtl, V. hieh occanious it to be slowly joined in pro- 23G raosoPY. i 'I inmciation with the following letters : as, " Fa'.!, bale, mood, house, featu/e." A Fylla'olc is short, whrn the accont is on the Co!!::? )na:it, which occasioas the \'owel to he quick- ly j.^'inod to tlio succeeding letter : as, " Ant, huii- nct, hunger." A long syllahlc generally requires douhio the time ol'a short one in p!:Ki)uncing it: thus, " IVjate,' and " Xotn," s'luuh: ho pronuuuct-d as slowly again as •' IMtit," and '' Not." Unaccented syilui)i;;s arc generally short : as, "r-lailre, h;''':l:t::ss, sinner." J3it to this rule there arL- uiiriy (exceptions : as, '• i^l-^", i'mIo, g;\ngrC'nc, uaijUre, toresiaii:?. ^ic. When the acceut is on a Con-on:i:it, the sylla- ble s ol'tcn nv)re or loss short, as it cii.'ls with a sin- gh) Consonant, or wiiii niore than one : as, " sLaUy, robher, persist, in' tchl^^ss." \Vhi-ntho accen' is on a Soini-Vowc!. the time ol'tho svilahle innv be protra-!td, !py .!\v( lilng u;.ua the ;:euii-vow i'.A^ r;;]e Mceiii » lo Ijo, " Di<^r^/^i- on, battalion, giadialor, n-iional, and ration;:!." 'ind. All V'owrh^ that inimediately precede tiio tcr-iunations il^ and ./^', arc pronouuced lung : a=, rnosoDT. 237 hull- Ill V ) " Deify, picfy, spontaneity." Rut if one Conson- ant precedes tlicsc terminations, every preceding nccnitrd Vowel is slioit, except v, and the a in '; scarcity," and '• rarity ;" as, " Polarity, scve- M!y. divinity, curiosity, impunity." J'lven Jt before two Consonanld contracts itaolt' : as, " Curvity, ta- citurnity." 3rd. Tho Vowels under the principal accent before tii, terminations 'c and i(,Y;/, preceded by a sin^rlo Consonant, arc pronounced short : tllus, ••Satanic, pathetic, elliplic. iiarinonic," have tlie Vowel sliort ; while, " Tunic, runic, cubic," have the tho Accented X'owcl Ion;: : and " Fanatical, p')ctical, levitical, canonical," have the Vowel short; but, "Cubical, musical, Stc." have the m loner. 4tli. The Vowel in the antr^pulti.mato svliablc of words with the following endings, is always pro- nounced short. Loqny ; as, obloquy. Stroplic ; as, a[»n.slri>piic. Meter ; as, barometer. G Gonal ; as, diagonal. Aorous; as, carnivorous. as, somniibrous. as, superfluous. rCM'OUS Fhjous Fluent ; as, nielliliuent. Parous ; as, oviparous. Cracy ; as, aristocracy, my ; as, cosmogony. Phony ; as, symphony, ixomy ; as, astronomy. Toniy ; as, anatomy. ; as, antipathy. PatI " c.\- ^ho!t : 'j he OF EMPHASIS. Py Emphasis is meant a stronger and fuller sound of voice, by whicli we dislinguish some words, or words on which we design to lay particular stress, and to shew hovv' it ailects the rest of the sentence ; as in the words practise, and preach, in this sen- tence, " Practise virtue, ratlier than preach it." ^ On the riglit mannijnrner.t of tho EnijihaFis depends the life HronuiUM.itiin. If no eii.plin.sis he jilaced on niiy word, nol di.lf ot i,o Icwcm ilnu fuiir i! tier- eiit acccpalions, iicodn ;; as tl.e cmpli.ir^is 18 (IilT.f. i, |y plitccd on ilie wor.is. If it be p:.;!v>uucea thus: " Do .(/,)« rido to town 10 (hy ?" TI.t n.nsivor rn^iy nilurally be, " No, wesord a servant in cwr ?:.,:,»■!." I: thm : " Da \0J riir 'o unvii to- diiy r" An.i\v!;r, " No, v,-c iir.'Mi 'i 'o walk." " L'l yon im; lo lown to d.iv r" " No «o ri :e iriio il.o coiMit y." " yo'i riiJe lo town to il n/ ?" '• No, b'.it «c slia I o mo.io In l:Ui; nnnin r i.T ; ' !f;;'i!i I;. -COtU; C, tli CO nil I 0\\ :rl :-, ofaii ospris-i.iii ol uii drpor. J- on t!;- tri;p:iit.c W) ■-■ m\y p'f.-cri: to tli<; iieuors qiite dill cv.' v;^^ws oi Hit i-=i,>: BoiUiinu.il, by p'.vi- nj tiic ciDiiUasia (.' n'rcutly. As accent (lij^iifies tlic ?ylI;i!)lG on which it is laid, socniphariirf cnuuhlcs t!ic wdd lo which it b;^- liiniTs. Wer;; there no acconl^, word.^ wouM I'C r::- .soiv^ed into tlirir urio;inal syllable:; ; wore tlicrc no Cin')na;;!s scntencot^ would be rc3f)lved into their oii- gin'.il uords ; and ia this cari>> the l;earcr woiild ho iiadei- l!ie piiinfnl necesr^ity, i:-"' ofinakin- out the words and afterwards their meaning. Tlie emphasis olten lies on the word that aslis a question : a.s, " Who said so .'-' " Whm will he eeme ." " Wlrit shall I do :'" " Vriiilher shall I jio .^" " Vv'hy dost thou weep .'" And vhon two ward:^ arc set in con- trast or orposltiou to one another, they arc both cm- pliatic : an, 1 lo is tho hji-ant not the/(..".'n-, of his l)':!ople ;" " Ilis subjects/tf/r him, but th-y do not Iji-r him." S rno sentences are so lull and conipre- heusivo that almost every word if, emphatic, as i;i that pathetic cx^JOotululioii in Ezekiei, " Why uiH ye die." Emphasis has been divided into simple and com- plex, and superior and inferior. The meaning nt such divisions »eem.s to be chiefly, that emp.'a.KUi may bo stronger or weaker. The following sentence contains an "example of simple cmiphasis : " Ai:.l IVathan said to David, Thou art the man." Ti.o emphasis on thou, seems only to point out the mean- ;.... ^r*U« r- ■,nnlr«3f I-liit iM till,.; eontrnnr* '' \\\i" ,1 3 To pivB D.) y >u nr ^i H'ei- ly [iliici-d I riiio 10 we PCI:(1 IDWll to- vou r.d.: I ( I). 10.: o-.v." I I I 1 lily :•. ; r I v. e ich It H h if, bo- ll i.'c r:}- licrc ivi icir oii- oiild he out the iiiphasis Dii : H.S, " Wlnt hy ; inca::ii!:r can be pointed out, i'tf^phaGi^ \\n\A hv the rc<;iil:Uor of rr.antity ; an cx- a:aple will niaiic ihi ^ evident. Mcascd til. in, r!;: ;i hGar — an.l learn the secret power, Uc. Pleased thoo, thuu slialt hca:-— and thou alone shalL hear. In the Hr.-^t of tho?;o instancrr- the worf\q pleased aad hear being eojually emphatic are bet!'. Jorf, v.hih,tt!>c two intcrii]edi;-.tc word.s iliCi: and ,s;■^^'//bein"i.'• Iupidly passed eve. ^s the sense deinand,^ arc redu^ cod to a t-hort (inantity. In the second instance, the word ilioj !)y bein^; {'■::. ine:^'i iiiiport.-.nt, obtains ho chief or rather the s( Ic en/p!ir.:ii.s, and tluis it is not only re-lored f) its naieral hjng 5!, " lie slnll i',;crea.^c, but I shall ciccrcaso ;" " There ii u uhlcrcncc Lctv.ccn 210 PROSODY. giving and fnru'win^r ;" "In this ppocics of compo- sition° />.'(nfsi!)ility id inncli niorn cs-cntial than /;ro- babilitv." In thoso rxaiiiph'.-! the cinpliusis requires tho accent to ho ])iaccd un s; llahks to whicli it docs not cointnimly hi.loii^. In order to ac(|uire t!io proper ninnn;rcmcnt of the ouiphasi-s the -veat rulo is that the speaker or reader study to attain a ju.^t cone,e[)ti m of the tbrec and spirit oVlhc senliments whirli h(; i-. to pronounce. It i^ proper to caulion the reader avi>:'urable -pace of time : as, " Ho died for our siiiJ— Ibit ho rose again from tho dead." There arc two kinds of Pauses : first, emphatic pannes ; and ne\t jnich as make the distinction of sense. An cmi-hatic pause is made after something i has been said of peculiar moment, and on which wc^ desire to fix tiie licarer's attention. Such pauses have the edect of a stron^^ emphasis, and arc subject to the same rules, c.-pecially to tiio caution of no' rcneatinu theiu too f;-e(i!iently. For as tliey c\cite une.nmmTn altention and raise expectation, iftlic iiaportance oi'tiie maltcr is not fully answerable to such expeeliilion, they occasion disappointment and diV-nist. P>ut the r.iost rre.quont use of pauses is to mark the divisions of tho sense, and at the same t-mc allow t!in speaker to drau- liis breath ; and the proper and delicate adjustment #f such pauses is one of tho most nice and difficult articles of delivery. In pI! readinir and public spcalcini? the rnanagcmcn: of the breath requires a good deal of care, so a= PROSODY. 241 an prO' cr;iiircs it docs icnt of i aU(!i" or c ibrcc lounco. CMTOr of I) crowd •ou'tliiif; Nvliicli, 10 such ^ arc a (1 some- do died ad." mphaticj iction of! motliing liich wcl 1 pauses : subject of not y c\citc 1, ifthe •able to lent nnd sps is to he pnme and the :3 is cnc delivery.. ajTcmciit . so as not to obliire us to divide words from one another which have so intimate a connexion, tliat they ought to be pronounced with the same breath, and without the least separation. INIany sentences are miserably manj,'lcd, and the Ibrcc of the emphasis tutally lost, by the division being made in the wrong place. It is a great mistake to imagine that the breath must bo drawn only at the end of a period, when the voice is allowed to fall. It may easily be gathered at the intervals of the period, when the voice is only sus- pended for a moment ; and by this management one may always have a sufllcicnt stock for carrying on the longest sentence, without interruptions. To render pauses pleasing and expressive, they must not only bo made in tiie right place, but also accompanied with a proper (one of voice, by which the nature ol these pauses is intimated ; much more tlian by the length of thorn which can seldom be ex- actly measured. Sometimes it is only a slight and simple suspension of voice that is proper; sometimes a degree of cadence in tho voice irf required ; and sometimes that peculiar tone and cadence which de- notes the sentence to be linished. In all these cases we ought to regulate ourselves, by attending to the manner in which nature teaches us to speak, when en- gaged in real and earnest discourse with others. It is a general rule, that the suspending pause should bo used when the sense is incomplete, and the closing pause when it is finished. Dut there are sentences in which though the sense is not completed, the voice takes the closing rather than the suspending pause ; an:l others in which the sentence finishes by the pause of suspension. Tho closing pause must not be confounded with the fall of the voice or cadence, with which many readers uniformly finish a sentence! Nothing is more destructive to propriety and encrfry than this habit. The tones and inflections of the voice at the close of a sentence, ought to be diversi- fied according to the general nature of the discourse 0|-,,1 *I,ji tl I _ .. 4 .• _ 1 . „ . ' uiiu isjv i;asiiouu4« oUiibiriiCiiOa ailu iitcdtiiug oi the U 212 rnosoDY scn'op''e. F;) nln.:t> nn.rratini.' n!id cpporinllv hi nrgii- inciiti.);^, it is i .'•|iici!tlv more j»r{)j)('r toiiti-olhe voice tiiiui let it (all at t^ie ctid of.-' sentence. Soino sciitc/i'- 'H -re so c'ip-trnctcd tli;it llir last words re- quire a «(riiii^-( r cmpiiasis tlii,ii niiyolilio preceding, Aviiile oiJH IS adiait of hcii);^ clo'^nl with a soft uud gcntl."^ sound. Vriirrc there is nothing in the senso uiiich ri-Tjiires ihc last sound to he «:lr\at<.'d or em- phatic, ; I « T. >>• !a!!, sullicicnUo bhcw that the sense is lilu^jllcd, will be piopcr. OF THE TONES OF ELOCUTION. T )nes ore di.Tcrent both from oninl)npi>i and pnuscs, consistinj; in the iiio(huiitii)n of the voice, f'le notes or vr.iat: ns of so'ind, which wc employ in the expression of our ;-entiincnts, i Accnnf and Q.inr,t''y nfTorf t!ie due prommc'.tion of worJ!<; Empiiasis ni.d pau'^es ile ine.iiiir^ of tin m ; Lu' 'J'ciks aie va.i- ous according lo tl.o rcM.'lin;,'-- of 'lie spi.)kfjr. l-luipliiisis affccls part:c!i!ar v.cr.'s nnd phra-cs s^l<\< ■' dcjrre of toiic or inflecti- on of the voice ; bii! t..n"-i proierlvpo cal'td, .Tfl''ct Eeiiieiices, paragroplis, a:iJ eomcumcb evtii ihts whu.c oi a didcourse. To shew the upc nnd noocsslly of Tones, we need only ohseive, tlint the mind in corinniimcating i its ideas, is in a continnid slate of aclivily, emotion,] or agitation, from tlie dillcrent ePfocts, whitii those ideas prMdu(;e in lite spca!>cr. TSow the end oi'such communication, bc-inp; not merely to lay open the ideas, hnt also ihcdi'reront feelings which they ex- cite in him who ut crs them, there must be other sicns than words, to manifest (hose feelings ; as words uttered in a nionolonoiis manner, can repre- sent only a similar folate of mind, perfectly free from all activity or emotion. Tlie whole Animal world express thoir various feelings by various tones. But the nature of man, from the superior rank that lie holds, are in a high dep;ree more comprehensive;; ae there is not an act of the mind, «n exertion ot ihe fancy, or an emotion of the heart, which has not its PROSODY. 243 1 Jirrrll- :i'0 ll»C Soino )i(ls rc- loft jukI (; sonso or cin- ic sense Ri^^ and Q voico, employ of words; » aie vai- { sis affects r inflect:- ■eineiices, urse. nes, we nlcating jinolion, L-h those I oi'such pen the iliey ex- be other gs ; as I re pre- roe from al world 3S. Bui that he lensive ; )n of ihe )S not it3 pccL'liartono, or note of the voice, by which it is to be expressed ; nnd which is suited exactly to the do- grco of internal feclin;;. It j.s chiefly in the proper use of these tonns, that the life, spirit, beauty, and hurniuiiy of delivery coiisists. The first thing to be considered in Elocution, then, IS I,i,I,'c!ioH of the voice, liinection, is tha varying of (his (one in discourse, from one note to anotlicr. The variiition of tho voice from a lower to a higher nolo, is callod (lie nsiii;r inlleclion. That irom a hinhrr lo ;i lower is called tlie/«///-iM- innecti- oa. Tiiese iiu'li'-iions may be undeiatood'tVoai tho luliowing examples : 1st, The Wsujo- inflection, " So then you will go '" 2nd. Tlie fulling inncclion, " When do you mean to go t" It woiiKl appear that questions that may be an- swered willi /;rs or ;r,;^, Climax, anUduui.c, Jl-'i I'h.ialin.i, and LiU n-c^^dlian, claira particular ailcutioii when spol\cn. In this sentence " lie is of pure Roi>i,i.n blood,— I am of mean fori eij,ai extract ion ; Ilo is a Fatriciuu,--I am a Ple- beian ; lie is rich, — I am poor." The opposition of ineaniniT requires lliat the lirst part of the Antithe- sis should be pronounced in a hi^'her tone than the •second. The Clim.ix retpiiies the voice to rise, as ifby steps, as in this passage, " From Tribune ha was made Co'isul, from Consul Dictator, from Dic- tator Emperor." The Anticlimax requires the voice both to rise and fall, as in the following passage, ''From Tribune he was made Consul, from Consul Dictator, from Dictator l^mperor ;— but he shall now be degraded lower than the meanest slave." The voice J(///s from the words " but he shall, kc.'» In Exclamation the voice is raised at the pronounci- ation of any Interjection— or ISoua when "one is un- CM rnosoDV. i> IHi tlcrstoovl : a-?, " O Death ! wliorc ifl fl\y sling f O Grave ! wl. ore is t!i) victory !" In liilcrro^alion llic voice rises ot the end dl' a qiiostioii — hut la low in the answer : as in the follouin;;, " Will you base- ly betray } our country ' Will \ ou .sell your precious liberty lor gold r ISo my noble Citizens, you never will." An extract from tlio brautil'iil lamentation of David over SanI aii«l .lonatbiin, may serve as an ex- am|»le ot' a rompnsitiun rcipiMin;; vaiiity ot tones : " 'J'hc beauty o! Israr] i, s!;iiu upon thy lii^Ii places. How are the ini-hty lallen ! tell it not in(;atli ; pub- lish it n it in tin- streets oi'Askalou ; lest the dr.ugli- ters ol'tbe riiiii^tines n joiee ; lest the dau^Hitersof the uiicire.umei?e(l iiiiiiii[>b. V." imuti! aiii-^ ol'Cilboa let there be no dew nor rain upon 3 ou, nor lield:? ot ollerin-s ; lor there lli(> shield of the nii^bly was vibly cast away ; The shield (d'S.iul, as thonr;h he liad not been anointed with oil." 'J'he fust oflhcso divisions expresses sorrow ai.d lamentation ; there- fore the note is low. 'i'hc n \t contain a si irited command and should be pronounced much l)ij;her. The other sentence in which ho n)akes a pathetic address to the mountains where his friends were slain, must be expressed in a note quite dili'erent from the two former ; not so low as the first, nor so hi"h as the second, iu a manly firm and yet plaintive tone. In the for(>going examples, the proper variation of voice seems not very dilitcult to be discriminated, but in many impressive pieces accurate directions fur inflection ol" tones cannot easily be given, as in the following piece. " Rut O how vast must be the Saviour's love ! How great beyond the reach of human thought ! Who from Philauthrophy alone did leave, A throne of Glory i^or the pangs of Death. rn - A'. r^ I ^r- c^ir\l1nra AT fur in Am fnr pnpmiea To more than die, — to bear the ivratk divine, sling f njjalion 1 is low u base- rccious u never ition of ; an ox- totu's : placf's. I ; pub- tUnigli- TROSOnY. 245 Till Xafure sutVvr thro' her wide domain. Now aJamantinc rocks arc rentnsundor, And now Enrlh trembling to her centre shakes ; And now tb,; splendid Sun himself, grows dark • And oven the lJcu,l, whom Death had firmly bound' In his low dungcuii of the loathsome (iravc, Thousands of years, awake to second lile, lireak their strong bonds, and issue from the i omb. ' liters of rCilboa licUls of Illy was oiii^li he of these ; there- spirited 1 hijiher. pathetic ids were different , nor so plaintive v^ariation minatcd, ;tions for as in the vc : ught ! iin<3 ae. Tn the DbDve ver-es the Pathetic, the Wonderful, nn.) (ho Tp-r.o.eHublime. are equally blemlod, .nJ rcrn.i.c a variety of on... ,0 .ecte ti.e.n. Perhaps diir-rmt Oraror. mi.-hf .p^= Mamie then, or J:ff-^oM-ly an,] yct\v,ih ihe «an,e"i;nprol:ivo Jirect'! d Medi ation on Djad,, and Cato's 8o!ilo.j.,v. arc also e.v-.u,pc-3 whu-h d,(r..cni Oraio.. ar« kno-.vn to have .pokoa o;.l;(t"i.ily, jet with the aame animated itnp.c-^sion. There is no compo-Qition in the Engi^^^h Inng-ii/re that re. qiiTC. such .Iiver«,li.,l tune., as Collins's OJe or. the Passions. \\hoevfir ivould wi^h fo bo f.iily acq tainted with ail ih tie;, of IiinecMon, s.hoiild particularly sstudy this Ode Hy pr( perly s^mlyin- -his. nn I other pieces of merit, the correct an n.vu,,.! lan^ua^e of the emolton.i, t7i:.y not be so d.t'icult t e vune- 0- and o If vvo enler into the spirit Lvaiia liid, a-= in.iny iiny i.nag iie. 01 the au'hor-s seiU!menf«, lis well as into the ineani.i- of hi# w.j.'.ls, wc iha!) not fail to deliver the word lOli id ill piopeil) varied A Monotonv, or uniform Cadence, is in gen-nl (o bo avruol. Jl,^ b.;st way to correct it, is freq.je-u 'y to recito I'l ro. n u.i.ch aiUtlhescs abound, and ar^^umtniaiive pisces ^'1' > I'ilorogntii-es, or o.:irne,i exclamution. n.tiho.iM, a •I'll .MoKoiony is to be avoided, yet a pi.^n .imp'e n.ir.a; vl-, ii o::.M, belter spoken in the spme ;one. liian by fuui.,!=-u .vmp'.A ol luro3ir:(..,! enibdiishmeats, of which the siuiphcly ol ihe fcubjecl will not admit. J Ve ■number OF VERSIFICATION. ersification is the arrangement of a certain and variety of syllables according to certain U2 246 PROSODY. Vorse ig cither with, or without rhyme. Vdrse without rhyme is culled blank verse. Rhyme is the correspondence of the last sound ol one word lo the last sound or syllabic of another. Feet and Pauses arc the constituent parts of Verse . OF POETICAL FEET. A certain number of syllables conneMcJ, form a foot Tlu'v are called fat, because it is by their aid, that the'voice, as it were, steps along through the verse, in a measured pace, and it is necessary that the syllables which mark regular movement ol the voce, should in some manner be distinguished from the others. This distinction was made auiong the Ancients, by dividing their syllables into long and short, id ascertaining their quantity, by an exact proportion of time in sounding them ; the long bein-r to the short, as two to one ; and the ong syllaTilo^ bein"- thus the more iinportauv ^narked the movement. hx English, syllables are divided mto accented and unaccented ; and tlie accented sylla- bles bein-^ as strongly distinguished lioin the unac- cented b'^v the peculiar stress of the voice upon thein, are cquafly capable of marking the movement, and nointin-T out the regular pnc^s of the voice, as thn long syllables were by their quantity, among the ancients. r>v hnving both quar.tity and accent, we have nii th'^'anclcuts had, aud romethi'-j which tlx-v ha' PROSODY. 241 Vdrse sound i; lother. I| Greece en joys es when cni and I), falso eep nud I) Poetry and old arts of , form )y their hrough cessary mcnt of I Tuished among ito long liy an he long he long •kcd tlie ed into d s}lla- 3 unac- n them, it, and as thfi ong the \!C nave hcv haJ not. We have in feet duplicates of each foot, yet wiih such a difference, as, to lit them for different purposes, to be applied at our pleasure. All feet used in English Poetry, consist either of two or three syllable,-., and are reducible to nine kinds ; four of two syllables, and five of three, as follows : DISSYLLABLE. A Trochee - u An Iambus A Spondee A Pvrrhic o y TRISYLLABLE. A Dact)l - O O An Am[)hibrach c o An Amj)himacer - « - An Anaprcst o o — A Tribrach w o y A Trochee has the first syllabic accented, and the last unaccented : as, ' Ilald'ul, pottish.' An Iambus has the first syllabic unaccented, and the hist accented : as, ' Bo/;'«(/, consist.' A Spondee has both the words or syllables ac- cented : as, ' I'Tilo moon.' A Pyrrhic has both the v-ords or syllables un- accented : as, ' on the lull tree.' A I>actyl has the first syllable accented ,-^nd tlic two latter unaccented . as, ' Labourer, possible,' An Amphibiach has the first and last syllable unaccented, and the middle one accented ; as, ' Ueiightful, domestic.' An Amphimacer has the first and last s)llable3 accented, and the middle unaccented : as, ' Rela- tive, ni'igazltie.' An Anapocst has the two first syllables unac- cented, and the last accented : as, ' Contravene, itcquit'sce.' A I'ribrach has its syllables unaccented : as, • I' .» .^ - .1 „.. j!.„ 5t form, it consists of five I imli ;;j ,•:. ; l;'.il ii oJea admi's of older feet inteiruixed, purlicuhrly Tiochc':", to prevent moiio'ony. The fiClh form of tlie lamb'c is commonly called the ^.lU-x(i:!'!ri!i'' meusuro. If cc)ii sists of si\ Iambus- es, as in the last iiiie oftlio following vcrs-es : Bit fiK'd his wordhis saviii-r pow'r rri'pins ; Thy r.'alai for ("vor lasts, lUy own 3r>:s.-'iah reigns. Tlie A'e\i!i !ri;,e i^ rireiv n-'.l, Ivil. in lu'ir)'c rlnme, ani,' when u>(;:! ?nai.i:j!y and \v,i!i j i.'^ iumi', occ.irioiis an jgieea- bie varitjiy. Wc iiPt-'iI not nmu'o o'hcr < onibiiri! ons of lunb^c measure, as of lour ar:(! ih', te ic t. ' ii.td c-aiuiuii uitift ; ui of four and four icet c'jilcii lo;.^^ nulio. T,'<)chc Vir->c i", of several Icniiihs. The first form of the Trochee consists oftw feet : as, r^.- *i. r ... - - :., 13; a fountain. PftOSODY. U9 I The second form consists of three Trochees : as. Or, where Hebriis wanders, Rolling in meanders. The third consisis of four Trochees : as, War he sung is toil and trouble, Honor but an empty bubble. The fourth Trochee is composed of five feet: as, All thut wiilk on foot or rTde In chariots, All that dwell in palaces or garrets. The fifth form consists of six Trochees : as. Ofi a mountain, stretch'd beneath a hoary wTlloM', Lay a shepherd swain, and view'd the rolling billow. Jimph'ibrachic Verse seems chicjlij of four different lcu;^lhs. The shortest verse is of one foot : as, Disdaining, Complaining. The second form consists of two feet : as, Despairing confounded, With furies surrounded. The third form consists of three feet : as. She lives on the banks of Killarney. The fourth and longest form of the Amphibrach consists of four feet : as. Alone to the banks of the dark rolling Danube. ^nnprrslic Verse is of different lengths. The shortest must be a single Anapaest : as, But In vaTn They com plain. 250 PROSODY. ''!■'■! ^ jii « *'• r:i The second form is made up of two Anapaests : But Ills couiMgC 'gall fail, For no arts could avail. The third form consists of three Anapecsts : as, Oyc woods spread your branches apace ; I would hide with the beasts ol tlie chace. The ionrrcst Auai)iust consists of four feet : as, INIay 1 guv'rn my pfissTons wTth "j-bsr-lute swfiy ; And grow wiser and better as jiie wears away. The shortest Amphiniaccv in Eu;^Hih, consists of one Jout : as, Tuimilt cease, Sitik to peiico. FTrcs that j^loW, Shrieks of woe. The second form consists of two Amphimacers: as, L('t oTir love consiiint h;' ; I will piov ;, true to thee. There is not perhaps in Eiii^lish an example of verse of this measure ot" morelhrai two feet. The Spondee, Pyrrhic and Tri!)rach, form no, entire verses, each by themselves, but mixed willi other feet, diversii'y tlie mcusure, and a l*yrrliic in one part of a verse, may be compensated, by a Spondee in another part. The same observations may be mi.^'^ of the Dactyl, which seems to be chlclly used, mivcdwilh other feet ; for entire verses cc ^.posed of Dactvis are not common in the English language. Above we have given examples of the diffcren; measures of verses in their simple form ; but tlu v aro canable of numerous variations, by the intermix' tare of diilcrentfcet, as in the following instances. paests : ;ts : as, :e ; ace. ■cl : as, wfiy ; way. 's of O'.lt PROSODY. 251 macers: implo of; form no xcd with rrhic in J, by a ^ of the vcd with 'Duct vis differen! but tluy ntcrniix" anccs. TJp'm a mount aTn, Beside a fountain. In this couplet, the fust foot is an Iambus the second uu Ampliibrach. ' In the days df old, Fables plainly told, Tlic first foot is here an Iambus, thu last an Ampiiiaiacer. RGstlrss mortals toll for nought. In this verse, the first two feet are Trochees the last an Amphiinacer. ' Then his com age 'gvn fall him. In tliis verse the first foot is nn Anaptcst the second a Pyrrhic, and the la ;t a Trochee. ' O dismal ni;?;ht she said and wept, O night oi' [;ain and sorrow. In these versos the first six feet arc lambusos the last an Ampliibrach. ' Above though oppr'st by my fate. In this verse, the two first fcQt are Amphibrachs tiie last an Iambus. ' Thr. ArchnngH's frr.mpa soruHls solemn on h?^h- Avitli bodies immortal the saints mount the sky" ' Here the three first feet are Amphibrachs, the last an Iambus. Ah mo ! I've lost my true love, JMy Phillida adieu love. The two first feet here, arc Iambuses, the last is an Amphibrach. Thr fair Malvina, weeps, While she sings the death Of Oscar. In these verses, the first line is three T.nmlv.'.sps he la&t line is iour Trochees. I a-,n pnosoDY. Shr turn'd Iut round Cnd round, ghc wivs dlslractrd. She knew not what she said, Nor what she acted. In these verses, the first foot is an Amphibrach, U,e second an Amphi.na.er, the thud an Iambus. and the last an Amphibrach. He will anticipatc-squander and dissipate, AH vou have hoarded with an.xious care ; And iu h^ooHshness,--caprice and muhshness, Char.'e you wUh avarice,-spurn.ng your prayer In U.ese verses the first and third lines conta.r, each threToactyls :-the second and fourth hues contain each thr^e Daciyls and a Spondee. MnrP Pxamn!o3 of different combinations of feet, migi: K hulT e seem -.nicient, to .how .1:. variety of mc. L^eT thattVten mt.oduccd into EngU.h Rhyme. Blank Verse is generally supposed to be tl,e s.me measure as Here c rhyme, v.z. five lambuse, bm to Ptevcnt monotony, and improve the me b o hei bet are often introduced into it, in grcale \ fhnn Is nenerally done in Heroic rhyme ^ \xZl X rftLt-olloJing examples and observa- lions: are as applicable to it, as to Blan. \erse. Frivours to n.-inc to Till she smiles extends, The first foot is here a Trochee, and the res Iambics. Trochees in many instance-, seem to imprcvi Heroic rliyme more than any other feet. 'Tls Heaven itself that pGints out an hereafter. The last foot here is an Amphibrach, lyiurmuruig and with him fled the shades of nig'ii The firs" foot in this line is a Dactyl, the rCM idulOiCo. PROSODY. 253 hibrach, Iambus, te, 5 bness, r prayer/ 1 oontairj rth lincsl feet, migl: :ty of mea be tlie ambuse; 3 melody n grcalc : rhyme | 1 obscrva-i V erse. nds, d the resi imprcv reufter. 3 of nig'ii the rcs Tnnnmerable before the Almighty's throne. Here m the second foot we find a Tribrach. That on w(-ak wings from far, pursues your flight In this line the first foot is a Pyrrhic, the se- cond a Spondee. Sc'etlw' bold youth strf.in up tho threat 'nlng steep. In this line, the first foot is a Trochee, the se- cond a genuine Spondee by quantity, the third a bpondee by accent. O'er many i frozen, many a fiery Tilp. This line contains three Amphibrachs, a Tro- chee, and an Iambus. Stood rul'd, stood vast infinitude confih'd. In this line the first two leet are Spondees, the next other two Pyrrh.es, and only one foot an Iam- bus. The contrast of Spondees and Pyrrhics, cre- ates an agreeable variety of measure. Many Verses can be scanned double, and this shews the eflTect of accent on English verse, more than any other example : as in this couplet. Fame let thy trumpet sound ; Tell all the world around. Which if scanned as verse usually is, each line would consist of three Iambics ; but by the way in which it has been set to music in the King's Anthem, each line is made three Trochees, by placing the accent on the first, instead of the second syllable. The most part of verse of Anapaestic measure, may be scanned as Amphibrachs, by cutting ofl the first syllable ; as in these verses beginnino-, " O ! vf woods, &c." " May I govern, &.c." ° le woods spread your branches apace. 1 govern my passions with absolute sway. The first veise thus aitered, contains two Am. ji PROSODY. jiliibiachg and an Tambtis. and the srco-vl tlirro and au liunhu.s. Thrse verses thus nvKlilM'd, liave a more pleasini; m u with g( middle of the Oa the fifth syllable, or in the thiid foot : ns, Round broken columns" clasping ivy twined O'er heaps of ruin' stalk d the Stately hind. ' On the sixth syllable, or at the end of the third foot : as. 01 c h say what stranger cause" yet nnexplor'd, ould make a gentle belle" reject a lord. A line may be divided into three portions by two Crcsuras : as, Out sfrotch'd he lay ' on the cold ground" and oft ' Look'd up to heaven. That the Final and Cajsi'ral Pauses contribute to melody, cannot be doubted, by any person wi»o reviews the iuitanccs givcu of those pauses >!!:. 2j6 Pl\\CTUATIOir. ■»■'>>•'■■■ Punctuation is tho art of tlividing a written composition into sentences, or parts of sentences, by points or slops, fov the purpose of making the different pauses which the sense, and an accurate pronunciation require. The Comma represents the shortest pause ; the Semicolon a pause double that of the Comma ; the Colon double that of the Semicolon ; and the Peri- od double that of the Colon. The points are marked thus : The Comma, The Colon : The Semicolon ; The Period. In order more clearly to determine ihe proper application of Ihe pointH. we must dislmguihh between an imperjetl phrase, a simple senttnce, and a compound sentence. An Imperfeci Phrase contains no aseertion, or does not .mount to a preposition or sentence : a8, " In haste ;" «' e'.iidi- oud of prajic." A Simple Sentence has but one Bubject, and one finite Verb, expiessed or impl.ed : as, «• Temperance preaoivea healih." A Compound Sentence his more than one subject, or one finite Verb, either «\pres-,td or undcstood ; or it consist? of iwo or more umpie senencea conntded together : ae, " Good nature, mends and beaut. fieg all oljects ;" " Vulue relinei the aflfuctijns, but vice debases them." OF THE COMMA. : The Comma usually separates those parts of a ■entence, which though very closely connected in sense and construction, require a pause between them. written fences, ing the ^curate le ; the X ; the e Peri- iplicaMon mper/ecl ice. does not ' «' e'.udi- )ne finite preaoi ve3 I, or one 'onsiei? of , '' Good ue reliiiei PUVCTUATION. 257 Ruf.r. 1. 1m a simi)Ie sptitmce, the several words of which it corisisis have so near a relation to each other, that la i,^oii(>ral, no points arc requisite except a full si..|» .it the eiuj o( it : as, " Every part ol' matter swamis with living ert-atures." A simple sen er e however, wh. n H i- n long one, »nd the N muiitivc cs-e icronp.iii ed with Adjunrti, an the Iv an iin- perlV'ct phrase or an address, it is senarat. d'lVoin the rc;st of'the scnicncc by a ( 'oiiiina : iis, " 1 reinern- Ijor, u'ilh i^raiilniL', Jiis coodncss to me." '• 1 aiu ohiiged to you, hi>j fr'utuls, lor your lavours." Rur.R .1. A simple memhor ofa sontrnce, con- tained within another, or loilowing anotlier, must he distiiifTuished hy a Comma : as, " Very olten, while we are coinplaiuiiii: of tlio vanity, and' the evils of lui-n.Hi lite, we make that vanity, and we incre'ase those evils." TlvuF. 4. When two or more Nouns, Jwo or more Ndjcictivcs, two or more Vcrhs, two or more Partici()l(!s, two or nif)re Advrrhs, succeed one another, they must be separa'ed hy Comims ; as, " Jl'.'as.)n, virtue, honour, foihid if ;" " He was hrave, wise, and pious ; " " I advise, exhort, and request you, to d.'sist ;" " lie was a man, fearing, loviiinr^ and sorviug his rroafor." " JSurcess de- peads, on acting, prudently, steadilv, and vi<:our- la. V, irts of a Hr- ^^'"'-E -J. Rut two Nouns, two Adj- tives, two ected iua;^*^''^'*' ^^^"^ ^'^"'''''''^'^' t^^''-* ■'^'^'vcrbs, 'j.ined hy a between ■•'"■^'"^''^'"" '*''*^ "'^ separated : as, " X'irtue'and ''ICG. f irrM n runtincf " Tt-Md, i !SS. iitudy, expands and elevates, the mind. V 2 'm rU.VCtUATION. f I* i|! '* He \vfi9 e?topmr«l nnd respfrtnl.'' " Some men sin, dtliherutely and prcbiini|)tuously ." flm it two Noun*, are »rp,ir«tKl by se\ rral inlervfning words, before • lie t'onjiinclion, the Conina onglil lo Im msen- ti' : H>*, •' inlenn>erauce des'rojs our boUiea, and albo our lii.ivl*." UuLF. fi. The Vorl) to he, followed by an Ad- jcctivp or the Infinitive mood, sliould {icnoraliy he Bctoll'hy a Comma : as, " 'I'o be charitable, is commendable." Wlicn lo he is followed by an Tiifinitivc, it may pciHMally be its Nominative, and it tlifii rcciuircg a Comma : as, " It is, a grand virtue, to love our ctKMnies." " I'o love our cneniies, is a grand vir- tue." Ri'r.E 7. When a ^'^rb in the Infinitive mood follows its governing Verb with several words be- tween thorn. Those words should generally have a Comma at the end of them : as, '• It id becomes y threads innUiUcr- alilo, our inferosts are interwovfii " (Natural or- der,) " (Jur interests are interwoven by innumera- ble threads." Ilri.r, 1 I . Words emphatically repeated, shoiild be divided by Cominus : as, " Ah I it can never, never, be." " lla[)py, happy, pair." Rui.n 12. The Case Absolute, or the Irjfinitivc mood absolute, or I'articiples piuc(.'d independently uTthe rest of the sentence, must be separated by a (.'omma : as, " Their ministry performed, they left the world in peace " " To confess the truth, 1 was in fault," " Tiie King, approving the plan, put it 111 execution." Rcr.n !3. A comparative sentence, if short and not compared by us or su : as, " Mankind act ' I'lcner from caprice than rea'^^n ;" requires no Comma ; if longer or compared by as or so, it re- •iiiircs it : as, '• As the heart panteth after the water brooks, so doth r, - soul pant alter thee." If very lung it rec^uires the semicolon. Rlt.r 14. When words are placed in oppositi- on to each other, or with some marked variety, they require to be distinguished by a Comma, as ncil as •sometimes bv the Semicolon : as, " Tho' deep, yet clear ; tho' gentle, yet net dull; Strong, without rage ; n\ iihout o'ertlowing, lull. " ■■ (lOnd nipn in tlif= rrnil oto«r> nro doiwl n.^i /,..!.. I., '260 rUN'CTUATIOV. ':*■■■ 'ft' t >?.'■. I' union with, but in opposition to, tlic views of one anutticr." Kur.E 1.3. A rctnarkahin expression, or a short observation in tho manner oi' a quotation, inav be marked with a Comma : Ui, " l*lulurch calib lying, the vice oj'sluvos." Rur.E 16. RolativG Pronouns, jronerally admit a Comma bel'orethcm : as, " l!o preachos sublime- ly, who lives a sober pious lif(^" " 'riicro is no charm in the female scx, uliitk can supply the place oi Virtue." Jill! vviien two niiii.bcrs or nlu:isr3 rite clrscly connpcled bv a llel.iiivo. re-"r,.iii it; he .^iitot .-lient to a j iri cular .' e.nso. ili« Coiii-ii4 p!iu:i'i] bfi oiiiititd : i;H, " A m.u who is of a do- tr:i(:iiiu! -()ir:i, .vili i.iiMior >' rii'^ \\\-t iiKiHt ;iii:i;t'f.'n! word.'." Ju tils exaiu|/e, ;lie ;is>oft o,i i-; no' ol " a rum i!i iJi'iioiuI,"' b'lt ot' " a tiirtii wlio is of « de rw im.; -i/irit ;"' iiui ih r-'lore ihcy siiouM not liese[j(r,i el. Wlicii \ Prep iriti'>ii pm- ;,|f;s a K^- hiiivo, a (Joiiiri! > IS IH t coniiiioiily uoed : as, " IIu ia a inan, lo whom I am obliged." Iluf.F, 17. The words narj, so, fhiict, o^nnn, now, Ju'^it, SL'CGnilhj, fonn:i':\, /(.'v//;/, fnurlii, omc uio)'e, n!)ore all, on '!.,■ :i n!rar;i, ni lln .i .i( iiLh'c, in .'ihort, and words and phrases of tlie same kind, ni'jst /.general!} be separalt-d Irom the context by a Comma. All atton' 'M to ti;o pon?''. ofr.ny rnj'^iffe, wi'I ii is pre- etitne' .illmtiii, ihe least likely '0 cvoid ren>*ure. For he drans i.p'ni himself a ihoasand e^cs llimt will n.irro.vly inspect I) in in every pirl." The Period slinuld be tisod after every ahbrovi- atod word : as, " M. S. ; P. S. ; N. B. ] A. D, ; O. S, ; A. S. ; A. aM." OF THE DASH, NOTES OF INTERROGATION AND EXCLAMATION, &c. THE DASH. The Dash thotigli often u?ed improperly, may be intr(>diu;nd wiiii [>roprit'ty where the sentciK.c brcaivs oli' alinj-uly ] \,'!icre a .^iiiniiieant panse is re- quired ; or wLeiy thete is an luicxpectgii turn ia the e wo-cN : lave (luiie (Orreli:ii'_''j I expresi^- of f)rrl't'Ct " Do 110! fur ihcte rtVCTUATiCN', 'JG.-l )PiKlent, jllowini' , both in oiinur '.liO H'iepei) !- vpMtimPnt ; a«, " If r;on art lie, so mnoli respected oijce — but, ch ! how fa!l(3n ! how dou' €\pie»*0!is nf a-^jri'islloii^ oi s(.iri;j oi , cr iiiolu n ; a^, " How iiiiiny in-*i;in es hive \vf ol exteilenci: in li'j fair sp.\." It sl'OwiJ no! b? fintplojed, in cnsea whtn it ;.s Illy fiid a question hr been ;..k^'i^ and u litre ihc word.- a^o :;ol i;?ed as a que.';-, ion : .'iS". *' f I.e t'yptians askt'd n.t miy I pf." Ti) ^'ve '.hi." sentence i;t' i:ilcri'i;^;.|i\ e fdim. it ^ll<.u,•.! c.\pro??pd ihua : '• The Cyprians ^u: i to me, ' \\ i\) du.t i.uu weep:' '" EXCLAMATION. The note of Exclamation is applied to oxprcpsi- jn=: of sudden '-irotion, purpri?e, joy , grid, i<.c. and io to invocations or addresses : as, " Oh ! ii 1 '■« remained but humi)le !" '• fleai mo O ]-oi, " How nv.ch vi.nity m ibe putsuitg of men ! •' What ia rnore amiable than vrtue !" Tlie iitiliiy of ihp points of Inerroaalion and FTclimntion appears from the loi o«in- exiunples, in winch the meaning lit egnified ^nd dlHrriminaied solely by the points. «< How grnat was tlie earrifire !" «• Hr;w c^f^' was tl.e >aci jfice :' Tl-e Ptian'i'v f.f timo req'iiied for the r"in's of la'erropa. tloM and ExcUmaiion, is about eqtial to a Colon or Peiiud. They mark an elevation of the voice. There arc other cliaractcrs, made use of in com- position, viz : An Apof^trophe, marked thus ' is ii?od to abbre- viate or shorten a word : as, 'tis, lor it is ; tho' for tiin.ifrh ; e'en for even ; judnr'd for judped. h< rliict'^upo is to shew the Possessive case ol Nouns a.~, " A man's property." A Caret marked thus a is placed wliere some word happens to be left out in writing, and which \s inserted over the line. A Hyphen marked thus - is employed in con- nectinij compound words : as, " J.ap-dog, tea-pot, prc-existence, to-moirow, mother-in-law It is also used when a word is divided, and tlie former part is written or printed at the end of one line, and (he latter part at the beginning of another. In this ca?e, it is placed at the end of the tirst line, not at the beginning of the second. There are three Accents, the Common that de- notes the stress of the voice, as in prestime ; the Ar-ute, marked tluis ' .• denotes a short vowel, as in Fdncij : and the Grave, thus ^ : a long one, as ui Favour. In Rnglish the Acrentual marks are chiePiy ii?('i in Spelling UooUs and Dictionaries, to mark ti.fi n an Tn- ciice in onwwer B of Ex- men !" nmntion meaning l-'eiiud. in coni- abbrc- tbo' for d. Its souns : p some /hich is in con- tea-pot, and tlie ot' one mother. rst line, that (1e- n ; tlit; :\, as 111 !, asi ill lark liifi PUNCTUATION. 265 vowel or syllables which require a particular stress of the voice in proMunciation. Tlic stress is laid on lon^ an.'i short syllablrs in- discriminatelv. In ordur to distirnfiiish the one ;rom the otiicr, some writers of Dictionaries have placed the Grave on \\iv tnrtner, and the Acute on the latter, in this manner : Minor, mineral, rival, river. The proper mark to distinf! make a di[*htlion;T^ and parts th* iii into two svlla jlep as, Creator, eoiidjutor. aerial A Section marked thus ^, is the division of a discourse, or chapter, into less parts or portions. A Paragraph *[ denof s the beginning of a new subject, or a sentence not connected with the f" ro- ll )ing. This character is chielly used iu the Old and .New Testaments. A Quotation '•' ". Two inverted Comma? arc generally placed at the beginning of a phrase or a passage, wliich is quoted or transcribed from the speaker or author in his own words ; and ^wo C(/ra- nias in their direct position are placed at the com lii- sion : as, " Tlic proper study of mankind is man." Crotchets or Brackets [ ] serve to inclose a word or sentence, which is to be explained in a note, or the explanation itself, or a word, or a P(uitei ce, wliich is intended to supply some deficiency, cr to rcctii'y some mistake. A Brace or Circumilcx ^ is used in Poetry at W 20 G PUNCTUATION', ;t 11 the end of a triplet or throe lines, which have tho s-iine rhyme. Rraccs are ahso used to connect a nutiihcr of words with one conwnon term, and f.ki introduced to prevent a repetition in wrilini; or printing. An Asterisk or liltle star ' , dir( c.ts (ho reader to some note in the inar<;in, or at llie iMitlcin ol'lho jiage. T>vt> or tliree Asteri.^ks frencrally denote tlie omission of some letlfus in a word, or ofsoiiK! hold or indelicate expression, or some delect in tiie man- uscript. A Ellii)sis i^i also nscd, when some lot- tors in a word, or some worths in a verse, arc omit- ted : as, " The K'— g," for " the King." An Obelisk, which is marked tluis [, and Dou" ble l^agger ;{;, and Parallels thus J, together with the letters of tlic Alphabat, and figures, are used as references to the margin, or bottom of the page. An Index or Hand ^r_ZP points out a remarkable passage, or something that retiuires particular at- tention. OF CAPITAL LETTERS. The following words should begin with Capitals, 1st. The first word of every book, chapter, letter, paragraph, or any other piece of writing. 2nd. The first word after a Pcriv^d . and if tho two sentences arc totallij independent, after a note of Interrogation, or Exclamation ; but they are impro- per unless independent. 3rd. The apellations of the Deity : as, "God, Jeliovah, the Almighty, the Supreme Being, tho Lord, Providence, the Messiah, the Holy Spirit." 4th. Proper names of persons, places, streets, mountains, rivers, ships : as, " George, A ork, tlso Strand, the Alps, the Thames, the Seahorse." ..flv- rUXCTUATIOX. 267 5llj. Afljectivos dcrivrd from the propor names of place s : as, " (jirecian, Roman, English, Ita- lian, S*.c." (Ith The iMst word of an exnmpic, and of a qi'otatinii in a direct forn; : as, " Always remember this ancient niaxini : ' k'now thyself.'''' lint when a quotation is l)ron<:lit in oi>li(|ii(ly, a capital is un- necessary : as, " Solomon observes, ' that pride j^oes belurc destruction.' " 7th. The first word of every line in Poetry, 8th. The Pronoun I, and the Interjection ! Olli. Every Substantive and i)rincipal word in the title of bou!;s : as, " .lolinsorrs Dictionary ;" " Thomson's Seaoous ;" " Kojliu's Ancient His- tory." lOih. Words of particular importance : as, '•ti.e Keformaiion, the liestoration, the Revolu- tion, ^c " I 1th. When personification takes place of in- anitnato thinj^^s : as, " O ! Death where is thy sting." EXERCISES IN PUNCTUATION. C O M iM A. RULE I. The tear of repentance Too many of the pretcnd- brinjTs its own relief. cd Iriendships of youth It is honorable to bo a are mere combinationa friend to the unfortu- of pleasure, luitc. rulf: II. Gentleness is in trulli the gu at. aveiuio olrnutual I enjoy njent. io you my worthy bene- factor am 1 iadebted under Providence for all I enjoy. Continue n'v dear cliild to make virtue thy study. o 268 rUXCTUATIOM. RULE III. His comluct upon tho whole was virtuous thoiijih ho iiad many failings he gained pub- lic esteem. By whatever means we may at lirst attract the attention we can hold th(! esteem and secure the hearts oC others on- ly by amiable dispositi- ons and the accomplish- meats of the mind. RULE IV. Discomposed thounhts ajiifated passions and ruflled tempers pois in every |)lcasure of life. In his domestic sphere he teem honor and praise the ji^odd man. He WHS esteemed loved and admired by all who knew liir.i. was harsh jealous and We ought to live soberly irascible. riy,hteously and piously We ought to respect cs- in the world. RULE V. Time and tide wait on no man. Between passion and 1 y • inii there is not a tin- ger's breadtii. Vicissitudes of good and evil trials and consola- tions lill up the lot of man. The wise and good the honest and virtaous will surely attain felicity in another world. He spoke and acted wise- ly and properly. Repent and amend your wicked life and be seri- ously and religiously inclined. He accomplished hisbnse designs by lying and deceiving. RULE VI. The greatest misery is to Charles's highesi enjoy- be condemned by our ment was to relieve the own hearts. distressed. To be condemned by our To relieve the distressed own hearts is the great- was Charles's highest est misery. enjoyrrent. PUNCTUATION. 209 RILE VII. n hold secure lers on- spositi- mplish- It shows a nilnd naturally To bo humble in opin wiciif'd to petsoculo iXOnd IlH'tl. ion II i: iM evil (li.«!pnsition desires arc surciv vir to 1)0 attentive iii coii- dwt t to restrain rash 1( indeed to despise all tuci ad vice. RULE VIII. )raisc i loved all who As a companion ho was He was a good preacher severe and s;itirical ad yet a bad nia Th(! Sun is risen he is invisible. a Iriend eaplicus dan gerous and untrue. though RULE IX. so bcrli dously ? I icily in Ciooro the groat Roaian ofchastity and liiial at- (iction. lionc the bahn of life Or at or was a viriiiuuri man. Patriarch Jo.= iM'h is suuthes us under every an illustrious example nnsiortune. RULE X. wise- 'our Iliin (liat is woalc in the tion to c be seri- no usiy •aith receive ye. U"ceivo ye him tliat is weuli in the faith. Ih njoy present pleasure. oep.joy present plon^tirc he saeriliccd his ic. vi- sacriiiccd his re[)uta- tali; hisbnse nn and RULE XI. h no no I cannot atfrce to such a i)ro!)osal. II( :i fallen li li (liU i)k hiifl len I est;:!( icn enjoy- leve the stressed highest only veil you. iy 1 say unto ai'.J weltering m i, blood. RULE XII. Peace (S <.:ur:\ hei"):^' so- 'I'o i-;ay the !c: cored v-. u may si-iiie ut hot rayed them he also calh.'d and whom he called them he also justitied. 'I'houfrh humble yet he was di^niljed thou;:,h sim|)le ill in though rich yet iienerous a. id thou(j;h religious not bigoted. RULE XV. We are strictly enjoined ^'ice is not of such a na- ' not to follow a niulti- lure that we can say to tude to do evil.' it ' Ilitlierto shalt thoi; Would you be great be come and no further.' wise and virtuous. The gentle rriiad is like the smooth !:tream which reflects every ob- ject it) itsjo6t jiroporti- on and fairest colours Many of the evils which RULE xvr. we complain ofare ima- ginary. They who raise envy will easily incur censure. Give honor to whom it is due. RULE XVIL I proceed secondly to Frequently interest impels point out the proper us strongly to comply. state of our tempe/. ru.vcTUATiox. Q7I COIJII- Somctimns fnlso aliatno vations first on the in- vcil in prevents our Qpj'osing terniil and next on the ce till vicious customs. external condition of 1 shall Jiiukc soino obser- man. SEMICOLON. Tlio path of truth is a wisdom which in hia plain and a s-yi'r path sight is foolishness, that of faleh'ir.d is a Levity is frequently the forced production of lolly or vice cheerful- ness is the natural off- spring of wisdom and virtue only. pcri^lexing nia/o. Aj ther(.' is a worldlv hap- piness which God per- ceives to he no other than disguised misery so there is a worldly COLON. Tiiorc is no mortal truly wise and restless at the siiine time wisdorn is the repose of minds. All our conduct to\'. ards men sliould be influen- ced by this import.int precept ' Do unto o- tlifrs as you would that others should do unto you. ' lie who from the benicni- tv ol'his nature created the world fur the abodes of men he who furnish- ed it so richly for our aceommndalion and stored it with so much beauty for our enter- taintnent this amiable and beneficent Being surely can have no ))lf usure in our disap- pointment and distress. When we look forward to the year which is be- ginning what do we be- hold there all is a blank to our view a dark un- known presents itself. PERIOD. rrnspenty debilitates in- >^»nad of streniilheninir tijc mind Its ?no3t com- mon efTec^: is to create an extreme sensibility to the slightest wound It foments impatient de- sires and raises expec- IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) // 1.0 I.I 1.25 I ^ Ilia r.»- iiM JA 11 1.6 V] <^ /J (9 c*i 7. w Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, NY 14S80 (716) 872-4503 1 272 PUNCTUATIO^r. aliens which nothing \.aa satisfy Between lame and true honour a dit^tinction is to be made The form- er is a loud and noisy applause the latter 13 a more silent and inter- nal homage Fame floats on the breath of the multitude honour r» sis on thn jud8ary to treat every suhjecl Hcparalel)-, and cve-y diiiinct topic should have a iltsii- ni'ed semence ; and the principal subject should never Ijclesert- eJ for minor ones, 'flie viola'ior) ot this lule lends so much t.» purplex and ohticure, ihai il is safer to err hy too many short sontence-*, ihui by one "hit is ovo'loj.ltd and embarrH*xed. Kx^mpie^ al.ound in authors : says one, '• Archbisiio|( Tiilotsou (lie<) 'his year. He wus exceed ngly 1 c'oved by King Willianj Olid Q icpii Mury, who nominnied Dr. Tennisoii, b -!.op of L.ncclii, 10 s-ucceed li ni." Who would ex; fct '.he lader | urt of h 3 ••ciiteiice to fol;ow in conseq ictire of the former ? " He una exceedini«lv beloved by Kin<» ar.d Queen," i-j the propo>i- tion in thfl sentence, we look for sojiiethmy relating 'o lijis, ^yheli we are on a sudden cu.-ned off to a new proposilioii, AH Parftn'hGscs, cxrppi where necessary, should he a- voi(lt;d. ol the nature of which, we iiave treated, unJcr lue heads jf GruaiDiitical F guies. OF STRF-Nnru. When sentences are compiet«'!y lopped nt ull c\cref,cences and have proper words chose. i, «o u'< to make the greatest impression, and properly ar- ratifred, and a judicious use made ot the figu ts ,->( Grammar and llhetoric, that may be enip!o)'t;d ; liH^y arc 'hen said to posses.-* strength or energy. As under the lieads of Pioprietv, Perspecnily, A;: h I'l^'y, Tui;;na'K.al and IliiJiorical Fi!j:i.»'>, .?;c vt l ■ .«va siio.vn K;; v laul;= aio to hu .ivn: %-d ii.d .joc.ir^cy ut' i i'.«-i. Rp, I fii iDit^e **ireii!i''h iiniHovptl, v. e wiU nn' «nv niOfv, j.^itr '.it.i iicdiJ, .ji a wijulij be ic'l'i'i ■■owall WAS sea, n sea too wanting n shore. "-On(i. " There in the realms ofiMyht, thy Hire I'll shew, And point him out among the ghosts bcluw' -Philips There ore few in)|iropiio'if„ m composition young penont are mo-e apt to fall ,r„u than T.iuU.log» ; ,|u.> ought therefore to be rn 'h.Mr jjii?nl tvnh re^p. ct to it. | he.e arc however a number of Tjiiiolo«ical phta«e» in Kn^li.h, *»huii cirnot b« aliere.J, wi hont m'-odiu- ng someih.nj< |,f,« proper ihjn hty are. Siirii a-.: th-i phrjsna, " Hai^e up a hi>rii ot m.lvaiiun ;" '• lie lift^;h up ihe in.-ek ;" •• Aiceii.ltd up ip;r a (iiirf-eiit nie.inin;,' : a-, " Ii(-nieiii>,er jour l;nter erd." w hich Mj/,iili.-8, "rtni.;ii.:)fi dcih," to ^..y. " reinen.l.er \our cim! ;" «oi d uol toave^ ihc precise idea of '• rcuitrnber .teaih. ' green liq II id OK FlGl RKS OF .SPFKCH. A (ijrtirc of speeeh, is a deviation from the or- tliiKiry lorni, or coiniii'in iipiilication of words — Kiere are ( »'r;uiiiiiatical (igures, eomprelieiuiiiig iiiose of rityiiiolnay ynd S}iilax ; and tiurc are also li^iires ol' Kiietorif. WIhjii liguresiue properly •;iii- ployed they give elogan<-e anden-jigy [„ »\pi('s«!i()fi 1 li.'.-i,; ol" I'itvrnology and S\ nta.\, arc boinetinus, iiKrtly the license of Poetsl FIGURES OF ETYMOLOGY. Tiie principal figures of Ktymoh>gy a.e Aplicje- re-^is, Prosthosi.S; Syncope, Apocop"-, Paragoc , l^iLCresis, Syneeresis, and Tcine^sis. Apikf.iiesis is the elision of some initiid letters of a word to shf)i ten a verse. The initial syllables often elided in English are a and 6t iVuin the wotds, (■i:j:paring ; " While the ar!; was a preparin;^ ;" 1 Peier iii. !20. Adjoin ii^r \'>v.\, /uo/rriy for strew, 6t'(/f(.'(/^ tor daub, devoid for void, evitnis,'} for vanir^h, ptiunnhnlntion for ainbuliilion, /jrcc^v;/.- for create, Y is (»ften used belort: word.-* i;j old Poetry, to leii^rtlRn a vcr.^e : ay, " Which on foil rancour ever v/as ijljcnl.''— Lloijd. SvNoori-. is the elision of some of ihc middle let- ters of a word : as, o'tr for over, ne'er for never, dni't lor do not, can't for cannot, vict'ry lor victory j'td-^'d for jud<;,ed, Tl:e lakiig out \ lie c uy en^'cn, in KoiJi ending in ed, u however, now ilicUicJ by Uie beat svri e^s. ArocoiT.' is the elision oi some of the final let- t:.-s of a word : a;<, iho' for thoui^h. The clue: wtirds ill K:!glish \viii.>;e final 'riters are elided, aic allhoniih, thoui^!i, do. in, lli>,.i'i(iU, n'l'.l : a.-,^ d'tj^sc: for do'voii .«ee ; *• hU-' a woiui (7/i'^iii/." for in iht bud ; '[ i,haiit. for ^^hail not ; i<:o:il, for will nut. P\iiA(ior.r/ is the antiexinji of a sylla'.»le to the end of a word to lenylhea it. Ea was tbrnierly ofn:. used lor this purpose ; as alter tiie words, boiwl hold, ixnd icithuut, in the ioliowmg si;nteiices, '' H'- siiallbe holden to his word ; ' " It iS his buundt". duty to obey." " Wiihoutta that woiild conic u heavier bnliv"'- 70uhl ; it vva;^, lor we glaringly, , being ginning 11 to be lil'ish : tiring ; iii. '2J. r daub, lion fi-T Ml used =;e : a^, Idle let- never, victory ; in ed, U nal let- iio cliit't kd, uie a- ill ihc not. [> to the ■|_V ofU! ,, " II. buiuidtn >a!e. "— ArrENPix, 1^8 3 Tho best moderm writeru liowevet, do not use this end- ing ol en. Di.KT^Ksis is the separatinj; of two vowels, that form 11 diphthong : as, a- in I'Licton, in this verse " Reinernher the sad fate of Pha-<-ton Wlio madly drove tiie chariot ol" the sun " The termination Hon is commonly pronounced as otic syllable, yet some verses rcnuiie to to be senu- ■atcd • "" ' r: as, " \o comet need foretell hi.s change come ci, His corpse did seem a coiistel!a-ti-un — JJnjdni. SvxiERRsis is the shrinking of two syllables into one : as, learmd, when an Adjective is two, but when a A'erb only one Jc in at rial, is commonlv two syllables, yet in Poetry is often but one. Formerly every Verb whrn ed was ad.lpd, ron e'irrcs was pojiouncet' n-i,h ed, as un cdJi ioiial s^liHb'e, and soiiieiiiiips II I. I3at Murray and other lae G.-iumnarian? have (/i\en it i.j a ■n'.c, that cd should never be proi-ounced as mi liddilion'il ^:.:l;ible. except when prtjce.le.i by d or t, or when un Adjee- five. Ths rujj hoM ever proper ii may le in prose, will not' ca in reading ^ouie ot our b^ st FoetP : a,, Spencei, Sh:ike.sp.;are, IJitler, and Mii'on, where it is ofen rse* c-sary to i)rononnce c"/ a- an addiiiorial syllable, to make the verse have ila piuper number of teet, and not sound harsh. Temesis is the inserting of a word between the parts of another word. Sot ctr seems to be the chief word in Engli.sh that is separated from another uitii which it is compounded : as, " tVhul method sutvtr he tries he fails in it." Murray and some o'liers, have given if as a rulp, th»t f>irver PJ-oiilJ ftlway.s lio eepa.'-ated from who, ivhat', h.nv, w'u,!i, when, then, ichence, Ihf/ire, and whither ; yet many fi ;be best modem writer.", use sotffr joined to the most of ihese ""'il-i. Which indeed appears to be always ijeat di^ioined, -bit wh'it Pecms often d'si^rc.Tbio whpii ^^p;,art'[jai iit'-'>l. \] hncvtr and irhal- ever are re'iUives, and evfr lu^y be used alUr thrm : »•■, " l\''hoever comes heio, wih ever be welcome. " IJow bihJ fucr are d tT«ient Adverbs wlieti ti-par ned, from vvh.ii I hey arc ioiiied : as, " fj'iio alidll he ever be &li belicv- igiiro in . us well s. I'dlon. ie away Appr.vmx. 0(>- Eccmng draws /ur crimson curtain round.— Thoinson. J.o ! steel clad war his gorgeous standard rears.— Rufr( rs. JV'jdoin is humble, that he knows no more — Co If per. Heaven— vhn sees with equal eve as Cod of aU, A hero perish, or a sparrow fall — Pope. This figure iliouph of'enallicl \n per.tnnificQiion, is ^ornp- ii-n<'^ however wiihoui it : ns, "Tiun Phil p uer.i down lo liie city of Samaria, and ireiched Christ unto thciii." Ev.\i.r,Ar:E' is the use of one port of speech, or nC one mood or tense for another, and oiu-n border.^ on s lircism. It is sometimes used in Poetry, but scarcely ever in Prose. Ttlany l\)tts use tlie Ad- j(>ctive for the Adverb, as also an Adjective as a -Noun : as, Ti»e rapid radiance instantdncous strikes, (for in- stantaneously.) Thomson. They fall successive and successive rise, (for suc- cessively.) He spread his airy flight over the vast ahrupt. — Milton. The Noun is used for the Adjective in this verse : The victor army march in triumph now. (for virto- rion army.) Cowley has used now as a Noun. (See Pinre lai.) ^ o Cowper uses the Preposition bihieen as a Noun governed by from. Famine the meagre fiend, Blows mildew from between his shrivelled lip.s. Poets sometimes use a Verb impropeily : as, ^'or want nor cold his course delaij. (for delays.) Dr. Juhnsuu. 'J33 APrF.VDIX. i^ H' I' So fiirinns was that onset s shock, Destruction's gates at onco unloci,-. (lor unlocks ) M:inv learned m^n, hive thoiiglit this fi^'.uie emirely im- proper : as MesKi.t. D,.- Poit R'lyale, who haverrjec'ed i», as iiMworlhy of a place in Gramin ii ; but since so many pi eat Po.ots have err.iiloyed it, it Jtrci vos at Jeasi an explanaiioii. PiKOVAsM is the introduction of superfluous words in a sentence and border?* upon Tautolopeak vou, (H'hosailon the .seas,) of his wonders in the 'iorp ; He found them a sleep again ; .for their eyes wore heavy,) neiiher kno;v they what to answer I'lai In many uustances ihercfore a Comma with- out the characters i. suflicient : as, - Every planet, as he Creator has made nothing in vain, ii mo. injbably inhabited." The Parenthesis mv.ks a moderale depre-ssion of the voice an,} may be accompanied ui,h every point, which the .en,o ou!,i req.nre, ,f the Pa.enthe.ic^l rharacfers were onM-ed. l o.iT.ht lo stop with the .ame ku.d of .top, which the men.hcr U. tnat precede ,f. and lo con-air, th.t stop within the charac- ter-. L.ses of Ir>terroaation and Exclamation must however be r.xreped : as, ..While they wi.h to please, (and «hy ehould tlK> not wish It .') Ihey disdain dishonorable means." Parentheses should in gonerai be avoided, as they are sen- fences ,n the mid.t of sentences, the perple.veU me hod ofen 01 ui.poH.ng of a thought, which a writer wnn's judg..nenl' "o m.roJuce,„,t8 proper place. IJut while we cau-ion learners with respect fo the .rnproper use of a Parenthesis, we must also guard them against the opinion of some Grammarians, as Len zac. who denies that it should ever be u.ed at .-,11 ; conlrarv to t.ic .dea« 01 many of the best writers ancient and modern. TUe Parenthesis may ofloii be avoided by Tranepoailion (bee Transposition.) HypERBATON or TuAvsposiTioN is tiic transfer- ring of words from one part of a sentence to another 1 he judicious use ot it conform perspicuity, harmony variety, spirit and strength on language. Wc shall consider it First—^s vreve7i!m^ nivL:- gii'tJ/. In these sentences there is great ambiguity : !290 APPENDIX. " Belisniius was general of all tin forcrs undor the Einp'jrur Justinian, a man of raro valour " Iloro Justinian would be understood to be the man of rare valour, though it was not he, but He isaritis that wa3 so. When transposed tlius, all amiiiguity is prevented : " Beiisarius a man of rare vah)ur was general of all the forces under the Knipcror Justini- an." •'Amelian defeated the ?klarcomanni, a fierce and terrible nation of Germany, that had invaded Italv, in three several cngayoments "'—{(ivldsvulh's Roman History.) This sentence is rendered less ambiguous, and more elegant, transposed thus : '' Aurelian defeated the INIarcomanni in three sever- al engagements, a tierce and terrible nation of Gcr- raun\ , that had invaded Italy." Secondlv — Jls prccludini!; the vsc of a Parcnilicsls. Ih the following passage, " If your hearts secretly reproach you for the wrong choice you have made, (as there is time for repentance and retreat, and a return to wisdom is always honorable,) bethink your- selves that the evil is not irreparable." It is much better to transpose this Parenthesis to a separate sentence thus, " If your hearts secretly reproach vQu, for the wrong choice you have made, bethink yourselves that the evil is not irreparable ; there is tune for repentance and retreat : and a return to wisdom is always honorable." Thirdly — As promoting Perspicuity. The chief rule in the arrangement of sentences is. " that the words most clearly related should be placed as near to each other as possible." We shall consid-^r t'.ie importance of this rule, first with respect to the posi- tion of Adverbs, Relatives and other particles that express connexion ; and secondly in the position of circun stances. The following are instances of wrong position of Adverbs, &.c. " The Romans understood liberty, id least as well as we." These words may be under- stood differently, according as the emphasis is laid APPENDIX. o 291 or the Hera if rare IS that uity is ir was ustini- ficrce ivadrd sviilh's ^^\ less tlius : pcvcr- f Ger- ilhcsis. acrelly made, and a L yoiir- 3 much jparate proach )ethink here is turn to ic chief hat the as near d'^r t!ie le posi- les that iition of position liberty, ! imder- is laid upon hhertfi, or upon nf lea^t. They sho.ild be ar- ranged thus : '• 'Jho Komans understood liberty as well at least, as we." '• IJy the pleasures of the imaii, nation I mean onlv such pleasures as arise ori- gmally from si^ht." When it is said, " I mean only such pleasures," the Adverb only is not properly placed. It IS not intended here to qualify the word mean, hut such pinsurcs ; and therefore should have the word which it quulifioH. The style is more clear and neat, wiien the wor.ls are arranged thus • " By the p.oasurcsoftiie im.-.ginatinn I mean such plea- sures only, as arise iVom sight." In the following sentence, the word more is not in its proper place • " J here is not perhaps any real beauty or deformity more in one piece of matter than in another " The phrase ought t . stand thus • " Beaulv or deformity in one piece ot matter, more than in another." " It is folly to pretend to arm ourselves against the acci- dents of life, by heaping up treasures which nothintr can protect u.s asainst but the good Providence of ojr Creator." lihich refers grammatically to the Substantive immediately precediiig, and that here is " treasures." 'Jhe sentence ought to stand thus : " It IS folly to pretend, by heaping up treasures to arm ourselves against the accidents of life, u/iich nathing, Stc" The Preposition 0/ is frequently placed impro- perly in a Possessive case .• as, " To this Era the history has been traced of Italy. " This ought to be, '■ To this Era the history of Italy has been traced." In the pns'iHon of circumstance s.— An author thus cypresses himself, "Are these designs which any man who is born a Ilriton, in any circumstances, in any situation ought to be ashamed or afraid to a- vow ?" flere we are at a loss whether the words " 111 any circumstances, in any situation," are con- nected with, " a man born in T3ritain, in any cir- c'unstancesor situaiini," or with that man's " avow- iii- his designs in any circumstance or situation in- 292 APrnxDrx. to which ho may bo brought " As it is probable that the latter was iiit(;n('o(l, the arrangement ought to have been, ''Are these dcaiprs whicli any man who ia born a Briton ought to b'^ ashamed or afraid, in any situation, in any circumstances to avow ^" The following is an instance of a wrong arrangement of circum9tat)res : *' A great stone that 1 happened to find after a long search, by the sea shore, served nio for an anclior. ' One would think that the search was confined to the sea siiore ; but as the meaning is, that the great stone was/o7U!(/ by the sea shore, the period ought to have run thus : "A great stone, that after a long search, 1 happened to lind by the sea shore, served mo for an anchor." 'J'oo many cir- cumstances should never be crowded together, but interspcrced in d'fl'erent parts of a sentence. For instance : " What I had the opportunity of menti- oning to my friend, sometime ago in conversation, was not a now thought." These two circumstances, " some time ago," and " in conversation," would liave had a better eilect disjoined thus : " What I had the opi)ortunity, sometime ago, of mentioning to my friend in conversation, was not a new thought." Words expressing things connected in idea, ou"ht to be placed as near together as possible. The following passage from Addison ditiers from this rule : " For the English are naturally fanciful, and very often disposed, by that gloominess and melancholy of temper, which are so frequent in our nation, to many wild notions and extravagancies, to >vhich otheis are not liable." Here the Verb or as- sertion is, l)y a pretty long circumstance separated from the subject to which it refers. This might have been easily ])revented by placing the circumstance before the Verlr, thus : " For the English are na- turally fanciful, and by that gloominess and melan- choly of temper which are so freqtient in our nation, are often disposed to many wild notions, Sec." An incidental circumstance should not be placed bctweeu two cap'nal members oi' a period, but iu APPENDIX. !L'93 such a manner as to confine it to its proper member, that the more important words may possess the last place. Thfi following sentence is faiilfv in this res- poot : " The Emperor was so intent on the esfub- lidhmont of his alisolute power in Fliingary, that he exposed the empire doubly to desolation and ruin for the sake of it.^' Better, " That for the sake of it, he exposed the empire doubly to desolation and luin. When difTerent things have a relation to each other, in the order of nature or time, that order should be regarded in assigning them their place in a sentence. The conclusion of the following pas- sage is inaccurate in this respect : " But stilfthero will be such a mixture of delight, as is proportioned to the degree in which any one of these qualificati- ons is most conspicuous and prevailing." The or- der in which the two last words are placed, should be reversed and made to stand, prcvniling and con- spicuous. The/ are conspicuous because they pre- vail. A weaker Proposition should not come after a stronger ong, and a sentence should generally be so arranged as to grow in importance to the very laiiic over to, ch.ur vp, &.C. are also not proper conclusi«ins o( a [)eriod; r sim])lc V'erb, il" it can be employed, terminates a pentencc better. An author expresses himself thus of the Trini- ty : " It is a mystery which we I'lrmly be close ; ns, " On what- ever side we coiitctnpiuto flonier, what principally strikes us, i:^, hi.s woiKiurlul invention." Tlial the pupil miy undtTslanil ilie n.nduo of invt'te't scn- tencei, he ought (refiimily \o iranpp'j-e various pierc* of vetst", f which »re ofeii conipo-'e't ot inveitel phfiso*,) inlo iheir na- tuial order in prove, at* in thcMe lines : " Not hilf BO ilreailf'ul ri-' - to (he fiijlit, Or'on's iloff, ihe ^car vvhoii auliimn we gh; im? into verso, l>j whicu ho will bv b«ticr 4cquin;ed will; the tlruciurc, hariiiyn/ and elegance ol lang'ia^'e. I figt:ri:s of uttetoric. Firriires of Rhetoric arc coininonly called troprs. 'I'ht^y are a departure from pure simplicity of speecli, and are found in almost every s()ecieij of compositi- on. They are chieily constructed on some simili- tude, which by the powers of imagination, is render- ed grand, noble, or illustrative. 'I'he principal figures oi' llhetoric arc, Simile, iMetaphor, AUego- ly, Metonymy, Syneclidoclu', llvperboh-, Pioso- f)op3Dia, ]Crote:?is, Apostrojjhe, Anlilhcsis, Cliiiia.\, I aralepsis, ^^lsion and Irony. A Simii-k' or comivvrisov, expresses the r'^scm- l)lance between objects. It is oenerally used with lihe, as, or so. " As bold as a lion, or as meek as a lamb," are common Siniiles. " As the mountains are round about Jerusaletn, so is the Lord round about his people." jNIan like tlio generous v'tnr supported lives. O" APPENDIX. 297 A MF.TArnoR .s n Simile, (Avithout like or aa ) Whon I SUV ol a jrreut staKsnian. •' He uuliu'ds the st..to like a pillar." I makr a rom,.nnson ; but Hliunlsay, "lie is the pillar of tj.n state," it Le- con.osaMHaphor. Tho lollouing ure Metaphors Iro.n Scripture. " I will bn unto her a wail of f.ro and the -.lory m the midst of her." " Thou art my rock and my fortress." "Thy word is a lamp to my Icet, and a light to my path." Poetry is lull of Spcochlcss and fixoJ in all tho dcalh of woo.— Thomson. His eye was morning's brightest rmj.—I/oirfr, la .!m ■""' ^''"°"''"8 ^^rsei is an instance of an improper Ma- 1 briiHe in my •Iruoglmg muso with pain, riiat longs lo launch in'o a bolder Mrain — ^(/(/m^o. The m,.5.e hrro .. first figured as a horse bridled, next it H made a ship luunchitig. An Ar.LF.r.ouv may be regarded as a Metaphor continued so as to form a kind of Parable. 'J"lu.,o is a fine one in the 80th Psalm, where the people of Israel are represented under the imnge ol ,i vine • " Ihou has brought a vine out of Egypt ; thou hast cast out the heathen and planted it, &c." The Loiter sort of ParHbles and Fahles may be estr'enied Allegories. Ti.e celebrated Fable of the HoJy and Member* hid such an effoct, as to prevent a Revolution at Itome. Mr.TONVMY is a figure by which the cause is put ior (lie etFect, or the etlect for thecau.se, the sign for t|'; thing signified, kc. When we say, " Heleads -'liltou," the cause is put for the effect, meaning 'Milton's works." But when it is said, "Grey liaiis should be respected," moaning " old age ;" tnc cirect is put for the cause. "To assume the sf^f^ptre," is Hu exjjression for entering on Royal ""'liirity ; (iiesign being put for the thing signified. " Cod IS oar salvalion," i. e. our Saviour. " They i08 APPENDIX. smote the cilij," i. e. the cilizcna. " Give mc tl)y heart,^' i. e. ajjtciiun. SvN'Fciinocm:' is piittinfx a port for the wholp, or the whole lor |>ait, a ceit;;iii iiuiiihiT, (or an un- certain, Sec. Tims tlic u'dcc or the deep may l)e put for the sea. " Now tlic ?/< rn- is bcautilui ;" i. e summer. "l'i, to avoid sucii o.\co.sscri.'' Accitaiii number is liere put for an uncertain. IIvpnRHor.n' or Ex.\nr.F.RATio\, conr^isfs in tnaj:- nifying an object beyond it^ nat;irul bouaus. tin expression:; as, " Swiit as t!i': v.ind ;" " wliite i\i snow," are Hy[)erboli(:al. The hTniiunfie of tu" Orientals, is generally more so than i^uiopean-, whose judgment is mire correct. This figure is sometimes found in Scripture Da\id says of Saul and J« natlwm, " Tiu-y were sw'ijicv than eagles, stroi ;j;er tiian I'iins." The i'e?.- of an enemy augments Ihe conception of the size > their leader : " 1 saw their chief," says the scoi,; in Ossian, " tall as a rock of ice ; his spear l!;, blasted fir ; his shi(.'!d tlu; rising moon ; lie sat u;. the shore like a cloud of mi.-.t on the rill." The errors in liif' U'^'^ of Hyp^ilioles, rifise cliiefly fror ovorstrr. i[)i;i;,' 'liKm. D ydun in his l'o>;uioii tie iJc.^l (., !> ticn Ciii'losll, co.'iijiliiiieals thai Mo:.aruii ai liie exponse oi" 1: BUI! : " Thit stnr, at your !>irth shono nut h > hr rh>., It stained tlie duller sun's neridi.in li^iit." This nppears as great bombast, as the following desciip on of i» i\re:il wnirior : " H«! loi)k(^(l po trirce, po terrib'o niul g"'m, HiS very skadijW, durst not follow hiiii." Paosorop.KiA or PF.K'^TMric' \tion is a fruwrv ! ;■ which lile and action is attributed to unintelli.'^rnt iiiaiiiiiiai.c uujuuia. x ua ua nuuii 2 mc tliy J wholo if an un IV he |)ut V' i. e SIC or d/ i!(l von a \ cci tain 3 in rnntr . 8t!f:;i white i i of liif! i;"0|)caij:- oripfurc i'V were ')'"ho fen size 1': ;e scou; ^pcar lis le sat ( iefly fio?i I <)i !!iir,ri a ride of ii.e 2[ descnr' fin; 11 re !'' ) iiuUu APPENDIX. 'J09 when we say, - The earth smiles with plenty " or ' a c Kseasc i.rlrrnjul ;" sneh expressions shew the 1 icihty with which the mind can assimilate the pro- r't'-^ ol hvmg creatures to thinj^s inanimate J hero are many examples ofit in Scripture • as' '• Ihe sra saw it and fled." - Tremble thou earth at (he presence oi the r.ord." - The deserl shall re- ,ice ami blossom as tiie rose." The descriptions of y^.9oo.v/m Homer, tame in Vir^nl, and of Z).«/A and •V.'i HI i.Iilton, are fme instances of this finure I oets m general abound with it : as, The ivorm aware of his intent harangued him.— i.un-per. iJark, inilh proclaims thy triumphs cca?e. ^ighcUon's sc//doplores thy youthful doom — Bijron. Mean nl.Kc;s r.i.-.uIJ ^Jnerally not be prrpon Cy .!. ps ,I,.v arc disagreeable when ihey a.'suine hv;,,^ /or.ns. Thu-u.on -n ier.oi„ry,„g i!,e low a,>peines of Hunger and T/aVs/, secns I'J liave used ti.is hgme iiiiproperlv : '■■ Tlien sated riunorer, bids bis brother Thirst, Produce the niightj bowl." Erotesis or iNTF.RRoQATroN, is a ngurc, which jv adopting the form of questions, gives spirit and Igor to languanre. [t i.s often used in -S.-.ripture : as • Hast thou an arm like God, or ra.ist thou thuiKler Alt., a voic' like him.^" " Ifnfh the Lord said it Rnd .s!iall he not do it ? Hath ho spoken it ar d ^l':dl he l^A make it good .'" It is used by'muiiv u!-icr \vi iters : as, ■' Ho.v could you promise love to me, and not that promise keep ( How could you swear mine were bright, yet leave these eyes to weep .'"' — Malkt. ' Cicero in a speech against Catiline, says. Ho V long will you Catiline abuse our patience ! IV it! I'>if» S/\.*» ? s.. jroui utBiuua aic lUscoveicQ 300 Ari'EVDIX. ITf miirii! havo said, "Yon abn^-p onr pitienne lonif, Voi] roust bn ctinxible (!)••»'. your (leei<;n« are (iiscovcred " Hut !l)i>* lat- ter mode of o\i)resSion, falls ehoit ol tlie force and velipiii'-nce of the former. AposTRonrr. or Excr, amatio\, i<5 (ho rfToct of stronjjj etiidtioii, wlion an animatful address is made to, or abotit soijictliing : as, " () tiiat my head wore waters, and mino eyes a f'onntaia oi tears, that 1 might \ve'^')dav aiul niiihl, lor thn slain ol'tlio dau^h- ters ol'iny people." — Jcrcyii. " O lii.xMty ! O.srujti once delightCnl to every Roman ear ! O revered privilege of a lloinan citizen ! now trauiidud up on." — Cicero. ^^'hen ExclumationB are jidiciouslf employed they •'gitaie the hearer wiih simiiar pa*-a:i)()-i to tiie speak'T ; bui youtj:i ptr- rions fie'juenlly f.iil in ihi^ figure, by calling on ^pRclritors to eiitcr into iheir transports, wlwn nothing isj satJ or doi.e to exc.te ,einoUon. Antithesis exhibits a contrast or opposition oi o^jjects. It is often found in Scripture, in suc!i ex- pressions as, " As in Adam all die, so in Christ shall all be made alive " " As by one man's diso- bedience, many were made sinners ; so by the oho- dience of one, shall many be made Ri;^hteous." The following is a fine instance of it : Tho' poor, luxurious : tho' submissive, vain, 'i'ho' grave, yet trifini^- : zealous, yet ntitruc * And e'en in penance planning sins anew. — Uukhinilli. Climax or Amtlific ation, is the augmenting or hoight'Miing of any object or action as it by suc(;os- sive stops : as, " Add to your faith virtue ; and lo virtue knowledge, and lo knowledge temperance and '.o tompcraiicc patience, and to patience Godli ncss, SvC." — -' Peter i. o. " It is a (rime to |)ut a Koman citizen in bonds. It is the height of gui't to scourge him ; little less than parricide to put hinito death : what name then shall I give to the act ct APPENDIX. 301 disc- Paraltpms or OMISSION, is aftgure in vlii, luho speaker pretends to hide, what ho strona|v (iorlaro-;- as, "He was once a noble youth, but in process of tune he has become a gambler, not lo yienH-n A;'? (triuiL-enness and debaucheries, by which he has '-<.- haustcd hi3 estate, and ruined liis lieallh.' Vision- or Imacehy, is a figure by wlrch iho speaker describes the scenes of his ima 'inatio-, -, • eally acted before his eyes. Thus Cioero in m oi-ation against Catiline: " I seem to behold tiu.s -ity the ornament of the earth, the capital of ai! nations s;idJrnly involved in one conHac^riiiion. f s'ce !)c- fore me the slaughtered heaps of citizens, iyin'r un- buned. The furious countenance of Ceth('M]s''r'3r-s torny view, while, with a savage jo>', he i-j tVxumn; - ing in your miserirs." " ' I now, is a figure by whicli quite the VGvcr^« oi what we say is meant. It is common to snv ofu ne r. ligent person, " you are very careful indeed." Wo have a remarkable instance of this figure in Scripture' when Elijah mocked the Priests 'of Baa!, .sain^' " Cry aloud for he is a God ; he is on a^journey' or neradventure he sleepeth, and must be av.a'-.cd '' Cicero in his oration for Balbus, derides iii.:! ac .-user saying, " O excellent interpreter of the law ! mas- ter of antiquity ! corrector and ameuder of our cou- •■^tiiution." Ironical exhortation, is an ajj eeab!e figure, wliich aftrr having set ihe troubles or inconveniencing ol a iii.ifr, m tho clearest light, conclu(*es with a fe;g,ie,J encoarag '.-^c.'i o p^i- 'UR It : as, Horace after describing tliu {:rpat noise .>.ii(! tumjit^ o( Rome. adJa Iroa:«ii!iy, '« Go now, a:i.'5luJy u^tJu, verse at Konie." 302 A K E V, TO THE EXERCISES OF FALSE SYNTAX. ■RCLE I.— . //M.llpboy. Jhonsp. .?;j -'^ iiorse. J ewer. J/t clejry. .i eulogy. J unison tun- natural union, .in uncle, ^hi aunt. J., inlilel. .hi owl. .-i howlini: dog. .it humble man. Jn hospital, .in liorbali.st. Sucli a one. ./ one eyed poison. A once lamed general, .i historical rela- tion, .i hysteric lit. RILE II.— 7Vit; love of money is a root. Hope is the anchor. Tkc virtues and ilw vices — form a great contrast lie had Ihc consolations. Miracles, nature and fate— under the Deity. The influence of ilie stars, is an obsolete science. Under the appear- ance. The Juno and INIinerva The loss, or Ihe disappointment — occasioned a total derangement. — London has the Thames, and Paris the Seine. Italy and the Sicilies— to enrthnuakes. The Ut\e of Duke. Tha: -):' Governor. Tim' of Lord Protector. Fire, water, air, and earth—ai '•• four elements of Phi- losophers. Either //ic en-i /.'means. An orange than o;i apple. Species oi' animal called o unicorn. With constancy, though a renurd be distant. Vir- tues like his. Called fora little severity. Few per- ;sons pitied him. Man is the noblest. TVtf? heathens placed us under a trial. ^lore than ordinary. >'ot a meteor, but a luminary, dispenses a benign in- fluence. The carriages formerly used. But poor at Ihe best. At ihr day ot Judgement. ni'T T TII T Inv,' ei-ir^ncp \'on l.-nnir nothinfT. Thou do'it always. Contain forty pound: P auis KEV TO FALSE ISYNTAX, 303 have been taken. Thou sitouldst love. Er. teds six- teen millions. A mixture was in his conduct, lluvt the goods been sold. Thou Hccst clothed in purple ,s happy. There nov more equivocators than one IMfchunism ot watciies was Jinknown. \'ariety of obje-ts charmn the eye. Hope «-iJv-s consolation . He 7iceds not proceed. Fields increase our store. A- bnndance niahrs u.s wish. Ability and merit are sel- dom found. JMie sincere are esteemed. The bravt- dt serve the fair. 'J'he generous never recount. Support of relations hy/.s a heavy ta.x. Xothing bui foolish pursuits delights, f'onditions 9s were consis- tent. He dares not act. JIc being killctl //< dts- ccudiu'T. RLTI.E IV. — Wages of John is one guinea Pavilion were dark waters. Controversy was hi.s chief enjoyment. Fidelity ce)ders the happmess. W hole sum was seventy five. Principal and inter- est were not one pound, hi unity consist the welfare and peace. In which were concentrated. RULE V. —Often rc(piires great exertion. Is required of all, C'ojjs/)7n/t's the great principle. Is required of every person, .^rt reasonable to be- lieve, dre the means of becoming hapj>y. RUFE VI.— Xobilify xvere killed. Time and Ude wait for no man. In harmony and uiiit\ consist. Politeness and good dispositions t/iarj/j. Diligence and activity are the road. What sio-nij'ij the counsel and care of preceptors. High pleasures 6(<>t/lan- gour. One and nineteen make twenty. Horror //// his mind. Accompany it wer/written.' Patrwt li'ccs m that house. JVas burnt up. Virtue and happi- ness dwell with mediocrity. Proceed blessing and cursing. He and I are to do this. RULE VIL— Charles nor Peter Anons. Happ.- to be your own Jot. But revenge was the cause — i04 KEY TO FALSE SYNT.VX. lMi'4 liij iliiil 1 ^! 1 |i ilovpj-sn of fortune ofects us. lie nor you ims there. As 1 and Charles is hated. Js capable ol embit- tering. RULE VIII. — Joseph iS mistaken, I (tm now sure. Thou undtrslandeil this business He niidn- stands this .science. I or thou ort the person. Tl.ou and \vc arc blamed. He or I am blamed. The) or v.e arc named Thou who lold the lies. RLUE IX. — Captain nor sailors tvn-e saved. — The sclu)lar.s n-irc present. His servants drurrrc our thanks. These men were engaged in this (.(m- spiracy. Riches often ruins virtuous principles.— Poverty nor riches xucre injurious, lie nor they have complied. RULE X. — The meeting ira/i hirgc. The court hnn just ended. The crowd vas so great. 'J'he church has no power. The council u-ere not unani- mous. Of an army icere marching. Half of this de- tachment were slain. The committee was very full. The committee weve divided. The fleet icas .se(Mi sailmg. The fleet are arrived, except three. The flock is or ought to be. Shoal of herrings t/rrs im- mense. The majority was di.sposed. Corporation consist of mayor, alderman and council. The re- giment consists of. People rejoice in that should give //lem sorrow. Parliament js composed. When the nation cnmplains. Why does this genera! ion "Vvish. As the Jewisii nation ivas. fVasiUc senate consulted. Blessed are the people that knoiv. Rem- nant of the people icas persecuted. RULE XI. — Raiment which was in the lioM.«e. Si.xth has lost his life. *S7it; overset and lost most ot /ie>* men. In the colour of /n'.s species. Tender ot his reputation. Sun shines in his splendour. .Acti- vity of i^s thoughts. Have iJifir run partassigrud ihcm to act. Let Moses sprinkle (liem, and tin u slinl U _ _ _ „-- IlitXIIll^- -•- * ■■ themselves in his face. Hnow or icc when thfj nu;It. KEV TO FALSE SYNTAX. 30.^ RILE XII. — Vou should give some of your substance, ^'ot to give, is not i/otir*. Of what i« not ihijie. Vou wept and I tor yon. More conveni- ent I will see yoH. I mourn your absence. Kctu yourselj pure. RL LE XIII.— Anstides was a very just man i hougli man has great variety ol^ thoughts This f.rcident did really happen. Whoever has such ai. idea IS wrong. The show bread which is not lawful to eat. Afflictions, though hard to bo borne, oltcu improve us. These accusations he seemed not dis- posed to retract. The wicked men, fiie Lord hatii destroyed from among you. Gad, a troop shall over- come. When they had washed thev laid in an upper tiiamber. South and Xorth thou' hast created.— Lotty city he layeth low. III. LK XIV'. — Whetiier it was he or anotlier. These thieves stole it away. It mined whencve; we were walking thither. It teas the Romans. H ,.',. m- lullows. He did not think it worth while to enquire filter. It is better to plant now, than dcjav a week longer. Until the contagion reduces the blood to a putrid fermentation. Rl LE X\'— .'f7;o shall be smt to adrr.otii.>^h, U kn can bubsi.st by themselves. He to wlwu, wuch i< given. /Miojii conscience and virtue support. liiey ul>o have laboured— are the persons wla.u we: might to love, and to wko,n we ought to be grateliil. The student to iclioia I gave the book — and *!(•..- de- serves it. JV'tusocvcr entertains such on op-.-.m. We irliom he knows, and with ukoin he associates. Oi whom were the articles bought .' Of hi,a amo r* - •sides near the (|uav. To nhom was themonev naid W iio counted it ! ' Tlie clerk and he. Kl LE \\l — Tiie man ir/;c»/i I esteem Cfsn ic UL.-.-r^r! =;./. tl I i\ t. L M i iiC "\ icO Hi lie lion uhuh souittimes destrov Z 2 s man. P P!-- 1 h ' e . tthi 306 KEV TO FALSE SYNTAX, \^% l| if seek wisdom. The misery {onhich we are rcdiirfd The census of the people u-liicli they took, iiliat man or beast could live. fVliick ot those men — Members of the Senate it'/io were proscribed. C\ i us asked him riho that God was of tr/iom he l»c^«^ed. INIillions of people tc/jo cannot read. As the Leasts! trhich they hunt. Thou who hast been a witness. JVhosc name was but another word for cruelly. IIUI.K XVII.— Moses was the meekest m;m Jhat we read of. ll'^st (Governor dial Ireland IkmI. Excellent writer Hial took a pen. The man and horse i/jfiMve saw. Amiable viitues tJial we possess — Men and lliinjis Ihat he has studied. Same persons ihat assisted us. Hampden I'at with datiuilcss breast. Ran the same risk that Italy had done.— ■\Vho is the man lIuU dares say. All thai beaut v. jiU ikat wealth e'er gave. Those children lliat we iiiive .*;een. C\u)i] iiial was put to nurse. l>easl of prey Uhal destroys. RUT.F. XVIII.— Who (uloi)ls that sentiment. Has often relieved me, and has not deserted me — "Who L)ld me tlie truth. Who haul cultivated them. A man wlio recouimeiuls to others — or v. ho ohjin([\ k sou that all men. Battle iiko n.s- iif did — ■'i'hd! he cauno; eusAue. Persons a^ act the hypo- KtV TO FALsr, SYNTAX, 507 rritc. A part n,? Caliirnla did. Siiarp ipplies a.n cost. Such persons as slander. niiJ'i XXI. — Tfi'fi down to n speck of earth, that opens a prospect. These barelcet, hurt by Hioac ."harp stones. Tlu.i causes miserv. thai creates hap- piness— love ihcjomu-r and halcthe latt,:)-. Those houses on the opposite— larger than these on this — i'iie /«//*>)• an act, f!ie /omer a liahit. Sor ihis a "jood, nor /Aa/ a bad. In Ihls 'tis (Jod dirrcts, m ilial man. My puuc uitli tiiese my' love with tliose. Ill LE XXn. — Hecn licrc thn^i ton days ■ T/z/spair ol bracrlet.s. Xirujfs are Ihosf of honor Jiud integrity. Thai soi t ol' i.ivonr.s. 77/ (s kind of indiilfronccs. Itulustrioiis to nuike //. A pair ofnew shoes, a pair ori»ow i^lovcfi :~olo ricii old man.— Twenty Jvet broad— one htmdrfd julhuuts in depth, liorrowed five millions of pound.',. llight hnndrtd men. 'Jhe fir.st two are cherry trees, the other two l"ar trees. Saw one person or more than one enter. \\[, Lie X\lil. — By tins mruiisUe rendered — Hv //t,,sv' means bcfame rich. liy /A/s means was f'steemed. Indusirv is tlie nurnis. Fo satire, and \iy these mean.s. I'ruj^al and sober, and b\ Ihesc means. A mrans I will nut adopt. 'Jiu; mean be- !ueon the mcasiiie.s. I' iigen.;rouv imans obtained. Hv Hirsf news tiio .-ity. Ample (intends tor his loss. liy Hilsc alms obtai(;ed. TU Li. XX1\. — Euclio was more polislnd — vot iiis conversation more pn, ,ile and vapid, and he ^y-d'^llie in osl foolish. Ottlie strictest sect . Appear- •mI more feeling- tiian Clio. — was tiie uwsl rieunis, and oitcu more an^i'ij at tritles, — hi.s countenance— the "lov/ />;<./,//::,/ appearanre. \irtue confers supreme •iiiinity — siiould l)e (7;(f/ desire. 1 1 is assertion was '"//t»- /o(//u/' ,/ tiian that — words of liie latter not true. Jiisvvoik Vveii fv.'cuied. iiis brotiier's belter, liis 'utlier"s the be.sl of all. It is easier to build two .S08 KEY TO FALSE SVNTVX. h The /ms weight. Ploasurrs of nndpistanding. arc preferable to that. Ilcrs is the sweetest voice. — The most /y'^/i hath created us. RMLl': XXV. — Prove tho likeliest of any — 1 understood him the best of all. Kve was Juirrr than all. TUc slrou^tr of the two. but not the iv>str.\ No other element than war. It was the Huialltxt of i these. Of the scholar //i«n the name. jSo more I'lan what he deserves. No sooner risen tlian (hey went. Nothing farther lluin to be praised. RUI.E: XXV'I.— a man's mnnnets influence.— L'id'h'H formed — called the La(/(cs' society. Jio.r\\ lid is broken. Hot h 6o.i-fthe ship and cargo's | being saved. Jofin\H as well as .Maria's book.*^.— I (iained the k'uv^'s as well as peojde's iipprobation. Tor conxcicnce' sake. Alexander the Cirtul's history. King James the first's hi.story. ,liigustm'^ .Senate durst not. Covered with asset' skins. For Htro"\ (/in,-!' sake. A{ Jonr\ i\\p jtrinttr and boudhiiultv — | Lord Helville's. my I'riend, patron and bt ncjoilvr.— l Tiie grand C/ru- Selims At the iiovtrnor's the A'n/i:'s representative. Tiiey are C«rro'5, tlie most eloquent of //ifu. Tho govcMnent of the world is not lelt. She married the son oftlie brother of my s-ms | wife. House ot the partner ot my wife's brother, Kstate ofthe rorporatiun is mcuiiibered. The advice: both ofthe Phvsician and Surgeon. Extent uf Uic; King of Kngland's prcroirative. Picture ofthe l\niii\ does" not resemble. Pictures ol tiie /v'//i- '.s were sent, 'i'line of lt'illiaiv'< making the experiment. Of Vojitk's associating with \i.-i<>us. And Its bur.>t- in«T caii»;ed the shin- O'oevcd the mandates of the Protector as ihev cuiicu imii. KEV TO K.VI.^F. «\.\TAX. 309 RL'I.r XXVII. — It IS / niul not fir. It is lie iiHlt;c'(l. It was /tc and not ///< 7. Ii' I wore //«•. I took It to bo //,',•. It wns not wc who did it. Is it possible to be llion who did that Irna<;iiie it to have Ixrn Hue. U it ua.s not ln\ vfiom do you iniagme. fy/toin do you think liiin. If'/.o do people sav we arc. It i.s to be ihci- who i.s to build. The inaii ' ulio„i it was said. The man ivltum I understood. The Scnp- iiires, tiiey arc luiij which testily. Rrr.?: XX\T1I — Deba.so both li'ni, and Inr — - Pxith Inm and llmu to be slain. Ynu who were dead, ihe man whom lie raised. Dotroy both t/n> and //(/•• ///»» vvho was so yood. //;//< and I'uni we know. Illm who conunitied — eorreet — not uif. In- vited brother and me to see. Publius is to kill ht-r. MAojrt can we love, as them who iiave endeavoured. T'inii idiom he had most injured. Il'/inm I love I will choose, jf'lii-e only have 1 chosen. (rAoj/i did ihev entertain. The friend whom you must receive, and naom you • jt too highly esteem fVhom should I meet. IVhomsaevcr he meets. Ifhom shall we send. Uhomjoever the King favours. To a^'grandize Ihtm- :elcfs. I must premise this circumstance. He will o:ie day repent ot such. Endeavour to niuke the par- ties agree. Weary he .sat down. RLLEXXIX. — What is become of virtue. — liad example had ceased. Rivals hare af Itnoih agreed. 1 am come according to time, but I "m tallen upon an evil hour. He had entered into llie cuMiiexiou. Rf 'LK XX\.— Xot lo walk loo Iiastilv. Wish iiiin not to wrestle. ^Ve onglit /o lorgive. .Not wish /" obtrude, ^eed not solicit him. I dare not pro- ceed. Vouiig persons conduct themselves. Ob- serve him turn pale. Hade him go awav. better lo ive on a little. Makes us approve the one and re- iiiiiiit.; tjiic i/CiiCvg liii.-. i'ait'st eld -.i.„ tliou leap, and .>5wiin to yonder point. You bel 310 M-.Y TO FAF.SF. syNFAX. u« rrtrcnt. 1 hoard hitnioil it. Known hifii Ki!! Iwo f'liVPrt b'oW iiiimliiirss < it-ep (tvtr. r«i(«'iv« it iiiovf I'lcurc lurbui llu^ iiirtrijaye. Let uic now yo llOlllC. Kl LK XWI— Hn good that you »»«'/ be hap- py I tiotitd lulher stay Ke Hiat as it in'iij II \\c. !/•(;'//(( gratiiy tne. I shall //nc /;*•»»• at school. He Vds tbrmerlv disoidci Iv, hut as yet lu' has hn n tegu- lar, ile that hud (>■ , n tirad Hfcan^e tliey /iwr. tunt'imipdv.\{\\ me. .\ ot thiuiv that he would do this I'caretl she would dit. The work ivas (i(ii->hed. la this Cathodral hn% hcen |iie8orv» our superfluities Scrupulous in the keeping ot \our word. Censor's disapproving of the oratois Not attending to tliis rule. (Jut misunderstanding '/ the directions. By his reading book.s. RULE XXXV.-Wishnd to l.nvo wnHcn-^ ITavc chosen the path. Kvcnts had nol JhlUn out so. riiat ho liad slolev. \'icc3 liave broLnt his health lie had misink^tn his interest.s, Inund iiimsrir /,,,- ^(df/t. That lias been calen. Was itoroj throuj^h- oiit. Not yet H'orn o(Y. 1 was sheu-n St. PeteT's. I had never Known linn Has borne a part. liave uiidtrrrone distress. Language is sy/u/.y/j m Europe. Land has risen in value. Was twice frozen. I.(»id was troddrn to death. Husiness not well rxeeuh,! . Have td/ciu improper liberties. And ilrank wiih n\i- •illy. Leariii;;g o'er ran. T!io (iofljs betian. Jn- Jiistry is wanUd. Has su-orn solemnly. And so iio 'li'l. It. I have seen him. lie taiktd and sdimpuL RILE XXXVI.— William acted nobly. Wo may live happily. Seldom or ever. Cannot thor<'- i'tiebe impertinent and ridiculous. A boy educatid -0 well, impossible — at work continually. He wil! always be discontented. To invite the King bai-k and call his friends together. We .^liou'd aiwa\.s prefer. Are perpetually in motion. On a laiiier cursory. Engrossed and totallv overcome. R( LE XXX V^H. — He was not often pleasing. ^^hlcil not being admitted. Should never be sepa- rated. Ao Sovereign wa.s ever .so. Children not only in health. He never comes at a proper tin.o. Not having known or not iiavinir considered. I never run any. iNot knowing of. 1 tell you nay. -My hands ever so clean. RULE XXXVIII. —I cannot do more work. V ou will never be wiser. 'ovo neither riclies, 112 Kr.y TO r.u.sE -^vniax. l.onors, nor nnn such. -Nor take (my shape. Be admitted under «???/ circuiiist.-inccs. EUlier at pre- seutor at any time. C«u be nothing more insifrnih- cant. (iot nothing om/ moie, Nor let omj comfor- ter. XothiM. 1 shall go //h7/jo\ Come //t'./.tv to day. Hrin;.,Mhoso hook°hU'ier. MVjert have they been. Jl A./Ziej- have Vrill he lodge there. ile is expected fhev "one. he) e. ' r.l" r.E XL.— S'lC read^ ;r,-n;.<')-,'//, '.vritcs nealhj and composes accnralf'.]]. V/as txlrnnchj nrodisal, — now ii-ar/i/ exhausted. Lived lOhformubhj to the rules. ^Va.i cvcc^'duiglii beloved. Speaks ver; ^hient- hj, reads excellenll'j, — "not think cohercnlij. Was ex- crl'dui}:;!!^ carei'ul. 3Iore eauUi discovered He is liLchj to be a useful. None could fght more bohJij. or behave more ,iobl:;. AiVinn mo," slron'j^l'j. Speak moi-r nobhj. For llvj jrcii'.wni mlh-mities. Conf?rma- hie to their vehemence. Likely to take quuUst and deepest root. For a f^peedj and prosperous end. Says fxp-esslij he saw. PtULL '^'I-L — Not at Die he is displeased, - Fach for himsclj. WiUmgly and of llicmselces . I know not ir/iom in the rompan. . To poor us. Al- ter /tim or tr.^om else. I'ndcr Peter or whom. Not ttuo' .lames but lliee. Pjetween him and me, not be- tween her and me- Will walk witii yon- Shot beyond nie and /ii'm also- For u7iom is lie so warmly. Boy know to whom he speaks- Not wit.i ulm ihey were so angry. Commit crime, and them who abhor From whom did he receive. Angi^-with ri'liomsotvi' asks. Refused entrance into the house, and forcibly \N KCY TO FALSE SYNTAX. 313 driven from it. I wrote to the General and warned him ot'his dangnr. RI'^LK XI, IT. — Dopnndorit n?j the. Accused by Cesar. AI)liorrcr.ce of. DiiTvr Jrom. JJill'crcnt {mm what. Complied irilh. Diicouragoment io. Consonant to — in conlorinity to. l'..i(>;;i, blame. Diliiculty in allowing. Conversant ;',',' Ijotany, Observer of charms. Exception to iho riiic. Or,(5 exception from tlic fMiiipr. Call 011 Charles. Wait on nie. T;ike no exce[)tion of my iVeeuom. Were martyrs /'ij- the. Formed into a Phalanx. Preserved /'•''^h tcm[)iations. (.'hange /'■ r the workc. Chan:^e imo what shape. Cliaiigcd i/iln a lly. Dibiculty in do- iiiff. Boasts much 0/' friends. Hrag 0/ wealth. A- "♦Msc to using means. INkuit in an evening. Doc- tirs d'liVcvfrom caJi other. Long is it t.iiwc he died. Aot long o//t>' that time. Seen throngh bij those. Sell this at. Honor lies at stpko. Pe^an tit Cyrus. xNo (langeryroiame. Went -,*/ the nai.'ie. Descend- ed/row the Royal. Acted thr.vyji revenge. Fell j'.'.(/t/- his inspection. A treatise o?t Grammar. hJliot btsidf {\\G mark. Provided ici/'/i an answer. Bridge veer this riv«^r. Deliberates on going. Freed //-ym the evils. Divided amon^- tliree Divided hctivccn James and Peter. Convicted 0/ perjury . Connived f// treachery. Dominion or; r Spain. Governed 6?/ a IVIayor. Independent of China. Descended into the cellar. Built f)/ marble. No enconragement/ar industry. Adorned 7n7/t grace. Reduced beneath notice. Famous/or his conspiracy. Astonished at this news. Compared to Cesrr. Glad at my cala- mities. Glad nj your company. Unison witk our nature. Prevail npon him. Aspire at something. Adverse to his actions, \i\ry from yvuv word. <-'verrun ivitk thi-tles. Rejoiced at my success. — 31 I KEY TO FALSE SYNTAX. I Annexed to France. Kxclaimrd rr^a/.-rs/ these condi- tions. Di.stiii^uishcdyor liis hravL-ry. Intrinpe un ru]v3. rrrjudico ag-ftuis/ Religion. Ucducc'd Cailli- agc nmlcr !icr yoke. lleduco a viiliiar frnction /o a decimal. IJostow bounty vpini aiuitlicr. Coini>ly wi//ithiscominaniJ. Ps'o disparagement /(^ them, ^o derogation froni their station. CoverntHJ hy the Verb. Cel'ia <'i(;d /oj-iovo. lie died o/ grief. Died 0/ a fever. Died 67 a stroke. Dissdit Jr^m you. Adapted /o tiiispuriiose. Navigable/ar boats. No exception lo tiiis proposal. Revenue is abuve one million. RULE XLIIT. — Gave mo no meat. Give mc ^v]lat is mine. Tell mc the truth. refch me the inkstand. Hand mc that book. Lend mo five pounds. Scni me the present. Sell me your horse. Brinw mc : ight. Get him a book. Taught thee to write. Write him on this subject. Give the hor.i!;e him ///c hotter. \Vith(/?i unim]>roved or a conu-pted mind. JCssay on the in- terests of the body and the mind. ?s'oiu; hut the in- tGl!i<;cr/. ..'vJ alt( ntive. Dictates of virtue and of honor. JMay gain an estate, but cannot ;^:un friends. JVu//ii;ti^ that is diilicult can be accomplislied. 'J'bo negligent hjc/i of pleasure. Hy the success or failure of an entcrprize. Aflectiouate brother and sister. Into extreme distress and perplexity. Too great severity, or too ^Tt'a/ facility. In the ciicumstanccs in which I was. Produce great gain or great los3. His reputation and estate. Excited not only our hopes, but excUcd our fears also. But he is religious too. IVhotrer would loam this science. By vanity "we provoke enmity, and by it, we incur contempt. Saluted every man and woman there. Several men who died of the scurvy. All those ivho Kcrc possess- ed. Some prolit and .sojHt' amusement. Will reward our toils, and produce unexpected good. Recom- pensed even in this life. They who sow and thcij who reap will rejoice. Still more, he reus a true christian. They arc serious and very studious. But they t'itl not arrive. \Viil be often rutlled and disturbed. Commend as well as censure imprudently. And /jfi<' mind acts upon bod> . Never be engaged in it again. What they only blushed at b<;fore. Could not for- KEY TO FAJ 5E SYNTAX, nn mprly be prompted lo. U a ta«x vliicli a man pays the public. IJriiig your mitid dnicn to vuur estate. So- ciety of n)on, as Ihcij are mixed with jtrood and evil, lluriiaii life is mixed with good and evil. Ilelations take place of masters and servants, husbands and wives, parents and children Itegarded neitlier his family, his friends, nor his reputation. Xor life, r. Never has had, nor never shall be allowed, 2G Viiuce acted so iveaUij. 21. So small //la/ you need not. 2S. Led astray than 7^. ^29, Have Ihcir peculiar customs. .30. Jl'ill be that we shall bccomo iinhaj>py. .31. In which are now centered, 32. ^thnl spirit was that Ji/iii/t the witch raisecj. .33. Constantly attending to this business. 3 i. \Vas\ery gicat. 3o, All I'j^urd lo decency. 36. Suprdiw© f5I8 KEY TO FALSE SYNTAX. lieinjT tr.'if) fjovorns tlie wnrld. 37. Women, jrwols and iiioacy, Ihnl v.-ro in. 33. She .sii(.'\v( (J little amotion. .3 >. Year alter yoar passrs away. 40. Thtxt liappnut, scvms tho cli'i.'rt. '11. It is not mc xchoin lie wishes t-) wed. 12. ?Vol only his iVirruli }eave him, but hi:^ wife too Icavo.s him. 13. Many years in London his died (it lionic 4t 'Ihe poor yo have always uilli !jou. 43. From a stat<' as had a» bankruptcy, if not" worse. 4G. liitir. 4!5. Wii-.ther it could hr /;t' or not. 49. Admired the dress and noble air of the o//iie?-, as we thou;tht liim. 50. Senate neve divided m opinion. 51. Free, from this crime. 52. JTerc you present. 5). If he (s honest. 51. S.iw no man but /lixi. 55. When shall I ever see him a;;ain. 5G. Xot the ut- tering or healing of pious words, that conslitules. 57. It' the hea>t ((ccoi!}]>(niics not — ofler //(.• sacriticc of fools. 53. If //ley be allowed to proceed. o'J. Taut it does not contain. GO. .•?n/ of these throe ex- tremes Mill be pernicious. Gi. 'J'hey wi.i or JJo^ 62. On the one sine are the army, on the other num- bers of wild beasts. G3. Once fi.xed a line /o our moral conduct — not to transgress that iinc. 64. Would have been my duty to rcli)0. Prison woii;, and additions /o (/. 1. I*,y ///js means Ijeranic lich. U5. O ! pity, O .' virtue. !»n HV^o raisclli the dead. 97. I inujit sunnnon l!ie (-thers. f>3. As //(^'/ ol" Trance Sj.ain, or Ifaiy. 00. John's ball is more of a round shape. 100. Xot goin-z to school— cause ol tiiia /wy'.s bein^T flojr^rod 10!. Wishes tl:e salvation r/ the whole human race. 102 'J hey hcd pr*>po.'=td to visit the city, but /rw not yet arrived. lO.-J. Crliu is a vain v.-otaau, '.vliom il'we do not llafd r will iie 'l':^Ud. ••9**